Civil PDF

FULL TIME, SANDWICH & PART TIME
Course Code: 1010, 2010 & 3010
L - SCHEME
DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION

GOVERNMENT OF TAMILNADU
DIPLOMA COURSES IN ENGINEERING/TECHNOLOGY
(SEMESTER SYSTEM)
(Implemented from 2011- 2012)
L – SCHEME
R E G U L A T I O N S*
* Applicable to the Diploma Courses other than Diploma in Hotel Management & Catering
Technology and the Diploma Courses offered through MGR Film Institute, Chennai.
1. Description of the Course:
a. Full Time (3 years)
The Course for the Full Time Diploma in Engineering shall extend over a period of three
academic years, consisting of 6 semesters* and the First Year is common to all
Engineering Branches.
b. Sandwich (3½ years)
The Course for the Sandwich Diploma in Engineering shall extend over a period of three
and half academic years, consisting of 7 semesters* and the First Year is common to all
Engineering Branches. The subjects of three years full time diploma course being regrouped
for academic convenience.
During 4th and/or during 7th semester the students undergo industrial training for six months/
one year. Industrial training examination will be conducted after completion of every 6
months of industrial training
c. Part Time (4 years)
The course for the Part Time Diploma in Engineering shall extend over a period of 4
academic years containing of 8 semesters*, the subjects of 3 year full time diploma
courses being regrouped for academic convenience.
* Each Semester will have 16 weeks duration of study with 35 hrs. /Week for Regular
Diploma Course and 18 hrs. / Week for Part-Time Diploma Course.
The Curriculum for all the 6 Semesters of Diploma courses (Engineering & Special Diploma
Courses viz. Textile Technology, Leather Technology, Printing Technology, Chemical
Technology etc.) have been revised and revised curriculum is applicable for the candidates
admitted from 2011 – 2012 academic year onwards.
2|P a g e
2. Condition for Admission:
Condition for admission to the Diploma courses shall be required to have passed in
The S.S.L.C Examination of the Board of Secondary Education, Tamilnadu.
(Or)
The Anglo Indian High School Examination with eligibility for Higher Secondary Course in
Tamilnadu
(Or)
The Matriculation Examination of Tamil Nadu.
(Or)
Any other Examinations recognized as equivalent to the above by the Board of
Secondary Education, Tamilnadu.
Note: In addition, at the time of admission the candidate will have to satisfy certain
minimum requirements, which may be prescribed from time to time.
3. Admission to Second year (Lateral Entry):
A pass in HSC ( Academic )# or ( Vocational ) courses mentioned in the Higher Secondary

Schools in Tamilnadu affiliated to the Tamilnadu Higher Secondary Board with eligibility for
university Courses of study or equivalent examination, & Should have studied the following
subjects
H.Sc Academic H.Sc Vocational

Sl.
Courses Subjects Studied
No Subjects Studied
Related subjects Vocational subjects
1. All the Maths, Physics & Chemistry Maths / Physics / Related Vocational
Regular and Chemistry Subjects Theory &
Sandwich Practical
Diploma
Courses
2. Diploma English & Accountancy English & Accountancy &
Course in Accountancy, Auditing,
English &
Modern Office
Elements of Economics English & Elements of Banking,
Practice
Economics,
English & Business Management,
Elements of Commerce English &
Co-operative
Management
Management,
Principles
& Techniques, International Trade,
English & Typewriting Marketing &
Salesmanship,
Insurance &
Material Management,
Office Secretary ship.
# Subject to the approval of the AICTE
 For the Diploma Courses related with Engineering/Technology, the related / equivalent subjects
prescribed along with Practicals may also be taken for arriving the eligibility.
3|P a g e
 Branch will be allotted according to merit through counseling by the respective Principal as per
communal reservation.
 For admission to the Textile Technology, Leather Technology, Printing Technology, Chemical
Technology and Modern Office Practice Diploma courses the candidates studied the related
subjects will be given first preference.
 Candidates who have studied Commerce Subjects are not eligible for Engineering Diploma
Courses.
4. Age Limit:No Age limit.
5. Eligibility for the Award of Diploma:
No candidate shall be eligible for the Diploma unless he/she has undergone the prescribed
course of study for a period of not less than 3 academic years in any institution affiliated to
the State Board of Technical Education and Training, Tamilnadu, when joined in First Year
and two years if joined under Lateral Entry scheme in the second year and passed the
prescribed examination.
The minimum and maximum period for completion of Diploma Courses are as given
Below:
Minimum
Diploma Course Maximum Period
Period
Full Time 3 Years 6 Years
Full Time(Lateral Entry) 2 Years 5 Years
Sandwich 3½ Years 6½ Years
Part Time 4 Years 7 Years
6. Subjects of Study and Curriculum outline:
The subjects of study shall be in accordance with the syllabus prescribed from time to time,
both in theory and practical subjects. The curriculum outline is given in Annexure - I
7. Examinations:
Board Examinations in all subjects of all the semesters under the scheme of examinations
will be conducted at the end of each semester.
The internal assessment marks for all the subjects will be awarded on the basis of
continuous internal assessment earned during the semester concerned. For each subject
25 marks are allotted for internal assessment and 75 marks are allotted for Board
Examination.
4|P a g e
8. Continuous Internal Assessment:
A. For Theory Subjects:

The Internal Assessment marks for a total of 25 marks, which are to be distributed as
follows:
i) Subject Attendance 5 Marks

(Award of marks for subject attendance to each subject Theory/Practical will
be as per the range given below)
80% - 83% 1 Mark

84% - 87% 2 Marks
88% - 91% 3 Marks
92% - 95% 4 Marks
96% - 100% 5 Marks
#
ii) Test 10 Marks
2 Tests each of 2 hours duration for a total of 50 marks are to
be conducted. Out of which the best one will be taken and the
05 marks
marks to be reduced to:
The Test – III is to be the Model test covering all the five units
and the marks so obtained will be reduced to : 05 marks
Total 10 marks
WHEN TO
TEST UNITS MARKS DURATION
CONDUCT
Test End of 6th
Unit – I & II 50 2 Hrs
I week
Test End of 12th
Unit – III & IV 50 2 Hrs
II week
Model Examination - Compulsory
Test End of 16th
Covering all the 5 Units. 75 3 Hrs
III week
(Board Examinations-question paper-pattern).
# - From the Academic year 2011-2012 onwards.
Question Paper Pattern for the Periodical Test :( Test - I & Test- II)
14 Questions X 1 mark …… 14 marks

6 Questions X 6 marks …… 36 marks
(OR) 3 Questions X 12 marks -----------
Total 50 marks
-----------
5|P a g e
iii) Assignment 10 Marks
For each subject Three Assignments are to be given each for 20 marks and the average
marks scored should be reduced for 10 marks
All Test Papers and Assignment notebooks after getting the signature with date from the
students must be kept in the safe custody in the Department for verification and audit. It
should be preserved for 2 Semesters and produced to the flying squad and the inspection
team at the time of inspection/verification.
B. For Practical Subjects:
The Internal Assessment mark for a total of 25 marks which are to be distributed
as follows:-
a) Attendance : 5 Marks (Award of marks same

as theory subjects)
b) Procedure/ observation and tabulation/
Other Practical related Work : 10 Marks
c) Record writing : 10 Marks
-----
TOTAL : 25 Marks
-----
 All the Experiments/Exercises indicated in the syllabus should be completed and the
same to be given for final Board examinations.
 The Record for every completed exercise should be submitted in the subsequent
Practical classes and marks should be awarded for 20 for each exercise as per the
above allocation.
 At the end of the Semester, the average marks of all the exercises should be calculated
for 20 marks and the marks awarded for attendance is to be added to arrive at the
internal assessment mark for Practical. (20+5=25 marks)
 The students have to submit the duly signed bonafide record note book/file during the
Practical Board Examinations.
 All the marks awarded for assignments, Tests and attendance should be entered in the
Personal Log Book of the staff, who is handling the subject. This is applicable to both
Theory and Practical subjects.
9. Communication and Life Skills Practical:
The Communication and Life Skills Practical with more emphasis is being introduced in IV
Semester for Circuit Branches and in V Semester for other branches of Engineering.
Much Stress is given on:
 Monodic Communication
 Dyadic Communication
 Professional Communication
 Pronunciation
 Writing Resumes
 Interview Techniques
Internal Assessment Mark ….. 25 Marks
6|P a g e
10. Project Work:
The students of all the Diploma Courses (except Diploma in Modern Office Practice) have
to do a Project Work as part of the Curriculum and in partial fulfillment for the award of
Diploma by the State Board of Technical Education and Training, Tamilnadu. In order to
encourage students to do worthwhile and innovative projects, every year prizes are awarded
for the best three projects i.e. institution wise, region wise and state wise. The Project work
must be reviewed twice in the same semester.
a) Internal assessment mark for Project Work & Viva Voce:

Project Review I … 10 marks
Project Review II … 10 marks
Attendance … 05 marks (Award of marks same as theory
Subject pattern)
-----------
Total … 25 marks
------------
Proper record to be maintained for the two Project Reviews, and It should be preserved for 2
Semesters and produced to the flying squad and the inspection team at the time of
inspection/verification.
b) Allocation of Marks for Project Work & Viva Voce in Board Examinations:
Viva Voce … 25 marks
Demonstration/Presentation … 20 marks
--------------
Total … 45 marks
-------------
$
c) Written Test Mark (from 3 topics for 1 hour duration):
i) Entrepreneurship 5 questions X 2 marks = 10 marks

ii)Environment Management 5 questions X 2 marks = 10 marks
iii)Disaster Management 5 questions X 2 marks =10 marks
-----
30 marks
-----
$- Selection of Questions should be from Question Bank, by the External Examiner.
No choice need be given to the candidates.
Project Work & Viva Voce in Board

-- 45 Marks
Examination
Written Test Mark (from 3 topics for 1 hour
-- 30 Marks
duration)
TOTAL -- 75 Marks
A neatly prepared PROJECT REPORT as per the format has to be submitted by

individual student during the Project Work & Viva Voce Board examination.
7|P a g e
11. Scheme of Examinations:
The Scheme of examinations for subjects is given in Annexure - II.
12. Criteria for Pass:
1. No candidate shall be eligible for the award of Diploma unless he/she has undergone the
prescribed course of study successfully in an institution approved by AICTE and
affiliated to the State Board of Technical Education & Training, Tamil Nadu and pass all
the subjects prescribed in the curriculum.
2. A candidate shall be declared to have passed the examination in a subject if he/she
secures not less than 40% in theory subjects and 50% in practical subjects out of the
total prescribed maximum marks including both the Internal Assessment and the Board
Examinations marks put together, subject to the condition that he/she secures at least a
minimum of 30 marks out of 75 marks in the Board Theory Examinations and a minimum
of 35 marks out of 75 marks in the Board Practical Examinations.
1. Classification of successful candidates:
Classification of candidates who passed out the final examinations from April 2014 onwards
(Joined in first year in 2011-2012) will be done as specified below.
First Class with Distinction:
A candidate will be declared to have passed in First Class with Distinction if
he/she secures not less than 75% of the aggregate marks in all semesters put together
except I and II semesters and passes all the above semesters in the first appearance itself
and completes all subjects including that of I & II semesters within the stipulated period of
study 3/ 3½/ 4 years (Full Time/Sandwich/Part Time) without any break in study.
First Class:
A candidate will be declared to have passed in First Class if he/she secures not less than
60% of the aggregate marks in all semesters put together except I & II semesters and
completes all subjects including that of the I & II semesters within the stipulated period of
study 3/ 3½ / 4 years (Full Time/Sandwich/Part Time) without any break in study.
Second Class:
All other successful candidates will be declared to have passed in Second Class.
The above mentioned classifications are also applicable for the Sandwich / Part-Time
students who passed out Final Examination from October 2014 /April 2015 onwards (both
joined in First Year in 2011-2012)
14. Duration of a period in the Class Time Table:
The duration of each period of instruction is1 hour and the total period of instruction hours
excluding interval and Lunch break in a day should be uniformly maintained as 7 hours
corresponding to 7 periods of instruction (Theory & Practical).
-xXx-
8|P a g e
Chairperson
Thiru. Ramesh Chand Meena, I.A.S.,
Commissioner of Technical Education
Directorate of Technical Education
Chennai – 600 025.
Co-coordinator Convener
Thiru. S Govindarajan, M.E., Thiru. N Muralikrishniah, M.E.,
Principal Vice Principal & H O D / Civil
Dr.Dharmambal Government Polytechnic College Central Polytechnic College
for Women Chennai – 600 113.
Chennai – 600 113.
Members
1. Thiru T. Selvaraju, M.E., B.Tech.Ed.,
HOD (Civil) & Principal (I/c),
T.P.E.V.R. Government Polytechnic College,Vellore.
2 Thiru A. Mathivanan, M.E., B.Tech.Ed,
HOD (Civil),Government Polytechnic College,Krishnagiri.
3 Tmt. R. Amudha, M.E.,
HOD (Civil) Rajagopal Polytechnic College, Gudiyatham – 632 602.
4 Thiru S. Loganathan, M.E.,
HOD (Civil),Thiagarajar Polytechnic College, Salem – 636 005.
5 Thiru M. Tamil Selvam, M.E.,
Lecturer (SG) (Civil),Government Polytechnic College, Trichy – 22.
6 Thiru O.G. Dharanipathy, M.E.,
Lecturer (SG) (Civil),Central Polytechnic College, Chennai - 113.
7 Thiru P. Jeganathan, M.E.,
Lecturer-Senior (Civil), Meenakshi Krishnan Polytechnic College, Chennai – 75
8 Dr. K. Natarajan, Ph. D.,

Joint General Manager, L & T ECC, Chennai.
9 Thiru A.P. Arul Manickam , M.E.,M.I.E.,M.I.S.E.,

SAM Associates,Chennai – 600 041.
10. Dr. R. Senthil, Ph.D.,

Associate Professor,
Structural Engineering Division, Department of Civil Engineering,
Anna University, Guindy, Chennai- 600 025.
11. Dr. E. S. M. Suresh, Ph.D.,

Associate Professor,
NITTTR, Chennai – 600 113.
9|P a g e
ANNEXURE - I
(1010 – DIPLOMA IN CIVIL ENGINEERING FULL TIME)
CURRICULUM OUTLINE
THIRD SEMESTER
HOURS PER WEEK

Subject
SUBJECT Theory Drawing Practical Total
Code
Hours Hours Hours Hours
21031 Engineering Mechanics 6 6
21032 Construction Materials and
5 5
Construction Practice
21033 Surveying I 5 5
21034 Civil Engineering Drawing I 6 6
21035 Material Testing Lab I 3 3
21036 Surveying Practice I 6 6
20001 Computer Application Practical** 4 4
TOTAL 16 6 13 35
FOURTH SEMESTER
HOURS PER WEEK

Subject
Code
21041 Theory of Structures 6 6
21042 Transportation Engineering 5 5
21043 Surveying II 5 5
21044 Estimating and Costing I 5 5
21045 Material Testing Lab II 3 3
21046 Surveying Practice II 6 6
21047 CAD in Civil Engineering Drawing I 5 5
TOTAL 21 14 35
10 | P a g e
CURRICULUM OUTLINE
FIFTH SEMESTER
HOURS PER WEEK

Subject
Code
21051 Structural Engineering 6 6
21052 Environmental Engineering
5 5
and Pollution Control
Elective Theory I
21071 Advanced Construction
Technology
21072 Remote Sensing and GIS 5 5
21073 Soil Mechanics and
Foundation Engineering
21074 Water Resources
Management
21054 Civil Engineering Drawing II 6 6
21055 Construction Practice Lab 3 3
21056 CAD In Civil Engineering
6 6
Drawing II
20002 Communication and Life
4 4
Skills Practical**
TOTAL 16 6 13 35
SIXTH SEMESTER
HOURS PER WEEK

Subject
Code
21061 Construction Management
5 5
with MIS
21062 Hydraulics 6 6
Elective Theory II
21081 Steel Structures
21082 Town Planning 5 5
21083 Earthquake Engineering
21084 Building Services
21064 Estimating and Costing II 5 5
21065 Hydraulics and Plumbing Lab 3 3
21066 Computer Applications In
5 5
Civil Engineering
21067 Project Work 6 6
TOTAL 21 14 35
11 | P a g e
ANNEXURE – II
SCHEME OF THE EXAMINATION
THIRD SEMESTER
Exam Hours
Duration of
Examination Marks
Minimum
for pass
Subject Internal
SUBJECT Board
Code assess- Total
Exam.
ment Marks
Marks
Marks
21031 Engineering Mechanics 25 75 100 40 3
25 75 100 40 3
21033 Surveying I 25 75 100 40 3
21034 Civil Engineering Drawing I 25 75 100 40 3
21035 Material Testing Lab I 25 75 100 50 3
21036 Surveying Practice I 25 75 100 50 3
20001 Computer Application Practical** 25 75 100 50 3
175 525 700
FOURTH SEMESTER
Exam Hours
Duration of
Examination Marks
Minimum
for pass
Subject Internal
SUBJECT Board
Code assess- Total
Exam
ment Mark
Marks
Marks
21041 Theory of Structures 25 75 100 40 3
21042 Transportation Engineering 25 75 100 40 3
21043 Surveying II 25 75 100 40 3
21044 Estimating and Costing I 25 75 100 40 3
21045 Material Testing Lab II 25 75 100 50 3
21046 Surveying Practice II 25 75 100 50 3
21047 CAD in Civil Engineering Drawing I 25 75 100 50 3
TOTAL 175 525 700
12 | P a g e
SCHEME OF EXAMINATION
FIFTH SEMESTER
Exam Hours
Duration of
Examination Marks
Minimum
for pass
Subject Internal
SUBJECT Board
Code assess- Total
Exam.
ment Mark
Marks
Marks
21051 Structural Engineering 25 75 100 40 3
21052 Environmental Engineering And
25 75 100 40 3
Pollution Control
Elective Theory I
21071 Advanced Construction Technology
21072 Remote Sensing and GIS 25 75 100 40 3
21073 Soil Mechanics and Foundation
Engineering
21074 Water Resources Management
21054 Civil Engineering Drawing II 25 75 100 40 3
21055 Construction Practice Lab 25 75 100 50 3
21056 CAD in Civil Engineering Drawing II 25 75 100 50 3
20002 Communication and Life Skill
25 75 100 50 3
Practical**
175 525 700
SIXTH SEMESTER
Exam Hours
Duration of
Examination Marks
Minimum
for pass
Subject Internal
SUBJECT Board
Code assess- Total
Exam
ment Mark
Marks
Marks
21061 Construction Management With MIS 25 75 100 40 3
21062 Hydraulics 25 75 100 40 3
Elective Theory II
21082 Town Planning 25 75 100 40 3
21064 Estimating And Costing II 25 75 100 40 3
21065 Hydraulics And Plumbing Lab 25 75 100 50 3
21066 Computer Applications in Civil
25 75 100 50 3
Engineering
21067 Project Work 25 75 100 50 3
TOTAL 175 525 700
13 | P a g e
ANNEXURE - III
3010 DIPLOMA IN CIVIL ENGINEERING (PART-TIME)
CURRICULUM OUTLINE
THIRD SEMESTER
HOURS PER WEEK

Subject
Code
20016 Engineering Graphics I 3 3
TOTAL 9 3 6 18
FOURTH SEMESTER
HOURS PER WEEK

Subject
Code
4 4
20026 Engineering Graphics II 3 3
TOTAL 8 7 3 18
FIFTH SEMESTER
HOURS PER WEEK

Subject
Code
TOTAL 9 9 18
14 | P a g e
CURRICULUM OUTLINE
SIXTH SEMESTER
HOURS PER WEEK

Subject
Code
Elective Theory I
Technology
21072 Remote Sensing and GIS
4 4
Management
TOTAL 13 3 2 18
SEVENTH SEMESTER
HOURS PER WEEK

Subject
Code
5 5
Elective Theory II
3 3
Drawing II
3 3
Civil Engineering
2 2
Skills Practical**
TOTAL 10 8 18
15 | P a g e
CURRICULUM OUTLINE
EIGHTH SEMESTER
HOURS PER WEEK

Subject
Code
3 3
with MIS
TOTAL 12 6 18
ANNEXURE – IV
THIRD SEMESTER
Exam Hours
Duration of
Examination Marks Minimum
Subject Internal for pass
SUBJECT Board
Code assess- Total
Exam.
ment Mark
Marks
Marks
21033 Surveying I 25 75 100 40 3
20016 Engineering Graphics I 25 75 100 40 3
125 375 500
16 | P a g e
FOURTH SEMESTER
Exam Hours
Duration of
Examination Marks
Minimum
for pass
Subject Internal
SUBJECT Board
Code assess- Total
Exam
ment Mark
Marks
Marks
25 75 100 40 3
21043 Surveying II 25 75 100 40 3
20026 Engineering Graphics II 25 75 100 40 3
TOTAL 125 375 500
FIFTH SEMESTER
Exam Hours
Duration of
Examination Marks
Minimum
for pass
Subject Internal
SUBJECT Board
Code assess- Total
Exam
ment Mark
Marks
Marks
TOTAL 125 375 500
17 | P a g e
SIXTH SEMESTER
Exam Hours
Duration of
Examination Marks
Minimum
for pass
Subject Internal
SUBJECT Board
Code assess- Total
Exam.
ment Mark
Marks
Marks
Elective Theory I
21072 Remote Sensing and GIS 40 3
25 75 100
Engineering
125 375 500
SEVENTH SEMESTER
Exam Hours
Duration of
Examination Marks
Minimum
for pass
Subject Internal
SUBJECT Board
Code assess- Total
Exam
ment Mark
Marks
Marks
21052 Environmental Engineering and
25 75 100 40 3
Pollution Control
Elective Theory II
21082 Town Planning 25 75 100 40 3
21056 CAD In Civil Engineering Drawing II 25 75 100 50 3
21066 Computer Applications In Civil
25 75 100 50 3
Engineering
20002 Communication and Life Skills
25 75 100 50 3
Practical**
TOTAL 125 375 500
18 | P a g e
EIGTH SEMESTER
Exam Hours
Duration of
Examination Marks
Minimum
for pass
Subject Internal
SUBJECT Board
Code assess- Total
Exam
ment Mark
Marks
Marks
21061 Construction Management with MIS 25 75 100 40 3
21062 Hydraulics 25 75 100 40 3
21064 Estimating and Costing II 25 75 100 40 3
21065 Hydraulics and Plumbing Lab 25 75 100 50 3
21067 Project Work 25 75 100 50 3
TOTAL 125 375 500
ANNEXURE - V
(2010 – DIPLOMA IN CIVIL ENGINEERING SANDWICH)
CURRICULUM OUTLINE
THIRD SEMESTER
HOURS PER WEEK

Subject
Code
4 4
TOTAL 18 5 12 35
19 | P a g e
CURRICULUM OUTLINE
FOURTH SEMESTER
HOURS PER WEEK

Subject
Code
21091 Industrial Training I
TOTAL
FIFTH SEMESTER
HOURS PER WEEK

Subject
Code
4 4
Elective Theory I 4 4
Technology
21072 Remote Sensing and GIS
Management
4 4
Drawing II
TOTAL 22 4 9 35
20 | P a g e
CURRICULUM OUTLINE
SIXTH SEMESTER
HOURS PER WEEK

Subject
Code
5 5
with MIS
Elective Theory II
5 5
Civil Engineering
3 3
Skills Practical**
TOTAL 25 10 35
SEVENTH SEMESTER
HOURS PER WEEK

Subject
Code
21092 Industrial Training II
TOTAL
21 | P a g e
ANNEXURE – VI
THIRD SEMESTER
Exam Hours
Duration of
Examination Marks
Minimum
for pass
Subject Internal
SUBJECT Board
Code assess- Total
Exam.
ment Mark
Marks
Marks
25 75 100 40 3
21033 Surveying I 25 75 100 40 3
TOTAL 200 600 800
FOURTH SEMESTER
Exam Hours
Duration of
Examination Marks
Minimum
for pass
Subject Internal
SUBJECT Board
Code assess- Total
Exam
ment Mark
Marks
Marks
21091 Industrial Training I 25 75 100 50 3
TOTAL 75 225 300
22 | P a g e
FIFTH SEMESTER
Exam Hours
Duration of
Examination Marks
Minimum
for pass
Subject Internal
SUBJECT Board
Code assess- Total
Exam.
ment Mark
Marks
Marks
21043 Surveying II 25 75 100 40 3
21052 Environmental Engineering and
25 75 100 40 3
Pollution Control
Elective Theory I
21072 Remote Sensing and GIS 25 75 100 40 3
Engineering
21056 CAD In Civil Engineering Drawing II 25 75 100 50 3
200 600 800
23 | P a g e
SIXTH SEMESTER
Exam Hours
Duration of
Examination Marks
Minimum
for pass
Subject Internal
SUBJECT Board
Code assess- Total
Exam
ment Mark
Marks
Marks
21061 Construction Management with MIS 25 75 100 40 3
21062 Hydraulics 25 75 100 40 3
21064 Estimating and Costing II 25 75 100 40 3
Elective Theory II
21082 Town Planning 25 75 100 40 3
21065 Hydraulics and Plumbing Lab 25 75 100 50 3
21066 Computer Applications In Civil
25 75 100 50 3
Engineering
20002 Communication and Life Skills
25 75 100 50 3
Practical**
TOTAL 200 600 800
SEVENTH SEMESTER
Exam Hours
Duration of
Examination Marks
Minimum
for pass
Subject Internal
SUBJECT Board
Code assess- Total
Exam
ment Mark
Marks
Marks
21067 Project Work 25 75 100 50 3
21092 Industrial Training II 25 75 100 50 3
TOTAL 75 225 300
24 | P a g e
Relevant papers in ‘L’ Scheme
K Scheme
(Implementing academic year Relevant papers in ‘L’ Scheme
2007-08)
SEM
Sub
Sub Code Subject
Code Subject
11031 Engineering Mechanics

21031 Engineering Mechanics
Construction Materials and Construction Materials and
11032 21032
Practice Construction Practice
11033 Surveying
21043 Surveying II
III
11034 Civil Engineering Drawing I
21034 Civil Engineering Drawing I
11035 Material Testing Lab Practice I
21035 Material Testing Lab I
11036 Surveying Practice I
21036 Surveying Practice I
11041 Theory of Structures
21041 Theory of Structures
Environmental Engineering and
11042 Environmental Engineering 21052 Pollution Control
11043 Transportation Engineering

21042 Transportation Engineering
IV
11044 Material Testing Lab Practice II
21045 Material Testing Lab II
CAD in Civil Engineering Drawing
11045
Practice I 21047 CAD in Civil Engineering Drawing I
11046 Surveying Practice II

21046 Surveying Practice II
25 | P a g e
Relevant papers in ‘L’ Scheme
K Scheme
(Implementing academic year Relevant papers in ‘L’ Scheme
2007-08)
SEM
Sub Sub
Subject
Code Subject Code
11051 Structural Engineering Structural Engineering

21051
11052 Quantity Surveying Estimating and Costing I
21044
Concrete Technology and Advanced Advanced Construction
11071
Construction 21071 Technology
V 11072 Elements of Interior Design

No Equivalent in L Scheme
CAD in Civil Engineering Drawing
11054 CAD In Civil Engineering Drawing II
Practice II 21056
11055 Construction Lab Practice Construction Practice Lab

21055
Communication and Life Skills
11011 English Communication Practical
20002 Practical
11061 Construction Management with MIS Construction Management with MIS

21061
11062 Hydraulics Hydraulics
21062
11081 Town Planning Town Planning
21082
11082 Water Resource Management Water Resources Management
VI 21074
11064 Hydraulics and Plumbing Lab Hydraulics and Plumbing Lab
21065
Computer Application In Civil Computer Applications In Civil
11065 Engineering
Engineering 21066
11066 Project Work Project work

21067
26 | P a g e
III SEMESTER
27 | P a g e
DIPLOMA IN CIVIL ENGINEERING
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
ENGINEERING MECHANICS

28 | P a g e
L-SCHEME
(Implements from the Academic year 2011-2012 onwards)
Course Name : DIPLOMA IN CIVIL ENGINEERING

Course Code : 1010
Subject Code : 21031
Semester : III Semester
Subject Title : ENGINEERING MECHANICS
TEACHING AND SCHEME OF EXAMINATION:
No. of weeks per semester: 16 weeks
Instructions Examination
Subject Title Hours Hours
Marks
/Week /Semester Duration
ENGINEERING Internal Board
6 Hrs 96 Hrs Total
MECHANICS Assessment Examination
25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
On completion of the course, the student will be familiar with:
 The mechanical properties of engineering materials, elastic constants, different types of

stresses and strains, the deformation of elastic bodies under simple stresses, the use and
principles of composite sections;
 The effects of transverse forces such as shear force and bending moment in beams;
determination of SF and BM in simple beams under different loading systems;
 The geometrical properties such as centroid, moment of inertia etc of sections of different
shapes;
 Determination of different types of stresses induced in beams and shafts due to bending and
twisting moments respectively
 Analysis of perfect frames for vertical loads by analytical as well as graphical methods.
29 | P a g e
21031 ENGINEERING MECHANICS
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Contents: Theory
Unit Name of the Topic Hours

I SIMPLE STRESSES AND STRAINS
1.1 INTRODUCTION TO STRESSES AND STRAINS
Definitions of: Force, Moment of force, Actions and reactions, Statics, Static
equilibrium of bodies, Mechanics, Engineering Mechanics - Conditions of
static equilibrium - Types of forces on structural members - Study of
strength of material - Mechanical properties of materials – Rigidity,
Elasticity, Plasticity, Compressibility, Hardness, Toughness, Stiffness,
Brittleness, Ductility, Malleability, Creep, Fatigue, Tenacity, Durability -
Definitions of stress and strain - Types of stresses -Tensile, Compressive
and Shear stresses - Types of strains - Tensile, Compressive and Shear
strains - Complimentary shear stress - Diagonal tensile / compressive
stresses due to shear - Elongation and Contraction - Longitudinal and
Lateral strains - Poisson’s Ratio - Volumetric strain - Simple problems in
computation of stress, strain, Poisson’s ratio, change in dimensions and
volume etc- Hooke’s law - Elastic Constants - Definitions of: Young’s
Modulus of Elasticity – Shear modulus (or) Modulus of Rigidity - Bulk 20 Hrs
Modulus - Derivations for the relationship between elastic constants -
Simple problems - Young’s modulus values of few important engineering
materials.
1.2 APPLICATION OF STRESS AND STRAIN IN ENGINEERING FIELD

Behaviour of ductile and brittle materials under direct loads - Load
Extension curve (or) Stress Strain curve of a ductile material - Limit of
proportionality, Elastic limit, Yield stress, Ultimate stress, Breaking stress,
Actual / Nominal stresses - Working stress - Factor of safety - Percentage
elongation - Percentage reduction in area - Significance of percentage
elongation and reduction in area of cross section - Deformation of prismatic
and stepped bars due to uniaxial load - Deformation of prismatic bars due to
its self weight - Numerical problems. Composite Sections – Examples of
composite sections in Engineering field- Advantages - Assumptions made –
Principles of analysis of Composite sections - Modular ratio - Equivalent
area - Stresses in the materials - Problems on axially loaded composite
sections like RC.C / Encased columns.
30 | P a g e
II SHEAR FORCE AND BENDING MOMENT
2.1 TYPES OF LOADS AND BEAMS

Definitions of: Axial load, Transverse load, Concentrated (or) Point load,
Uniformly Distributed load (UDL), Varying load – Types of Supports and
Reactions: Simple support, Roller support, Hinged support, Fixed support;
Vertical reaction, Horizontal reaction, Moment reaction- Types of Beams
based on support conditions- Diagrammatic representation of beams, loads
and supports– Static equilibrium equations – Determinate and indeterminate
beams.
18 Hrs
2.2 SHEAR FORCE AND BENDING MOMENT IN BEAMS
Definitions of Shear Force and Bending Moment – Conventional signs used
for S.F. and B.M – S.F and B.M of general cases of determinate beams –
S.F and B.M diagrams for Cantilevers, Simply supported beams and Over
hanging beams – Position of maximum BM - Point of contra flexure –
Derivation of Relation between intensity of load , S.F and B.M. – Numerical
problems on S.F and B.M.( Determinate beams with concentrated loads and
udl only )
III GEOMETRICAL PROPERTIES OF SECTIONS

3.1 CENTROID
Geometrical properties – Definitions and examples of Symmetrical, Anti
Symmetrical, Asymmetrical shapes - Definitions of centre of gravity and
centroid - Centroid of Symmetrical shapes ( solid / hollow square,
rectangular, circular, I Sections ) - Centroid of Asymmetrical shapes
( triangular, semi circular, quadrant, trapezoidal, parabolic sections ) -
Centroid of Anti Symmetric shapes ( S , Z sections) – Built up structural
sections - Problems
14 Hrs
3.2 MOMENT OF INERTIA
Definitions of: Inertia, Moment of Inertia, Polar moment of inertia, Radius of

gyration, Section Modulus, Polar modulus - Parallel and perpendicular axes
theorems - Derivation of expressions for M.I / Polar M I, Section modulus
and Radius of gyration of regular geometrical plane sections ( rectangle,
circle, triangle ) – M.I about centroidal axis / base, Section modulus, Radius
of gyration of symmetric, asymmetric, anti symmetric and built up sections
– Numerical problems.
31 | P a g e
IV STRESSES IN BEAMS AND SHAFTS

4.1 STRESSES IN BEAMS DUE TO BENDING
Types of Bending stresses – Neutral axis – Theory of simple bending –
Assumptions – Moment of resistance – Derivation of flexure/bending
equation M / I = E / R = σ/y – Bending stress distribution – Curvature of
beam – Position of N.A and centroidal axis – Stiffness equation – Flexural
rigidity – Strength equation – Significance of Section modulus – Numerical
problems.
4.2 STRESS IN SHAFTS DUE TO TORSION
Definitions of: Shaft, Couple, Torque (or) Twisting moment - Types of Shafts 16 Hrs
( one end fixed and the other rotating, both ends rotating at different
speeds ) - Theory of Pure Torsion – Assumptions -Derivation of Torsion
equation, T / Ip = λmax/ R = GӨ / l - Shear stress distribution in circular
section due to torsion - Strength and Stiffness of shafts – Torsional rigidity -
Torsional modulus - Comparative analysis of hollow and solid shafts -
Power transmitted by a shaft - Numerical problems.
V PIN JOINTED FRAMES

5.1 ANALYSIS BY ANALYTICAL METHOD ( METHOD OF JOINTS )
Definitions of: Frame / Truss, Pin Joint, Nodes, Rafters, Ties, Struts, Slings -
Determinate and indeterminate frames - Classification of frames - Perfect
and imperfect frames – Deficient / Instable and redundant frames -
Formulation of a perfect frame - Common types of trusses - Support
conditions - Resolution of a force - Designation of a force - Nature of forces
in the frame members - Analysis of Frames – Assumptions - Methods of
analysis - Analytical methods - Method of Joints and Method of Sections -
Problems on Analysis of cantilever and simply supported perfect frames 16 Hrs
( with not more than ten members ) with vertical nodal loads by method of
joints only. Identification of members with nil force in a determinate truss.
5.2 ANALYSIS BY GRAPHICAL METHOD
Graphic statics - Advantages - Space diagram - Bow’s notation-Resultant
force ( or ) Equivalent force -Equilibrant force - Vector diagram -
Determination of magnitude and nature of forces in the members of a
cantilever / simply supported determinate trusses ( with not more than ten
members ) with vertical nodal loads only.
Reference Book : 1) R.S.Khurmi “Strength of Materials”, S.Chand & Company Ltd, New Delhi
2) S.Ramamirtham, “Strength of Materials”, Dhanpat Rai (2003)
3) Vazirani & Ratwani, “Analysis of Structures-Vol 1”, Khanna
Publishers(2003)
4) S.B.Junnarkar, “Mechanics of Structures- Vol 1”,
5) Sanchayan Mukherjee, “Elements of Engineering Mechanics”, PHI
Learning Pvt Ltd
6) R K Bansal, “ Engineering Mechanics”, Laxmi Publications Pvt.Ltd.,
32 | P a g e
MODEL QUESTION PAPER - 1
Time : 3 Hrs Max Marks : 75
PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15
Note : Answer any 15 Questions. – All Questions carry equal marks
1. Define the term “Ductility”

2. Name the three types of basic stresses.
3. State Hooke’s law.
4. Write the Young’s modulus values of any two materials.
5. Write examples of an uniformly distributed load and a point load with respect to beams.
6. When a support is called “fixed”?
7. How we call the point of zero bending moment in a beam?
8. Where the SF and BM are maximum in a cantilever beam?
9. What principle is applied in the determination of position of centroid of a section?
10. What is meant by centroidal axis?.
11. State perpendicular axes theorem.
12. Write the expression for the polar moment of inertia of a hollow circle.
13. What will be the magnitude of bending stress at the cetroidal axis of section due to flexure?
14. Write the relationship between E,R,I and M with respect to a beam.
15. Where the stress due to torque will be maximum in the cross section of a shaft?
16. Write the expression for the power transmitted by a rotating shaft.
17. Write the condition for perfect frame.
18. When the joint of a frame is called a “pin joint” ?
19. When you draw a “polar diagram”?.
20. How you select a joint for resolution in the analysis of a truss?
33 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
Note : i) Answer all Questions choosing either division (A) or division (B) of each question.
ii) All divisions carry equal marks.
21. A. i) Draw the stress-strain curve of a ductile material and name the salient points.
ii) A bar of 12 mm diameter extends 1.0mm in 500 mm length under an axial tension of
26kN. Find the Young’s modulus of the material.
OR
B. Drive an expression for the volumetric strain of a prismatic bar due to uni-axial stress,
assuming load as P, length of bar as L, area of cross section as A, modulus of elasticity as E
and Poisson’s ratio of the material as “ϒ”. Now determine the change in volume of the bar if
P=15 kN; L=1.2 m; A=300 mm2; E= 2.1x105 MPa and ν = 0.3.
22. A. A simply supported beam of 12m span carries two point loads of 25kN and 40kN at 5m and
8m respectively from the left support in addition to its self weight of 2kN/m. Draw the SF and
BM diagrams for the beam.
OR
B. An overhanging beam of 8 metre length is supported at its left end and at 2m from its right
end. The supported length of the beam carries an udl of 24 kN/m. A point load of 30kN is
acting at the right end. Draw the SF and BM diagrams for the beam.
23. A. Find the position of centroid of the trapezium shown in the figure (direct formula shall not be
used)
300 mm
200mm
200 mm 300 mm
OR
B. An I- section of top flange 200x12 mm, bottom flange 400x16mm has its clear web size
572x10mm, symmetrically placed, so that its overall depth is 600mm. Find the moment of
inertia of the section about its major axis.
34 | P a g e
24. A. Drive the bending equation.
OR
B. Determine the maximum power a hollow circular shaft of 120mm external diameter and
60mm internal diameter can transmit at a speed of 240 rpm if the shear stress in the shaft
shall not exceed 80 N/mm2. Assume maximum torque as 1.25 times the mean torque.
25. A. Determine the magnitude and nature of the forces in all the members of the truss shown in
the sketch by method of joints. (Any frame having less than 10 members)
30KN 50 KN 30KN
3m
4m 4m
OR
B. Determine the forces in the members of the cantilever frame shown in the sketch by
graphical method. (Any frame having less than 10 members)
20 KN 20 KN
2m
3m 3m
20 KN
35 | P a g e

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15

1. Define the term “Stiffness”
2. What do you mean by “Diagonal tension”?.
3. Differentiate Ultimate stress and Breaking stress.
4. Define the term “modular ratio”.
5. What will be the difference in performance of a roller support from hinged support?
6. State the three static equilibrium equations.
7. What is the difference between sagging BM and hogging BM?
8. Where the sagging BM will be maximum in a simply supported beam with symmetrical
loads?
9. State the position of centroid of a semi circle?
10. Give an example for Anti-symmetric shape.
11. What will be the MI of rectangular section about its base?.
12. Define the term “Polar modulus” of a cross-section.
13. Write an expression for the curvature of a beam from flexure equation
14. What is meant by flexural rigidity of a section?
15. What is meant by pure torsion?.
16. What will be the nature of stress in a shaft subjected to pure torsion?.
17. When a pin jointed frame is called a redundant frame?.
18. How a long span roof truss has to be supported at its ends to reduce overall buckling?
19. What a vector diagram represents?
20. Why loads are generally placed on the nodal points of the frame?
36 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21. A.) i) Differentiate the properties “rigidity” and “elasticity” of materials?.

ii) A brass bar of 10 mm diameter and 500 mm length is under an axial tension of 10kN. Its
length increases by 0.6mm and diameter reduces by 0.003mm. Find the value of rigidity
modulus of the material.
OR
B. A stepped bar of 1.2 metre length is 100mmx200mm size in the first 400mm length;
200mmx300 mm in the next 400mm, and 300mmx400mm in the remaining length. The bar is
subjected to an axial compression of 1200kN. The Young’s modulus of the material is
0.125x106 N/mm2. Determine the maximum and minimum stresses in the bar and decrease
in its length.
22. A. (i) Discuss the different types of supports provided for horizontal beams.
(ii) How you identify beams as statically determinate? Explain with an example.
OR
B. An overhanging beam of 6 metre length is supported at 4 metre interval with equal
overhangs on either end. The supported length of the beam carries an udl of 20 kN/m. The
beam carries a point load of 30kN on the left end and another point load of 10 kN on the right
end. Draw the SF and BM diagrams for the beam.
23. A. An angle section 200x110x10mm has a horizontal leg of 200mmx10mm size and a vertical
leg of 100mmx10mm size. Find the position of cetroid of the section.
OR
B. Derive from first principle, an expression for the moment of inertia of a circle about its
cetroidal axes and hence write expressions for section modulus and polar modulus of circles.
24. A. A mild steel strap of 120mmx 6 mm size is wound round a wooden wheel of 8 metre
diameter and 120 mm width. The modulus of elasticity of steel is 2x1011 Pa. Determine the
maximum bending stress developed in the strap.
OR
B. A hollow circular shaft of 120mm external dia and 80mm internal dia has a torque resisting
capacity of 18 kN.m. Determine the torque resisting capacity of a solid shaft of 60 mm dia of
same material.
25. A. Determine the magnitude and nature of the forces in all the members of the cantilever truss
shown in the sketch by method of joints. (Any frame having less than 10 members)
OR
B. Determine the forces in the members of the simply supported frame shown in the sketch by
graphical method. (Any frame having less than 10 members).
37 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND

CONSTRUCTION PRACTICE

38 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION PRACTICE
Marks
CONSTRUCTION Internal Board
MATERIALS AND Total
5 Hrs 80 Hrs Assessment Examination
CONSTRUCTION
PRACTICE 25 75 100 3 Hrs
Objectives:
On completion of the course, the student will be familiar to:
 State different construction materials and their properties.

 Explain different types of cement, grades of cements and tests on cement.
 State and explain different types of modern building materials such as ceramic
products, glass, metals and plastics.
 Explain method of preparation of mortar and cement concrete.
 State the different types of structures.
 Describe the different types of foundations.
 Describe the classification of stone masonry & brick masonry.
 State the different types of doors, windows, lintels & stairs.
 Describe the types of floors and roofs.
 Describe the different methods of pointing, plastering and termite proofing.
 Explain the methods of scaffolding, shoring & underpinning and form work.
 Describe procedure of colour washing , white washing , painting and varnishing.
39 | P a g e
21032 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION PRACTICE
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Contents: Theory
I 1.1 INTRODUCTION 15 Hrs

Physical properties of materials – Density, Bulk density, Specific gravity,
porosity, water absorption, permeability, chemical resistance, fire
resistance, weathering resistance, thermal conductivity, Durability.
( Definitions only )
1.2 ROCKS AND STONES

Rocks – Classification of Rocks – Geological, Physical and Chemical
classification – Uses of stones – Requirements of a good building stone –
Natural stones for flooring – Cuddappa slabs, Kota stone, Sand stone,
Shahabad stone , Granite, Marble –Artificial stones.
1.3 BRICKS
Definition – Brick earth – Composition of good brick earth – Manufacturing
process –classification of bricks – properties of bricks – special types of
bricks and their uses –compressive strength of bricks –Tests on bricks -
grade of bricks as per BIS
1.4 LIME AND POZZOLANAS

Sources of lime – classification lime – Fat, Hydraulic and Poor lime - uses of
lime, Pozzolanic materials – Surki, Flyash, Ground blast furnace slag, Rice
husk ash – Advantages of addition of pozzolanas
1.5 CEMENT
Definition – Composition of ordinary Portland cement – Functions of cement
ingredients – Different types of cements – Grades of cement (33,43 and 53)
–Storage of cement - Tests of cement – objects of each test – Test
requirements/ BIS specifications of OPC - Admixtures – Definition –types
and uses .
1.6 WATER
General – Limits of deleterious materials allowed in the water for
construction – Use of Brackish or Sea water for construction- Estimation of
sulphates in ground water – Test results on water for construction.
1.7 GLASS
Definition – Constituents of glass – Classification of glass – Functions and
Utility – Types of glass – sizes and thickness – uses in buildings.
40 | P a g e
I 1.8 CERAMIC PRODUCTS

Definition – Earthenware , Stoneware , Porcelain , Terracotta, Glazing, Tiles
(Definitions only) – Types of Tiles – Clay Terracing tiles – Thermal care tiles
– Glazed Ceramic tiles – Fully Vitrified tiles – Roof tiles – special
requirements for floor, wall and roof tiles– Sanitary appliances.
II 2.1 MORTAR 14 Hrs

Definition – Properties and uses of mortar – Types of mortar – Cement and
Lime mortar – Mix ratio of cement mortars for different works.
2.2 CONCRETE
Definition – Constituents of concrete and their requirements – uses of
concrete – Types of concrete: Lime concrete, cement concrete and light
weight concrete.
2.3 PAINTS AND VARNISHES

Definition – Functions of paint – Types of paints and their uses - Oil,
Enamel, Emulsion, Distemper, Cement,Aluminium, Bituminous and Plastic
paints - Varnishes – Definition – Characteristics of a good varnish –
Ingredients of varnish– Types of varnish and their uses –Oil, Turpentine ,
Spirit and water varnish
2.4 METALS AND PLASTICS

Types of metals used in construction – Cast Iron ,Steel, Aluminium, G I,
Stainless steel – Market forms of steel – Steel for reinforced concrete - steel
for pre stressed concrete –Hot rolled steel sections – cold formed light
gauge section.- Plastics – Characteristics and Uses of plastics – Types –
Thermoplastics and Thermosetting plastics – Various plastic products:
pipes, taps, tubs, basins, doors, windows, water tanks, partitions – sizes ,
capacity and uses - Advantages of plastics – UPVC pipes and fittings -
Asbestos - uses of asbestos.
2.5 TIMBER AND TIMBER PRODUCTS

Types of Timber – Teak, Sal, Rosewood, Mango, and Jack – Defects in
timber – seasoning of timber - objectives – Timber Products – Veeners , Ply
woods , Particle Board , Fibre board, Hard board, Block board, Laminated
board – Uses.
2.6 ROOF COVERINGS

Definition – objectives and uses -Mangalore tiles – AC Sheets – FRB
Sheets- G.I. sheets- Shell roof – R C C roof – Advantages – Types.
2.7 DAMP PROOFING MATERIALS

Materials used for damp proofing – Properties and functions of various
types of water proofing materials commonly available – chemicals used for
grouting / Coating porous concrete surfaces – Admixtures for cement mortar
and cement concrete – Functions of Admixtures – Accelerators, Retarders,
Air repelling chemicals.
41 | P a g e
III 3.1 INTRODUCTION 16 Hrs

Permanent and temporary structures – Life of structures – Sub structure –
super structure – load bearing structure – framed structure – concept of
framed structure – advantages of framed structure.
3.2 FOUNDATION
Definition – objectives of foundation – Bearing capacity of soil – Definition –
maximum/ultimate and safe bearing capacity - Bearing capacity of different
types of soils – Factors affecting bearing capacity – Requirements of a good
foundation – Types of foundations – Shallow foundation : Spread
foundation, Isolated column footing, combined footing, continuous footing,
Raft foundation – Deep foundation : Pile, Stone columns – Types of piles :
Bearing pile, Friction pile, under reamed pile – Causes of failure of
foundation – Remedial measures.
3.3 STONE MASONRY

Definition – Common terms used : Natural bed, sill, corbel, course, cornice,
coping,weathering, throat, spalls, quoins, string course, lacing course,
through stone, plinth, jambs – Classification of stone masonry – Rubble
masonry : Coursed, un coursed & Random rubble masonry – Ashlar
masonry– points to be considered in the construction of stone masonry –
Tools used – Trowel, square, sprit level, plumb bob,chisel line & pins, spall
hammer, punch, pitching tool.
3.4 BRICK MASONRY

Definition – Common terms used – Header, stretcher, bed joint, lap,
perpend, closer, king, queen& bevelled, bat – permissible loads in brick
masonry - Bond - Types – Header, stretcher, English bond & Flemish bond
– one brick thick and one and a half brick thick– ‘T’ junction in English bond
–Points to be considered in the construction of brick masonry – Cavity bond
masonry- Defects in brick masonry – Maintenance of brick masonry.-
Reinforced brick masonry – purpose – Reinforced masonry walls – Masonry
reinforced columns - Advantage with respect to strength and Earthquake
resistance.
3.5 PARTITION
Definitions – Requirements of good partition walls – Types – Brick,
Concrete, glass, Aluminum frame with Glass sheet, timber, straw board,
wood wool, Asbestos Cement board and plastic board partitions.
3.6 WATER PROOFING AND DAMP PROOFING

Dampness – Causes of dampness – Effects of dampness - Damp proofing –
Damp proof courses (DPC) –– Method of mixing – Bad effects of excessive
Admixtures in RCC – Water proofing coats for sump / over head tank walls
– Methods of grouting..
42 | P a g e
IV 4.1 DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS 15 Hrs

Standard sizes of doors and windows – Location of doors and windows –
Different materials used – Doors – Component parts – Types – Framed and
panelled – gazed, flush, louvered, collapsible, rolling shutter and sliding
doors – Windows – Types – Casement, Glazed, Bay, Corner – Pivoted
Circular and Dormer windows – Ventilators – Definition – purpose – Types
– Mosquito proof – Ventilator combined with windows / doors.
4.2 HOLLOW BLOCK CONSTRUCTIONS

Hollow blocks – Advantages of hollow blocks – load bearing and non load
bearing hollow blocks - – Open cavity blocks – face shells, web, gross area,
nominal dimensions of blocks, minimum thickness of face shells and web,
grades of hollow concrete blocks -Materials used, admixtures added –
mixing, moulding, placing and compacting, curing, drying –Physical
requirements – Use of light weight aggregates -Hollow concrete (Hollow
Block) masonry –Construction of walls– Advantages of hollow concretes
masonry
.
4.3 STAIRS
Definition – Terms used – Location of stair – types – Straight, Dog legged,
Open well, bifurcated and spiral stairs – Moving stairs (Escalators) – Lift –
components – uses and advantage of lifts over stairs.
4.4 FLOORS AND FLOORING

Floors - Definition – Types – Timber, Composite, RCC floors – Flooring -
Definition- Materials used – Selection of flooring – types – Construction
Methods(As per C.P.W.D. Specifications)- Mosaic, Granolithic, Tiled,
Granite, Marble, Pre cast concrete flooring, Plastic & PVC tile flooring- –
Carpet tile & Rubber flooring.
4.5 ROOF
Definition –Types of roof – Flat roof – RCC roof – Pitched roof – Tile roof –
Shell roof – Technical terms - Steel roof truss – Types: King post, Raised
chord , Howe truss, Fan, fink , north light and Modified north light trusses.
4.6 WEATHERING COURSE

Weathering course –Purpose-Materials Required- Brick Jelly Concrete
preparation – Laying procedure- Preparation of mortar with Damp Proof
materials for laying pressed clay tiles- Pointing and finishing of laid clay
tiles.
43 | P a g e
V 5.1 POINTING 15 Hrs

Objectives – Mortar for pointing – Methods of pointing(As per C.P.W.D.
Specifications) – Types of pointing – Flush, recessed, weathered, keyed or
grooved pointing.
5.2 PLASTERING
Definitions – Objectives – Cement mortars for Plastering - Requirements of
a good plaster – Methods of Plastering- Defects in plastering- Stucco
plastering –Acoustic plastering – Granites silicon- plastering – Barium
plastering – Asbestos marble plastering – Facde finishing( Structural
Glazing)Sand faced – Pebble dash – Wall paper finishing–Wall tiling.
5.4 WHITE WASHING, COLOUR WASHING , DISTEMPERING,

PAINTING & VARNISHING
White washing – preparation of surface – Application of white wash – Colour
washing - Distempering – Preparation of surfaces – Application of
distemper- Painting & Varnishing -Preparation of surface – Application of
Painting & Varnishing.
5.5 ANTI TERMITE TREATMENT

Definition – objectives and uses – Methods of termite treatment.
5.6 SCAFFOLDING, SHORING AND UNDER PINNING
Scaffolding – Definition – Component parts – Types – Single, double &
Steel scaffolding, Shoring – Definition – Types – Raking, flying and dead
shores – Underpinning – definition – Purpose – Types – Pit Methods – Pile
Method.
5.7 FORM WORK

Definition – Materials used – Requirements of a good form work – Form
work for column, RC beams and RC slab.
TEST & REVISION 5 Hrs
Reference Book :
1. P.C.Varghese, “Building Materials”, Prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd., I Edition, 2011.

2. S.K.Duggal, “Building Materials”, New Age International (P) Ltd., II Edition, 2003.
3. S.C.Rangwala, “ Building Materials”,Charotar Publishing House, VII Edition, 1982.
4. P.C.Varghese, “BuildingConstructions”, Prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd., I Edition, 2011.
5. Dr. B.C. Punmia, “Building Construction”, Laxmi publications (p)Ltd New Delhi.
6. S.C.Rangwala, “ Building Construction”,Charotar Publishing House, VII Edition.
7. Ashokkumar Jain, “Building Construction”, Laxmi publications (p)Ltd Chennai.
8. I S 2185 Part I & II
9. PWD & CPWD Specifications.
44 | P a g e

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15
1. Why weathering course is laid on the top of roof slab?

2. List out the artificial stones used for flooring.
3. What are the uses of quick lime?
4. Define shakes?
5. What do you mean by framed structure?
6. Define asbestos?
7. What is meant by bond?
8. Define ceramics?
9. Define curtain wall.
10. Define partition.
11. What is meant by D.P.C?
12. Write short note on the dado?
13. Define core block?
14. Define Ferro cement?
15. What is meant by composite floor?
16. Define truss.
17. Define bifurcated stair?
18. Name any two types of pointing?
19. What do you mean by flaking?
20. What are the super imposed wads which come on a form work?
45 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21. A.) What are the various stages in the manufacture of brick and explain them. 12
OR
B. (i) What are the different types of shallow foundation and explain any two. 8
(ii) What ate the requirements of a good building stone? 4
22. A. (i) Explain the construction details an English bond and with neat sketches. 6
(ii) What are the deleterious materials in water allowed for construction and their limits? 6
OR
B. List out the different types of doors and explain any 3 types with sketches 12
23. A. Explain with a neat sketch a king-post truss indicating the parts. 12
OR
B. with sketches the various types of composite floors 12
24. A. (i) Sketch and explain : a) Open well stairs, b) Dog-legged stairs. 6
(ii) Describe the various types of pointing with sketches. 6
OR
B. Explain any two different types of scaffoldings with neat sketches 12
25. A. Explain in detail about the types of flooring. 12
OR
B. Write in detail about the physical requirements of concrete blocks. 12
46 | P a g e

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15
1. State any two stratified rocks.

2. Where is a pug mill used?
3. How is surki made?
4. What do you mean by OPC?
5. Name the different type of glass?
6. What is meant by curing of concrete?
7. Name the different type of glass?
8. Define Bearing capacity of a soil?
9. What are the two types of plastics?
10. What is meant by stone masonry?
11. Define Partition?
12. Expand D.P.C?
13. How are Bitumen sheets available?
14. Define Horn?
15. What is meant by Ferro cement?
16. What do you mean by composite floor
17. Define a flight?
18. State the purpose of Plaster?
19. Define Distempering?
20. What do you understand by the term anti-termites?
47 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
Note : i) Answer all Questions choosing either division (A) or division (B) of each question
21. A.) What are the various stages in the manufacture of brick and Explain them? 12
OR
B. (i) What are the different types of shallow Foundation and Explain any two? 8
(ii) What are the requirements of a good building stone? 4
22. A. (i) Explain the method of seasoning of timber? 6

(ii) Describe the properties of a mortar? 6
OR
B. (i) State the types of varnish and explain them. 6

(ii) Explain in detail the types of metals used in building construction? 6
23. A. Describe the points to be considered in the construction of Brick masonry? 12.
OR
B. Explain in detail about Admixtures and their Functions? 12
24. A. (i) Illustrate and explain the component parts of a stair? . 6

(ii) Describe the various types of roof coverings. 6
OR
B. Explain with sketches the various types of timber floors? 12
25. A. List out the technical terms used in pitched roof with a neat sketch and define each. 12
OR
B. (i) Write in detail about the defects in plastering. 6

(ii) Explain with a neat sketch any one type of scaffolding. 6
48 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
SURVEYING I

49 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : SURVEYING I
Marks
Internal Board
Total
SURVEYING I 5 Hrs 80 Hrs Assessment Examination
25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
OBJECTIVES:
On completion of the course, the student will posses knowledge about :
 Chain surveying
 Compass surveying
 Levelling
 Contour surveying
 Global Positioning System
50 | P a g e
21033 SURVEYING I
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Contents: Theory
I INTRODUCTION TO SURVEYING AND CHAIN SURVEYING 14 Hrs
1.1 INTRODUCTION TO SURVEYING

Definition – Objectives and uses of surveying – Main Divisions of surveying
– Plane and Geodetic surveying – Classification of Surveying - Principles of
surveying.
1.2 CHAIN SURVEYING
Introduction – Instruments used for chaining – Chains and Tapes - Types –
Definitions of terms commonly used in chain surveying : Survey stations,
base line, check line and tie line - Ranging : Direct and Indirect ranging –
Offsets : Definition, types, Instruments used and Procedure of taking an
offset – Conventional signs – Chain surveying : Equipments required, field
work and recording field notes – Errors in chaining - Obstacles in chaining :
Types and Problems – Tape correction : Simple problems.
II COMPASS SURVEYING 14 Hrs

Angular measurements – Necessity – Instruments used – Prismatic
compass : Construction details, functions and Temporary adjustment –
Types of meridians - Types of bearings : Whole circle and Reduced
bearings, Fore and Back bearings – Computation of included angles from
bearings – Computation of bearings from included angles – Problems -
Local attraction : Detection, Correction and Problems - Dip and declination –
Compass traversing – Errors in compass surveying.
III LEVELLING 12 Hrs

Levelling – Definition – Level – Parts – Functions – Accessories – Types of
levels : Dumpy level, Modern Tilting level, Quick setting level, Automatic
and Laser level – Levelling staff - Types – Component parts of Levelling
instrument – Definitions of terms used : Level surface, Horizontal and
Vertical surfaces, Datum, Bench marks, Reduced level, Rise, Fall, Line of
collimation, Axis of telescope, Axis of bubble tube, Station, Back sight, Fore
sight, Intermediate sight, Change point, Height of instrument, Focusing and
Parallax - Temporary adjustment of a level –Balancing Back sight and
Foresight – Principle of levelling - Simple levelling– Theory of Differential
levelling (Fly levelling) –Levelling field book - Reduction of levels – Height of
collimation and Rise and Fall method – Comparison of methods – Problems
on reduction of levels - Missing entry calculations : Problems.
51 | P a g e
IV LEVELLING ( CONTD. ) 14 Hrs
Types of levelling - Check levelling : Definition, Field Procedure and use -

Profile levelling or Longitudinal section(L.S) : Definition, use, field procedure
and plotting the profile - Cross-sectional levelling(C.S) : Definition, use, field
procedure and plotting the cross-section – Specimen field book for L.S and
C.S - Reciprocal levelling : Definition, use and problems on difference in
elevation - Curvature and Refraction : Effects, correction and problems –
Errors in levelling - Fundamental lines and desired relationship between
them – Permanent adjustments of a dumpy level : Process.
V CONTOUR SURVEYING AND GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM 14 Hrs
5.1 CONTOUR SURVEYING

Definition – Contour – Contouring – Characteristics of contours – Methods
of contouring – Direct and Indirect methods – Tacheometric contouring -
Interpolation of contours – Different methods – Contour gradient – Uses of
contour plan and map – Calculation of capacity of reservoir : Simple
problems.
5.2 GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM ( GPS )

Introduction - Maps – Types of Maps – Various Satellites used by GPS –
Differential GPS - Fundamentals of GPS – Application of GPS – GPS
Receivers – Hand held GPS Receiver – Function – Field procedure –
Observation and processing applications in Civil Engineering.
TEST & REVISION

12 Hrs
Reference Book :
1. Kanetkar.T.P. & S.V.Kulkarni, “Surveying and Levelling Part 1 & 2 ”, Puna vidyarthi griha,
Prakashan, 23rd edition, 2008.
2. Punmia.B.C. Ashok K.Jain & Arun K. Jain, ”Surveying Volume I ”, Laxmi Publications
th
Private Limited, 16 edition, 2011.
3. Mimi Das Saikia, Bhargab Mohan Das & Madan Mohan Das, “Surveying”, PHI Learning
Private Limited, Edition 2010.
4. S. K. Roy, “Fundamentals of Surveying”, PHI Learning Private Limited, Edition 2010.
5. Learning Material Development Project – NITTTR, Taramani, Chennai, CD programme on
GPS and GIS
52 | P a g e
21033 SURVEYING I
PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15
1. What is the primary objective of surveying?

2. State any one principle of surveying.
3. What is meant by perpendicular offset?
4. State the formula for Pull in tape correction.
5. Define the term True meridian.
6. State the relation between fore bearing and back bearing.
7. The whole circle bearing of a line is 275º. Convert the value to reduced bearing.
8. What is Local attraction?
9. State the abbreviation for M.S.L.
10. Define the term Bench mark.
11. What do you mean by Parallax?
12. State the error eliminated by balancing B.S and F.S distances.
13. What is the purpose of running Check levelling?
14. Give one example where Profile levelling is adopted.
15. State the formula for correction due to Curvature.
16. State any one instrumental error in levelling.
17. State any one method of Interpolation of contours.
18. Define the term Contour gradient.
19. What are the three measurements required using GPS receiver, to locate the position of a
point?
20. State any one application of GPS.
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21. A.) i) Briefly explain the procedure of ranging by direct method. 6

ii) Briefly explain how a cross-staff is used to set perpendicular offsets. 6
53 | P a g e
OR
B. (i) Define the following terms : Base line, Check line and Tie line. 3
(ii) A survey line intersects a tall building. To continue the line PQ, a line QR of 9
length 120m was set out at right angles to PQ. From R, two lines RS and RT
making angles of 45º and 60º with RQ were ranged. Find the length of RS and
RT in order that stations S and T may be in PQ produced. Also find the length of QS.
22. A. Draw a neat sketch of a prismatic compass and name the parts. Explain the functions of 12
the components.
OR
B. The following bearings were observed in running a compass traverse. Calculate the 12
interior angles of the traverse. Apply the required check.
LINE F.B B.B

AB 45º 15´ 225º 15´
BC 123º 15´ 303º 15´
CD 181º 00´ 1º 00´
DA 289º 30´ 109º 30´
23. A. Explain the temporary adjustments of a dumpy level. 12
OR
B. The following staff readings were observed with a level : 12
0.875, 1.235, 2.310, 1.385, 2.930, 3.125, 4.125, 0.120, 1.875, 2.030 and 2.765.
The first reading was taken with the staff held upon a B.M. of elevation 132.135. The
instrument have been moved after the second, fifth and eighth readings. Enter the
readings in a field book form and reduce the level by rise and fall. Apply usual check.
24. A. What is Longitudinal sectioning? Explain the field procedure for carrying out L.S 12
OR
B. (i) A and B are two points on the opposite banks of a valley. The staff readings 6
on A and B from one bank were 6.940 and 5.270. The level was shifted to other
bank and the readings were 8.160 and 5.490. Find the true difference in level and
R.L of B if the R.L of A is + 100.380
(ii) What are the fundamental lines of a level ? State the desired relationship between them. 6
25. A. Describe various characteristics of contours with neat sketches. 12
OR
B. (i) Briefly state the various satellite used by GPS. 6
(ii) Briefly explain three segments (Fundamental) on which GPS works 6
54 | P a g e
21033 SURVEYING I

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15
1. What are the two primary divisions of surveying?

2. State the purpose of conducting Astronomical surveying.
3. Define the term Ranging.
4. Sketch the conventional sign for Survey station.
5. State the function of focusing stud in a prismatic compass.
6. Define the term magnetic meridian.
7. Convert the reduced bearing S 42º 30´ W into whole circle bearing.
8. Name any two attractive bodies which cause local attraction.
9. State the function of slow motion screw in a dumpy level.
10. Mention different types of leveling staff.
11. Define the term Line of collimation.
12. State the necessity of choosing change point in levelling operation.
13. Write the formula to find the true difference in level between two points in reciprocal levelling.
14. Define cross-sectional levelling.
15. What is the combined effect due to curvature and refraction?
16. The following is the desired relationship between the fundamental lines in a Dumpy level.
“The axis of bubble tube need not be perpendicular to vertical axis” Is it True or False?
17. Define the term contour interval.
18. Sketch the contour line for a hill.
19. Mention different types of maps.
20. State three segments on which GPS works.
55 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21. A.) i) Briefly state the classification of surveying based on field of surveying. 4
ii) Explain with a neat sketch the constructional details of 30m chain 8
OR
B. (i) Briefly explain the field works in chain surveying. 6
(ii) A 30m tape was standardized at a pull of 90 N. A line was measured with this tape 6
under a pull of 210N and was found to be 167m. Find the true length of the line if the
cross-sectional area of the tape is 1.8mm2 and the young’s modulus of elasticity of steel
is 2.10 x 105 N/mm2.
22. A (i) Draw Define the following : Whole circle bearing, Reduced bearing, Dip and Declination. 4
(ii) Explain the field procedure of running a closed compass traverse. 8
OR
B. The following bearings were observed in running a compass traverse in a place where 12
local attraction is suspected. Calculate the interior angles of the traverse. Apply the
required check.
LINE F.B B.B

AB 92º 30´ 272º 30´
BC 10º 15´ 190º 00´
CD 211º 00´ 34º 00´
DE 112º 30´ 288º00´
EA 15º 30´ 197º 15´
At what stations do you suspect local attraction? Find the correct bearing.
23. A. Fly levels were run from a B.M. of R.L. 88.380 and the following readings were observed 12
B.S 3.260 5.280 4.720 7.080 6.350

F.S 4.160 3.920 5.780 6.440 3.200
Calculate the R.L of all the points by Height of collimation method. Apply usual check
56 | P a g e
OR
B. The following readings were taken from the page of an old level field book. Fill up the 12
missing readings. Apply usual checks
Point B.S I.S F.S Rise Fall R.L
B.M 1.450 420.690
1 X 1.670 x
2 4.320 417.820
3 X 417.440
4 X 1.320
5 4.230 x 2.520
6 2.380
7 X 1.040 422.090
8 x x 420.820
24. A. (i) Define the following : Check levelling and Reciprocal levelling 4
(ii) Explain the field procedure to run reciprocal levelling 8
OR
B. (i) Briefly describe the procedure for Plotting Cross-sectioning. 6
(ii) A level was set up at a point C at a distance of 350 m from A and 750 m from B. 6
The staff reading on the staff held at A was 1.650 and that on the staff held at B
was 2.865. Find the true difference in elevations between A and B. Also find the
R.L of B if the R.L of A was +105.000.
25. A. (i) State any five uses of contour maps. . 4

(ii) The area within the contour lines at the site of a reservoir and along the face of the 8
proposed dam is as follows:
Contour (m) 490 495 500 505 510 515 520

Area (sq.m) 24000 32500 34750 36800 39500 41000 42250
Take 490m as the bottom level of the reservoir and calculate the capacity of reservoir
by Trapezoidal rule and Prismoidal formula.
OR
B. (i) Briefly explain the various features of any one Handheld GPS receiver 8
(ii) State the applications of GPS. 4
57 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING I

58 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING I
Marks
CIVIL Internal Board
Total
ENGINEERING Assessment Examination
6 Hrs 96 Hrs
DRAWING I
25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
On completion of the course, the student will be :
 Able to study Conventions and Abbreviations;

 Able to prepare layout of buildings;
 Gain thorough knowledge of the rules, regulations and standards of buildings;
 Able to read the line sketch and prepare plan, sections and elevations of buildings;
and gain thorough knowledge of planning various types of buildings.
3 Hrs
I INTRODUCTION
1 CONVENTIONS, SYMBOLS :
General – Conventions- Title block- Scales- Line work- Lettering-

Symbols- Abbreviations
59 | P a g e
2. DRAWINGS 12 Hrs
1. Standard symbols used in Civil Engineering Drawing.
2. Elevation of :
(a) Fully panelled double leaf door.
(b) Fully Panelled single leaf door
(c) Flush door
(d) Fully Panelled window with grill
(e) Partly glazed and partly panelled window
(f) Lean- to - roof
(g) King post roof truss
(h) Steel roof truss
(i) Rain water Harvesting – Recharging into the ground
(a) Shallow well sytem
(b) Percolation pit system.
3 BUILDING BYE-LAWS AND SUBMISSION DRAWINGS 6 Hrs
Objects of bye-laws- Importance of bye-laws- Function of local authority-

Set backs- Plot Coverage- Number of floors- Height of building- Built up
Area- Floor space index- Views and details necessary for a civil
engineering drawing- Site Plan – Necessity for Approval of plans from
local body- Layout plan and key plan-Composition of submission
drawing.
II PLANNING
6 Hrs
1 PLANNING OF RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
Types of residential buildings- Usual requirements-Types of Rooms –

Minimum Size requirement for each type of rooms -Furniture
arrangement in each room- Position of stairs / lifts- Position of Doors/
Windows House drainage and Sanitary fittings – Sump/Water tanks-
Plumbing Pipes -Preparation of line drawing for given requirements with
dimensions, not to scale.
2 PLANNING OF INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES 3Hrs

Planning aspects - Requirements of industrial units - Sheets for
pitched roof coverings – Rolling Shutters - Ramps- Stores- Public
Toilets/ Bath rooms- Dining/ Resting rooms- Ventilation and Lighting -
Preparation of line drawing for given requirement with measurements
not to scale:
60 | P a g e
3 PLANNING OF PUBLIC BUILDINGS 3 Hrs
Types of public buildings - Miscellaneous public buildings - General

requirements of Public Buildings -Landscape architecture-
Preparation of line plan with dimensions for the given requirements , not
to scale.
III BUILDING DRAWINGS

Preparation of plan, section and elevation of buildings with specifications 54 Hrs
for the given line drawing to suitable Scale:
1. A Reading room with R.C.C flat roof
2. A House with single bed room and attached bathroom with
R.C.C. flat roof.
3. A residential building with two bed rooms with R.C.C. flat roof
4. A house with single bed and hall with partly tiled and partly
R.C.C. flat roof.
5. A Two roomed house with RCC slope roof with gable ends
6. A House with fully tiled roof with hips and valleys
7 . A Small workshop with north light steel roof truss (6 to 10m Span)
over R.C.C. Columns.
8 A Primary health center for rural area with R.C.C roof.
9. A Village Library building with R.C.C flat roof
10. A small Restaurant building with R.C.C flat roof
11. A Single storeyed School building with R.C.C flat roof
12. A Bank building with R.C.C flat roof
REVISION & TEST

9 Hrs
Part A - ( Unit I & II -2 X 3 , Unit III -1 X 9 ) - 15 Marks
Part B - ( Unit III ) - 60 Marks
Reference Book :
1. National Building Code (NBC-2012)

2. TamilNadu District Municipal building rules and by-laws
3. B.P. Verma ,”Civil Engineering Drawing and house planning”
4. Dr N. Kumaraswamy and A. Kameswara Rao,” Building Planning and Drawing”,
5. G. Vaidhyanathan, I. Kulasekaran, G. sathish Kumar “Building Planning and Construction
Companion”,
6. S.C.Rangwala ,”Civil Engineering Drawing “,
7. V.R.Thothathri, “A Guide to Civil Engg Drawing.
61 | P a g e
21034 CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING I
MODEL QUESTION PAPER I

Time : Three Hours
( Maximum Marks : 75 )
N.B. 1. Answer all questions under Part A in the drawing sheet supplied.
2. Answer question under Part B in the drawing sheet supplied.
3. The sketches under Part A should be drawn using pencil and drawing
instruments, not necessarily to scale.
4. Any data, not given may be assumed suitably and should be indicated in
the drawing.
PART A (15 marks)
I. Answer the following (2 x 3 = 6)
1. What is the main factor to be considered while planning?

2. Specify the minimum dimension for a living room in residential building
as per the NBC standards.
II Sketch the elevation of a steel truss using the following details (1 x 9 = 9)

Wall thickness : 300 mm
Bottom tie member : 2 Nos flat 80 X 6 mm
Pitch of roof : 30 ͦ
Strut : Single ISA 70 X45 X 8 mm
Principal rafter : Two ISA 80 X 50 X 8 mm
Cleat angle : 75 X 75 X 8 mm
Purlins : 125 X75 X 8 mm
All other ties : 60 mm X 10 mm flat
Roof covering : G.I. Sheet
Gusset Plate : 10 mm thick
PART B ( 60 marks )
III The sketch shows the line plan of “A two bed room house with R.C.C. roof”. The
dimensions noted therein indicate the clear dimensions between the inside walls. The
specifications are given below:-
Foundation:-
Foundation shall be of C.C. !:4:8 mix, 1000 wide and 300 thick laid at 1100 below G.L. for all main
walls and verandah retaining wall. It consists of two footings of size 700 X 400 and 500 X 400 in
C.M. 1:6
Basement:-
The basement will be in brick work in C.M. 1:5, 300 mm wide and 600 thick above G.L. A Damp
Proof course in C. M. 1:3, 20 thick will be provided for all walls.
Super Structure:-
All main walls will be in brick work in C.M. !:5, 200 mm thick. The inner partition walls in toilet will be
100 mm thick. The height of all the walls will be 3000 mm above floor level.
62 | P a g e
Roofing:-
The roofing will be R.C.C. 1:2:4 mix, 120 mm thick flat slab. Verandah slab will be of R.C.C. 1:2:4
mix, 100 thick at a height of 2600 mm from verandah floor level. A weathering course in brick jelly
lime concrete plastered with mortar 1:5:9 mix, 75 mm thick will be provided.
Lintels:-
R.C.C. lintel 120 thick over all the openings shall be provided. Suitable sunshades for all
external openings shall be provided.
Flooring:-
The flooring will be in C.C. 1:4:8, 120 mm thick plastered smooth with C.M. 1:3, 20 mm thick for all
the portions.
Steps:-
Provide steps of rise 150mm and tread 250 mm
Draw the following views to a suitable scale:-
a) Plan of the building - 20 Marks

b) Section on “AB” - 25 Marks
c) Front Elevation - 15 Marks
63 | P a g e
W1 D1
BED ROOM 2 PASSAGE 1600 W.C 1600 1700 V

WIDE D1
W1 4200 3600
BATH 1600 V
D1
W.C 1600x1700 D D
V D1
DINING KITCHEN
3800x3500
D
3200x3800 W1
V BATH D1
1600x1700 D D
BED ROOM 1
W1 4200
A B
LIVING ROOM
W1
3300 W1
D
VERANDAH
3000x900
W1
MASONRY PILLAR
300
D FLUSH DOOR 1000

D1 PANELLED DOOR 900
W1 WINDOW GLAZED 1200
V VENTILATOR GLAZED 1200
C CUP BOARD LINE PLAN
64 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
MATERIAL TESTING LAB I

65 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : MATERIAL TESTING LAB I
Marks
MATERIAL Internal Board
Total
TESTING LAB 3 Hrs 48 Hrs Assessment Examination
PRACTICE I 25 75 100 3 Hrs
Objectives:
 Study of UTM, Torsion testing machine, Hardness tester, Compression testing machine,
 To determine the Material Properties- test conducted on steel, wood, cement, Aluminium,
Brass and Brick.
Part A 18 Hrs
1. Tension test on mild steel and deformed steel bars.
2. Deflection test on Simply Supported Beams of
(a) wood and (b) steel
to find Young’s modulus
3. Torsion test on mild steel bar to determine the Modulus of Rigidity.
4. Determination of the fineness of cement (Blains Permeability
apparatus).
5. Initial and final setting time of cement with Vicat's Apparatus.
6. Determination of normal consistency of cement by Vicat's
Apparatus.
7. Soundness test on cement by Autoclave method.
66 | P a g e
.
Part B 8. Finding Brinnel's and Rockwell's hardness numbers of the 18 Hrs
following materials..
(a) Mild steel (b) Brass (c) Aluminum.
9. Compression Test on Wooden cube .
10. Double Shear test on M.S.bar.
11. Impact Test on mild steel by performing Izod and Charpy tests
12. Compression test on Bricks and Solid Blocks.
13. Water absorption test on Bricks and pressed tiles.
14. Flexure test on Tiles.
Part C ( Not for Examination) 6 Hrs
15. Study of UTM, Torsion testing machine, Hardness testing

Machine, Compression testing Machine etc. Drawing sketches and
marking the components.
16. Demonstration of Strain gauges and Strain indicators.
17. Study of Strain Recording Instruments.
. REVISION & TEST

6 Hrs
SCHEME OF EXAMINATION:
1. In the examination the students have to be given two experiments one from Part A and
another from Part-B by lot.
2. Allocation of marks:
Part - A - 40 Marks.
Part - B - 30 Marks.
Viva-Voce - 05 Marks.
Record - 25 Marks.
Total - 100 Marks.
67 | P a g e
21035 MATERIAL TESTING LAB I
Model Question paper
Duration: 3 hours Maximum Marks : 75
(The candidate has to be given any one of the following question by lot -
No choice shall be given)
1(a) Conduct a tension test on the given M.S. Specimen and determine yield stress, breaking stress,
ultimate stress, percentage elongation, and percentage reduction in area. (40 marks)
(b) Determine the Rockwell Hardness Number of the given Aluminium (30 marks)
2(a) Conduct a deflection test on the given M.S. beam and determine the value of Young’s modulus of
the material. Draw a graph “load Vs deflection”. (40 marks)
(b) Conduct water absorption test on brick and determine the percentage water absorption
of brick in 20 minutes. (30 marks)
3(a) Conduct a deflection test on wooden beam and determine the value of Young’s Modulus of wood.
Draw a graph “load Vs deflection” (40 marks)
( b) Conduct Rockwell’s hardness test and determine the RHN of given Brass. (30 marks)
4(a) Determine the percentage of water required for preparing a paste of normal consistency of the
given sample of cement. (40 marks)
(b) Conduct Brinell’s hardness test and determine the BHN of mild steel (30 marks)
5(a) Determine the initial setting time of given cement. Write the procedure of finding the final setting
time of cement (40 marks)
(b) Conduct a double shear test on the given steel rod and determine the ultimate shear strength of
steel. Assuming a suitable f.o.s find the allowable shear stress. (30 marks)
6(a) Conduct a torsion test on the given specimen and determine the rigidity modulus of the material
(40 marks)
(b) Determine the flexural strength of the given tile by conducting a bending test (30 marks)
7(a)Conduct Autoclave Expansion test on the given cement sample and find and find the percentage
expansion in…..minutes. (40 marks)
(b) Conduct impact test on mild steel specimen and determine the impact value of the material (Izod
or Charpy) (30 marks)
68 | P a g e
8(a) Conduct a Fineness test on the given cement sample in Blains Permeability apparatus and find its
specific surface area . (40 marks)
(b) Conduct a compression test on the given wooden cube and find its ultimate strength parallel to its
fibres. (30 marks)
9(a) Conduct a tension test on the given deformed steel bar and determine yield stress, breaking
stress, ultimate stress, percentage elongation, and percentage reduction in area. (40 marks)
(b) Conduct a compression test on the given brick / solid block and determine its ultimate compressive
strength. Assuming a F.O.S find the permissible stress for the brick. (30 marks)
ALLOCATION OF MARKS
Part - A Part - B
S.No Description
Max. Marks(40) Max.Marks(30)
1 Procedure 5 5
2 Tabulation and Observation 15 10
3 Calculations 10 5
4 Sketch / Graph 5 5
5 Accuracy of result 5 5
69 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
SURVEYING PRACTICE I

70 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : SURVEYING PRACTICE I
Marks
Internal Board
Total
SURVEYING Assessment Examination
6 Hrs 96 Hrs
PRACTICE I
25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
On completion of the course, the student:
 will have experience in handling surveying equipments and do practical exercises in Chain
surveying, Compass surveying, , Levelling and GPS.
Part A 15 Hrs
1 CHAIN SURVEYING
1.1. Study of chain, tape and accessories used for chain survey.
1.2. Unfolding, Spreading, Aligning, Reading and Folding a chain.
1.3. Use of Cross staff – Taking offsets of objects and recording.
1.4. Chaining and ranging a line.
1.5. Determination of area of a plot using chains (Minimum two
exercises – One base line and at least two offsets on either side
of a chain line)
1.6. Chain survey traverse around a building and plot the existing
building.
71 | P a g e
2 COMPASS SURVEYING
15 Hrs
2.1 Study of Prismatic compass, setting up over a station and observe

bearings of lines.
2.2. Running closed traverse and finding the included angles –

Minimum 5 points.
2.3. Determination of distance between two points when their base is

accessible.
2.4. Determination of distance between two points when their base is

inaccessible.
PART B 3 LEVELLING 42 Hrs
3.1. Study of a Level - Temporary adjustment, taking readings and

booking in a field book.
3.2. Fly levelling – Reduction by Height of Collimation method -

Minimum 6 bench marks with two change points (Minimum Four
exercises)
3.3. Fly levelling – Reduction by Rise and Fall method - Minimum 6

bench marks with two change points
(Minimum Four exercises)
3.4. Fly levelling – with inverted readings.
3.5. Check levelling and reduction of levels (Minimum four exercises)
PART C 4 GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM ( GPS ) 12 Hrs
4.1. Reading of various Maps like Taluk map and District map.
4.2. Study of Hand held GPS.
4.3. Measurement of Latitude, Longitude and Altitude using hand held

GPS.
4.4. Selection and marking of routings (Way points) using hand held
GPS.
REVISION & TEST 12 Hrs
72 | P a g e
In Board Examination, questions will be chosen as follows:
PART – A By Lot ONE question - 25 Marks

(Either in chain survey or compass survey )
PART – B Levelling (Compulsory) - 35 Marks
PART – C ONE question from GPS - 10 Marks
Viva-Voce - 5 Marks
Record Marks - 25 Marks

----------------
TOTAL 100 Marks
----------------
ALLOCATION OF MARKS
Part - A Part - B Part - C

S.No Description Max. Max. Max.
Marks(25) Marks(35) Marks(10)
Procedure, Handling
1 5 5 3
Instruments / Tools
Field works, Observation and

2 10 15 5
Tabulation
Calculations and Check /

3 7 12 0
drawings.
4 Accuracy of result 3 3 2
73 | P a g e
21036 - SURVEYING PRACTICE I
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time : Three hours Maximum Marks : 75
PART – A : By Lot ( 25 Marks )
1. Determine the area of a Plot marked on the ground (between 5/6 station points), by
conducting chain survey. Use Cross-staff for taking offsets.
2. Run closed compass survey (between 5/6 station points) and find the included angles. Apply
usual check.
3. Determine the distance between the two accessible points QR from the station point P. Use
Prismatic Compass.
4. Determine the distance between the two points PQ from the base line AB of length 5m/10m.
Use Prismatic Compass.
PART – B : Compulsory (35 Marks)
5. Run Fly level connecting the following bench marks and reduce their levels by Height of
Collimation method / Rise and Fall method. Assume R.L of BM1 as 100.000m.
1. BM1
2. BM2
3. BM3
4. BM4 – Inverted reading
5. BM5
6. BM6
7. BM7 - Inverted reading
8. BM8
9. BM9
10. Close on the starting point.
PART – C : By Lot (10 Marks)
6. Measure Latitude, Longitude and Altitude and locate the position of any three points in the
College campus. Use Handheld GPS.
7. Mark waypoints of a route (Say. College main building to Hostel building / College entrance
to the Laboratory blocks etc.) and display the route map. Use Handheld GPS.
74 | P a g e
COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
COMPUTER APPLICATIONS PRACTICAL

75 | P a g e
L-SCHEME
Course Name : COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES

Subject Title : COMPUTER APPLICATIONS PRACTICAL

No of weeks per semester: 16 weeks
Marks
Internal Board
COMPUTER Total
Assessment Examination
4 Hrs 64 Hrs
APPLICATIONS
PRACTICAL 25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
On completion of the course, the student
 will understand the Windows operating systems

 Familiarize and customize the desktop
 Use the different facilities available in the word processor
 Analyze the data sheet
 Create and manipulate the database
 Prepare PowerPoint presentation
 Understand Internet concepts and usage of e-mail
GUIDELINES:
 All the eighteen experiments given in the list of experiments should be completed
and all the experiments should included for the end semester practical examination.
 The end semester practical examination question paper contains two questions-the
first question from section-I and the second question from section-II. Each question
carries 35 marks and viva voce carries 5 marks.
 The computer systems should be 1:2 ratio for practical classes
76 | P a g e
ALLOCATION OF MARKS
1. Internal Assessment – 25 Marks
DESCRIPTION MARKS ALLOTTED
Record with Printout 10
Assignment 5
Attendance 5
Model Examination 5
Total 25 MARKS
2. Board Examinations – 75 Marks
Content Max. Marks

Section I Section II
Writing steps 15 15
Execution of exercise 15 15
Result with Printout 5 5
Viva voce 5
Total 75 Marks
77 | P a g e
LAB EXERCISES
SECTION – I
WINDOWS
Introduction- History of Windows- screen saver and monitor resolution – Wallpaper setting- Folder
manipulation – properties of a folder – Recycle bin – Short cuts – Sorting Folder – Switching
between Application – Copying in CD/DVD settings – Recording Audio files.
Exercises
1. a. Installing screen saver and change the monitor resolution by 1280X960
b. Setting wall papers
c. Creating, moving, deleting and renaming a folder
d. Copy, paste and cut a folder/file
e. Displaying the properties for a file or folder
2. a. Restoring files and folders from Recycle bin
b. Creating short cuts for folder/file
c. Finding a file or folder by name
d. Selecting and moving two or more files/folders using mouse
e. Sorting folders/files.
3. a. Copying files into CD/DVD
b. Switching between applications
c. Making the taskbar wider and hiding the taskbar
d. Recording and saving an audio file
e. Set/Change the date and time.
78 | P a g e
WORD PROCESSING
Introduction – Menus – Tool bar – Create – Edit – Save – Alignment – Font Size – Formatting –
Tables – Fill Colours – Mail Merge – Page Setup - Preview – Water marking – Header – Footer –
Clip art.
Exercises
4. Create the following table and perform the operations given below
ABC PVT. LTD.
Chennai
Production Summary of various Units in every Quarter
Unit Product – ID Jan-Mar Apr-June July-Sept. Oct-Dec.
Unit - I 56 234. 50 74 125
Unit - II 142 236 126 175 251
Unit - III 213 541 216 60 43
Unit - IV 125 243 127 250 136
Unit - V 143 152 138 80 45
 Arrange Unit name as left align and other columns as right align.
 Use doubled Border to the Summary Title and fill with 15% gray colour.
 Implement merging and splitting two or more cells
 Give alternative fore colour for columns.
 Print the above table.
5. Create a standard covering letter and use mail merge to generate the customized letters for
applying to a job in various organizations. Also, create a database and generate labels for the
applying organizations.
6. Create a news letter of three pages with two columns text. The first page contains some
formatting bullets and numbers. Set the document background colour and add ‘confidential’ as
the watermark. Give the document a title which should be displayed in the header. The header/
footer of the first page should be different from other two pages. Also, add author name and
date/ time in the header. The footer should have the page number.
79 | P a g e
SPREADSHEET
Introduction – Menus – Tool bar – Create – Edit – Save – Formatting cells – Chart wizard – Fill
Colours – Creating and using formulas – Sorting – Filtering.
Exercises
7. Create a result sheet containing Candidate's Register No., Name, Marks for six subjects.
Calculate the total and result. The result must be calculated as below and failed candidates
should be turned to red.
Result is Distinction if Total >= 70 %
First Class if Total > = 60 % and < 70 %
Second Class if Total >= 50 % and < 60 %
Pass if Total >= 35 % and < 50 %
Fail otherwise
Create a separate table based on class by using auto filter feature.
8. Create a table of records with columns as Name and Donation Amount. Donation amount
should be formatted with two decimal places. There should be at least twenty records in the
table. Create a conditional format to highlight the highest donation with blue colour and
lowest donation with red colour. The table should have a heading.
9. Prepare line, bar and pie chart to illustrate the subject wise performance of the class for any
one semester.
SECTION – II
DATABASE
Introduction – Menus – Tool bar – Create – Edit – Save – Data types – Insert – Delete – Update –
View – Sorting and filtering – Queries – Report – Page setup – Print.
Exercises
10. Create Database to maintain at least 10 addresses of your class mates with the following
constraints
 Roll no. should be the primary key.

 Name should be not null
11. Prepare a payroll for employee database of an organization with the following details:
Employee Id, Employee name, Date of Birth, Department and
Designation, Date of appointment, Basic pay, Dearness Allowance,
House Rent Allowance and other deductions if any.
Perform simple queries for different categories.
12. Design a pay slip for a particular employee from the above database
80 | P a g e
PRESENTATION
Introduction – Menus – Tool bar – Create – Edit – Save – Slide transition – Insert image – Hyper
link – Slide numbers – View slide show with sound – Photo album – Clip art.
Exercises
13. Make a marketing presentation of any consumer product with at least 10 slides. Use
different customized animation effects on pictures and clip art on any four of the ten slides.
14. Create a Presentation on “Communication Skills” with three different slide transitions with
sound effect.
15. Create a photo album in PowerPoint.
INTERNET
Introduction – Browsers – Open a website – Email: Send, receive and delete – Email with
Attachments Google docs – Search Engines – Searching topics
Exercises
16. Create an e-mail id and perform the following
 Write an e-mail inviting your friends to your Birthday Party.
 Make your own signature and add it to the e-mail message.
 Add a word attachment of the venue route
 Send the e-mail to at least 5 of your friends.
17. Create a presentation on Google docs. Ask your friend to review it and comment on it. Use
“Discussion” option for your discussions on the presentation.
18. Find out the direction and distance about road travel from Delhi to Agra using the Internet
search. Also make a report of the Map and other details like place to stay and visit at Agra.
Year / Sem: II / III Subject: COMPUTER APPLICATIONS PRACTICAL Code: 20001
Answer all the questions Max.Marks:75
1 Section - I
Prepare line, bar and pie chart to illustrate the subject wise performance of the class for
any one semester.
2
Section - II
Create an e-mail id and perform the following
 Write an e-mail inviting your friends to your Birthday Party.

 Make your own signature and add it to the e-mail message.
 Add a word attachment of the venue route
 Send the e-mail to at least 5 of your friends.
81 | P a g e
LIST OF EQUIPMENTS AND THE QUANTITY REQUIRED FOR A BATCH OF 30
STUDENTS
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
Operating System Windows XP or Windows Vista or Windows 7 / Linux
Office Package Microsoft office 2000 or Office 2003 or Office 2007/Open Office
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
Desktop Computer System 30 Nos
with latest configuration
Power Backup (UPS) 10 KVA
Laser Printer 3 Nos
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO BE FOLLOWED BY STUDENTS

 Do not touch, connect or disconnect any plug or cable without teacher’s permission
 Don’t attempt to touch any live wires
 Systems should be shutdown properly after completion of work
REFERENCES
Year of
TITLE AUTHOR PUBLISHER
Publication
Computer Applications Dr.V.Karthikeyan Learning Resource Centre,
Practical Manual Mr.D.Arulselvan Thiagarajar Polytechnic 2012
College, Salem- 636 005
Windows 7 in easy steps Harshad kotecha Tata McGrawHill 2011
A First Course in Computer Sanjay Sasena Vikas Publications
2009
2003
MS Office – 2003 Ramesh Bangia Kanna Book Publication 2005
Introduction to Computers with Alexis Leon & Tata McGraw-Hill
2002
MS-Office 2000 Mathews Leon
Mastering Microsoft Office Gini Courter & BPB Publications
1999
2000 Annette Marquis
82 | P a g e
IV SEMESTER
83 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
THEORY OF STRUCTURES

84 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Semester : IV Semester
Subject Title : THEORY OF STRUCTURES
Marks
Internal Board
Total
THEORY OF Assessment Examination
STRUCTURES 6 Hrs 96 Hrs
25 75 100 3 Hrs
Objectives:
 Determine the Slope and Deflection of Determinate beams by area moment method.
 Analyse Propped cantilevers and Fixed beams by Area-Moment method and draw SFD,
BMD.
 Analyse Continuous beams by Theorem of Three moments and draw SFD, BMD.
 Analyse Continuous beams, Portal frames and Substitute frames by Moment Distribution
Method and draw SFD, BMD.
 Define different types of Columns and find critical loads of Columns.
 Analyse Columns and Chimneys subject to eccentric loading / moment / horizontal loads
and find maximum and minimum combined stresses in their sections.
 Calculate maximum and minimum bearing pressures and check the stability of Masonry
Dams and Retaining walls.
85 | P a g e
IV SEMESTER
21041 THEORY OF STRUCTURES
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Contents: Theory
18 Hrs
I 1.1 SLOPE AND DEFLECTION OF BEAMS
Deflected shapes / Elastic curves of beams with different support conditions

–Definition of Slope and Deflection- Flexural rigidity and Stiffness of beams-
Mohr’s Theorems – Area Moment method for slope and deflection of beams
– Derivation of expressions for maximum slope and maximum deflection of
standard cases by area moment method for cantilever and simply supported
beams subjected to symmetrical UDL & point loads – Numerical problems
on slopes and deflections at salient points of Cantilevers and Simply
supported beams from first principles
1.2 PROPPED CANTILEVERS
Statically determinate and indeterminate Structures- Stable and Unstable

Structures- Degree of Indeterminacy-Concept of Analysis of Indeterminate
beams - Definition of Prop –Types of Props- Prop reaction from deflection
consideration – SF and BM diagrams by area moment method for UDL
throughout the span, central and non-central concentrated loads – Propped
cantilever with overhang – Point of Contra flexure.
II 2.1 FIXED BEAMS – AREA MOMENT METHOD 18 Hrs
Introduction to fixed beam –Degree of indeterminacy of fixed beam-

Sagging and Hogging bending moments – Determination of fixing
end(support) moments(FEM) by Area Moment method – Derivation of
Expressions for Standard cases – Fixed beams subjected to symmetrical
and unsymmetrical concentrated loads and UDL – SF and BM diagrams for
Fixed beams with supports at the same level (sinking of supports or
supports at different levels are not included) – Points of Contra flexure –
Problems- Slope and Deflection of fixed beams subjected to only
symmetrical loads by area moment method – Problems.
86 | P a g e
II 2.2 CONTINUOUS BEAMS – THEOREM OF THREE MOMENTS METHOD
Introduction to continuous beams – Degree of indeterminacy of continuous

beams with respect to number of spans and types of supports –
Simple/Partially fixed/ Fixed supports of beams- General methods of
analysis of Indeterminate structures – Clapeyron’s theorem of three
moments – Application of Clapeyron’s theorem of three moments for the
following cases – Two span beams with simply supported or fixed ends –
Two span beams with one end fixed and the other end simply supported –
Two span beams with one end simply supported or fixed and other end
overhanging –Determination of Reactions at Supports- Application of Three
moment equations to Three span Continuous Beams and Propped
cantilevers –Problems- Sketching of SFD and BMD for all the above cases.
III 3.1 CONTINUOUS BEAMS – MOMENT DISTRIBUTION METHOD 18 Hrs

Introduction to Carry over factor, Stiffness factor and Distribution factor –
Stiffness Ratio or Relative Stiffness- Concept of distribution of un balanced
moments at joints - Sign conventions – Application of M-D method to
Continuous beams of two / three spans and to Propped cantilever
(Maximum three cycles of distribution) –Finding Support Reactions-
Problems - Sketching SFD and BMD for two / three span beams.
3.2 PORTAL FRAMES AND SUBSTITUTE FRAMES – MOMENT

DISTRIBUTION METHOD
Definition of Frames – Types – Bays and Storey - Sketches of Single/Multi

Storey Frames, Single/Multi Bay Frames- Portal Frame(Single storey, Single
bay frame) – Sway and Non sway Frames- Analysis of Non sway
( Symmetrical) Portal Frames for Joint moments by Moment Distribution
Method and drawing BMD only– Definition of Framed Structure and
Substitute frames – Analysis of a Two bay Substitute Frame(with either
unequal spans or unequal loads, but with equal floor heights) for vertical
load only by Moment Distribution method ( maximum three cycles only) and
drawing BMD for the beams ( SFD not required).
87 | P a g e
IV 4.1 COLUMNS AND STRUTS 16 Hrs

Columns and Struts – Definition – Short and Long columns – End conditions
– Equivalent length / Effective length– Slenderness ratio – Axially loaded
short column - Axially loaded long column – Euler’s theory of long columns
– Derivation of expression for Critical load of Columns with hinged ends –
Expressions for other standard cases of end conditions (separate
derivations not required) – Problems – Derivation of Rankine’s formula for
Crippling load of Columns– Factor of Safety- Safe load on Columns- Simple
problems.
4.2 COMBINED BENDING AND DIRECT STRESSES

Direct and Indirect stresses – Combination of stresses – Eccentric loads on
Columns – Effects of Eccentric loads / Moments on Short columns –
Combined direct and bending stresses – Maximum and Minimum stresses
in Sections– Problems – Conditions for no tension – Limit of eccentricity –
Middle third rule – Core or Kern for square, rectangular and circular
sections – Chimneys subjected to uniform wind pressure –Combined
stresses in Chimneys due to Self weight and Wind load- Chimneys of
Hollow square and Hollow circular cross sections only – Problem
V 5.1 MASONRY DAMS 16 Hrs

Gravity Dams – Derivation of Expression for maximum and minimum
stresses at Base – Stress distribution diagrams – Problems – Factors
affecting Stability of masonry dams – Factor of safety- Problems on
Stability of Dams– Minimum base width and maximum height of dam for no
tension at base – Elementary profile of a dam – Minimum base width of
elementary profile for no tension.
5.2 EARTH PRESSURE AND RETAINING WALLS
Definition – Angle of repose /Angle of Internal friction of soil– State of
equilibrium of soil – Active and Passive earth pressures – Rankine’s theory
of earth pressure – Assumptions – Lateral earth pressure with level back fill
/ level surcharge – Earth pressure due to Submerged soils – (Soil retained
on vertical back of wall only) – Maximum and minimum stresses at base–
Stress distribution diagrams – Problems – Stability of earth retaining walls –
Problems to check the stability of walls- Minimum base width for no tension.
REFERENCE :
1. S. Ramamrutham, “Theory of structures”

2. B.C. Punmia, Ashok Jain & Arun Jain,” Theory of structures “,Laxmi Publications, 9th Edition,
April1992.
3. S.B. Junnarkar, Mechanics of structures (Vol.II) Charator Publiching,22nd Edition,1997
4. V.N. Vazirani & M.M. Ratwani, “Analysis of structures”
5. R.L. Jindal , “Elementary Theory of Structures”
6. FV. Warnock, “Strength of materials”
7. Madhan Mohan Dass, “ Structural Analysis” PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
88 | P a g e

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15

1. Define the term “Slope”
2. What will be the deflection at mid span of a simply supported beam carrying udl ?
3. What do you mean by indeterminate structures ?
4. What will be the BM at a prop provided at the end of a cantilever ?
5. What will be the degree of indeterminacy of a fixed beam with only vertical loads ?
6. How many points of contra flexure will be there in a fixed beam ?
7. What is meant by partially fixed end? Where you can expect partial fixity ?
8. State Clapeyron’s theorem ?
9. Define “carry over factor”
10. Two members of same material, equal length, equal width and with same end condition
meet at a joint. The depth of one member is bigger than that of other. Which member
will have the larger value of distribution factor ?
11. What is meant by substitute frame ?
12. How many bays a Portal frame has ?
13. What do you mean by “Critical load” of a column ?
14. Define “Effective length” of a column
15. Differentiate direct stress and indirect stress
16. What will be the diameter of core of a circular section ?
17. Which are the main factors affecting the stability of a masonry dam ?
18. When tension is developed at the base of a dam ?
19. Which side of a retaining wall has passive earth pressure ?
20. At which point of the base the bearing pressure will be maximum in a retaining wall ?
89 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21. A.) A cantilever beam of length 4.0 m carries an u.d.l of 12 kN/m for a distance of 2.0 m from
support and a point load of 15 kN at its free end. EI=7.2x104 kN.m2. Find the slope and
deflection at the free end of the beam by area-moment method. .
OR
B. A cantilever beam of length 4.0 m carries an u.d.l of 12 kN/m for a distance of 2.0 m from
support and a point load of 15 kN at its free end. EI=7.2x104 kN.m2. Find the slope and
deflection at the free end of the beam by area-moment method. .
22. A. A fixed beam of 8 m span carries an u.d.l of 20kN/m on its full length and a point load of
40 kN at 2m from its left support. Draw the SF and BM diagrams..
OR
B. A two span continuous beam of 4m and 6m spans are fixed at both of its extreme ends. The
size of the beam is uniform in both spans. The 4m span carries an u.d.l of 24kN/m throughout
its length. The 6m span carries two point loads of 30 kN each at its one third points. Find out
the support moments using theorem of three moments
23. A. A two span continuous beam ABC is fixed at support A and simply supported at support C.
AB=8m; BC=4m. Span AB carries an u.d.l of 16kN/m; BC carries a central point load of
80kN. IAB= 1.5 IBC. Analyze the beam by moment distribution method and draw the BMD.
OR
B. Explain with neat sketches how substitute frames are assumed and analyzed in the case of
multi storey buildings.
24. A. Two channel sections ISLC 300@331N/m of 5m length are placed back to back at a clear
distance of 120mm and used as a column. The bottom end of the column is rigidly fixed and
the top hinged. The geometrical properties of each channel are: A=4211 mm2; D=300mm;
bf=100mm; tf=11.6mm; tw=6.7mm; Cy=25.5mm; Izz=60.48x106mm4; Iyy=2.46x106mm4. Find the
Euler’s crippling load for the column. Assuming a factor of safety 2, find the safe permissible
compressive stress in the cross section.
OR
B. A hollow rectangular cross section of a masonry pillar has the overall dimension
1600mmx1000mm. The wall thickness is 200mm. A vertical load of 600kN is resting on the
pillar with eccentricities of 120mm from major axis and 80mm from minor axis. Determine the
maximum and minimum stress in the cross section ignoring its self weight.
25. A. A gravity dam of trapezoidal cross section of 20m height stores water on its vertical face for
18 m height, with 2 m free board. The top and bottom widths of dam are 4m and 10m
respectively. Draw the pressure distribution diagram at base. Specific weights of masonry
and water are 20 kN/m3 and 10 kN/m3 respectively.
OR
B. A masonry retaining wall of 7.2 m height retains earth of unit weight 16 kN/m 3 and angle of
repose 35o up to its top. The width of wall is 1.2m at top, 1.2m at 1.0m depth and 4.2m at
base. Check the wall for its stability and no tension at base. The co efficient of friction
between wall and earth is 0.6. Unit weight of wall may be taken as 19 kN/m 3.
90 | P a g e

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15
1. Draw the deflected shapes of any two beams.
2 Write the difference between roller and hinged supports
3 Where the bending moment is maximum in a propped cantilever subjected to u.d.l throughout.
4 Define “ A prop ”
5 Define : Free BMD
6 State any two advantages of a fixed beams
7 State any four methods of analysis of Indeterminate structures
8 State Clapeyron’s theorem
9 Define carry over moment
10 Define distribution factor
11 What is a symmetrical portal frame ?
12 What do mean by sway and non-sway frames ?
13 Write any two assumptions made in Euler’s theory of long columns
14 Define : Strut
15 State the effects of eccentric loading
16 Define : Core or Kern of a section
17 Draw the elementary profile of a masonry dam
18 On what basis the base width of a masonry dam is determined ?
19 Define : Angle of repose of soil

20 What will be the coefficient of passive earth pressure of soil having angle of repose 30° ?
91 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21. A.) A cantilever beam 120mm wide and 200mm deep is 3m long. What udl should the
beam can carry to produce a deflection of 8mm at the free end. Take E = 210
GN/mm2 .
OR
B. A cantilever of span 6m is supported by a rigid prop at the free end. It carries an

udl of 20 KN/m throughout the span. Determine the prop reaction and the and the
fixing moment. Draw SFD and BMD.
.
22. A. A fixed beam of span 6m carries point loads of 20KN and 15KN at 2m and 4m
from the left end respectively. Find the support moments. Draw SFD and BMD.
OR
B. A two span continuous beam ABC of uniform flexural rigidity is subjected to udl of w/unit
length. The two spans AB = BC = l . Determine the support moment at B using
Clapeyron’s theorem of three moments. The supports A and B are simply Supported.
23. A. Analyse the continuous beam shown in fig. by moment distribution method. Find the
support moments and draw the BMD. Assume EI as constant.
10 KN 2KN/m 2 KN
A 3m 1m B 6m C 2m D
OR
B. For the portal frame shown in fig. compute the bending moments by moment distribution
and draw BMD
2m 100 KN 2m
4m 4m EI constant
24. A. A hollow C I column whose outside diameter is 200 mm has a thickness of 25 mm.
It is 4.5m long and is fixed at both the ends. Calculate the safe load by Rankine’s
formula using a factor of safety 3 , if a = 1/7500 , E = 2.1 x 105 N/mm2 and yield
stress is 330 N/mm2 .
92 | P a g e
OR
B. A rectangular column 300 mm wide and 250 mm thick is carrying a vertical load of
100 KN , acting at an eccentricity of 50 mm in a plane bisecting the thickness. Determine
the maximum and minimum stress developed.
25. A. A trapezoidal masonry dam 3m wide at top , 12m wide at the base is 18 m high. It
retains water upto a depth of 17 m on its vertical face. Check the stability of the dam
for sliding if, μ = 0.6 and F.O.S = 1.5. Take the weight of masonry as 20KN/m 3 and
that of water as 10KN/m3
OR
B. A retaining wall trapezoidal in section is 8 m high, 1 m wide at top and 3 m wide at the
bottom with a vertical earth face retaining earth level with the top of the wall. If the weight
of the masonry is 24 KN/m3 and that of the earth is18 KN/m3 with an angle of repose of
30˚ , calculate the maximum and minimum stress at the base.
93 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
TRANSPORTATION EENGINEERING

94 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : TRANSPORTATION ENGINEERING
Marks
TRANSPORTATION Internal Board
5 Hrs 80 Hrs Total
25 75 100 3 Hrs
Objectives:
 To study about the importance of the roads , Development of roads,

Classification of roads
 To know about highway pavements , Geometrical design , Traffic controls ,
Road Arboriculture and Highway Lighting
 To study about highway alignment , Road machineries and Construction of
different types of Roads
 To study about Railway fixtures , Types of stations , Signalling and Control of
movement of trains
 To study about Maintenance of Track and Rapid Transport System of Railways
 To Know about Bridges , Classifications and its Components
95 | P a g e
21042 TRANSPORTATION ENGINEERING
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Contents: Theory
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING
I 14 Hrs
1.1 INTRODUCTION
General – Development of Roads in India - Modes of transportation -
Nagpur Plan - Ribbon development - Advantages of Roads -
Importance of roads in India - Requirements of an ideal road - Indian
Road Congress - Objects of Highway planning - Classifications of
Highways.
1.2 HIGHWAY PAVEMENTS

Objectives - Types of Pavement - Flexible and Rigid Pavements -
Comparative study of Flexible and Rigid pavements - Factors affecting
the design of pavements - Other types of pavements ( Description not
reqd. )
1.3 GEOMETRICAL DESIGN OF HIGHWAYS

General - Road structure - Right of way - Land width - Width of
formation - Road Camber - Super elevation - Sight distances - Road
gradient - Road Curves - Horizontal curves - Vertical curves - Types -
Widening of pavement on horizontal curves.
1.4 TRAFFIC ENGINEERING

Objectives - Traffic surveys - Road accidents - Causes of
road accidents - Preventive measures - Parking - Methods of parking -
Road junctions ( Grade intersections and Grade separators ) - Traffic
signals - Advantages - Types of road signs - Expressways.
1.5 SUB GRADE SOIL

Significance - Soil mass as a three phase system - Grain size
classification - Atterberg limits - Definition and description - I S
Classification of soils - Compaction - Standard Proctor Compaction test
- Shear strength - Direct shear test.
1.6 ROAD ARBORICULTURE AND LIGHTING

Objects of Arboriculture - Selection of trees - Location of trees -
Highway lighting - Benefits.
96 | P a g e
HIGHWAY ENGINEERING
II 14 Hrs
2.1 HIGHWAY ALIGNMENT AND SURVEYS
Definition - Principles for ideal highway alignment - Factors affecting

highway alignment - Surveys - Engineering surveys - Reconnaissance,
Preliminary and Location surveys - Project Report and Drawings -
Highway Re-alignment projects.
2.2 ROAD MACHINERIES
Excavating equipments - Tractor, Bull dozer, Grader, Scraper, J C B -

Compaction equipments - Road roller - Types and description -
Equipments for Bituminous road ( Description not reqd. )
2.3 LOW COST ROADS
General - Classifications - Earthen road, Gravel road, Water Bound

Macadam roads - Construction with sketches - Advantages and
disadvantages - Maintenance - Soil stabilization - Methods.
2.4 BITUMINOUS ROADS
General - Advantages and disadvantages - Bituminous materials used -

Types of Bituminous roads - Surface dressing - Types - Bituminous
Concrete - Maintenance of Bituminous roads.
2.5 CEMENT CONCRETE ROADS
General - Advantages and disadvantages - Methods of construction of

cement concrete roads with sketches - Construction procedure for
concrete roads.
2.6 HILL ROADS
Factors considered in alignment - Formation of hill roads - Hair pin

bends - Retaining and Breast walls.
RAILWAY ENGINEERING
3.1 INTRODUCTION
III 14 Hrs
Introduction - History of Railways - Classifications of Indian Railways -
Rail Gauges - Types - Uniformity in gauges - Loading gauge -
Construction gauge.
3.2 RAILS
General - Functions of rails - Requirements of an ideal rail - Types of
rail sections - Length of rails - Welding of rails - Wear of rails - Coning
of wheels - Hogged rails - Bending of rails - Creep of rails - Causes
and prevention of creep.
97 | P a g e
3.3 SLEEPERS AND BALLAST

III
Functions of Sleepers - Types of sleepers - Requirements of sleepers -
Materials for sleepers - Sleeper density - Functions of Ballast -
Requirements of ballast - Materials used as ballast.
3.4 RAIL FASTENINGS AND PLATE LAYING
Rail joints - Types - Rail fastenings - Fish plates - Fish bolts - Spikes -
Chairs and Keys - Bearing plates - Blocks - Elastic fastenings - Anchors
and anti-creepers - Plate laying - Methods of plate laying - PQRS
method of relaying.
3.5 MAINTENANCE OF TRACK
Necessity - Maintenance of Track , Bridges and Rolling stock.
IV 4.1 STATIONS AND YARDS
Definition of station - Purpose of railway station - Types of stations - 14 Hrs

Wayside, Junction and Terminal stations - Platforms - Passenger and
Goods platforms - Definition of Yard - Types of yard - Passenger yard,
Goods yard, Marshalling yard and Locomotive yards - Level crossings.
4.2 STATION EQUIPMENTS
General - Engine shed - Ash pits - Examination pits - Drop pits - Water
columns - Triangles - Turn table - Traversers - Scotch Block - Buffer
stops - Fouling marks - Derailing switch - Sand hump - Weigh bridges.
4.3 POINTS AND CROSSINGS
Purpose - Some definitions - Turnouts - Right hand and left hand
turnouts -Sleepers laid for points and crossings - Types of switches -
Crossings - Types of crossings.
4.4 SIGNALLING
General - Objects of signalling - Types of signalling - Based on
function and location - Special signals - Control of movement of trains -
Different methods - Following train system - Absolute block system -
Automatic signalling - Pilot guard system - Centralized traffic control
system.
4.5 INTERLOCKING
Definition - Principles of interlocking - Methods of interlocking - Tappets
and locks system - Key system - Route relay system - Improvements in
interlocking and signalling.
4.6 RAPID TRANSPORT SYSTEM
General - Under ground railways - Advantages - Tube railways - Its

features.
98 | P a g e
BRIDGE ENGINEERING
V
14 Hrs
5.1 INTRODUCTION
Bridge definition - Components of bridge - IRC loadings - Selection of
type of bridge - Scour - Afflux - Economic span - Waterway - Factors
governing the ideal site for bridge - Alignment of bridge - Factors to
be considered in alignment.
5.2 FOUNDATIONS
Functions of foundation - Types of foundations - Selection of
foundations - Control of ground water for foundation - Caisson
foundation - Coffer dam – Types.
5.3 CLASSIFICATION OF BRIDGES
Classification according to IRC loadings , Materials , Bridge floor , Type
of superstructure - Culverts and Cause ways - Classifications with
sketches - Conditions to construct causeways.
5.4 SUBSTRUCTURE
Abutments - Types - Piers - Types - Wing walls - Types.
5.5 SUPERSTRUCTURE
Types - Description - Simple bridge - Types according to bridge floor -
Continuous bridge - Cantilever bridge - Balanced cantilever bridge -
Arch bridge - Bow-string girder type bridge - Rigid frame bridge -
Suspension bridge - Continuous steel bridges - Steel arched bridges.
5.6 BRIDGE BEARINGS
Definition - Purpose - Importance of bearings - Types of bearings –
Elastomer bearings.
TEST & REVISION
10 Hrs
REFERENCE :
1. RANGWALA, “Highway Engineering” , Charotor Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., Edition 2010
2. RANGWALA, “Railway Engineering” , Charotor Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., Edition 2010
3. RANGWALA, “Bridge Engineering” , Charotor Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., Edition 2009
4. S P CHANDOLA, “A Text Book of Transportation Engineering” S Chand & Company Ltd.,
5. G V RAO, “Principles of Transportation & Highway Engineering” Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company Ltd.,
6. Madhan Mohan Dass, “ Structural Analysis” PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
99 | P a g e

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15

1 What is Nagpur plan ?
2 Define “Super elevation”
3 Define “Plastic limit”
4 State any two advantages of highway lighting
5 What do you mean by Reconnaissance survey ?
6 What is soil stabilization ?
7 What do you mean by surface dressing bituminous road ?
8 What is hair pin bend ?
9 Define “Gauges”
10 What do you meant by creep of rails ?
11 State any two functions of sleepers
12 State the use of fish plates
13 Define “Marshalling yard”
14 What is the use of turn table ?
15 State any two objects of signaling
16 State the principles of interlocking
17 Define “Economic span”
18 What is coffer dam ?
19 What are the different types of wing walls ?
20 What is elastomer bearings ?
100 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21. A.) (i) What are the requirements of an ideal road ?. 4
(ii) What is sight distance ? Explain any two types of sight distances 8
with neat sketches
OR
B. (i) What are the objects of road arboriculture ? 4
(ii) What is optimum moisture content ? Explain with neat sketches the
Proctor’s compaction test to determine the optimum moisture content 8
22. A. (i) What are the factors affecting road alignment ? 4

(ii) Explain with neat sketch the construction of water bound macadam road 8
OR
B. (i) Write short notes on retaining wall and breast wall 4
(ii) Explain with neat sketches the different methods of construction of 8
concrete roads
23. A. (i) What are the advantages of uniformity in gauges ? 4
(ii) What are the functions and requirements of good ballast materials ? 8
OR
B. (i) Explain the different types of rail joints 4
(ii) Explain how the maintenance of railway track is carried out 8
24. A. (i) State the purposes of railway stations . 4

(ii) Define switches . Explain the different types of switches with neat sketches 8
.
OR
B. (i) Write short notes on absolute block system of controlling the movement of 4
trains?
(ii) Explain with neat sketches the tappets and locks system of interlocking 8
25. A. (i) What are the factors to be considered in the alignment of bridges ? 4
(ii) What are causeways ? Explain with neat sketches any two types of causeways 8
OR
B. (i) State the functions of bearings used in bridges ? 4
(ii) Write short notes on balanced cantilever bridges and suspension bridges 8
101 | P a g e

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15

1 State IRC classifications of road.
2 What is transition curve ?
3 Define : Liquid limit
4 What do you meant by road arboriculture ?
5 What is the purpose of grader ?
6 State the materials used for WBM road ?
7 Define : Coal tar
8 Define : Breast wall
9 What are the different classifications of gauges ?
10 What do you meant by coning of wheels ?
11 Define : Sleeper density
12 What are the different types of rail joints ?
13 Define : Level crossings
14 What is the use Fouling marks ?
15 What do you meant by turnouts ?
16 State the principles of interlocking
17 Define : Scour
18 State any two functions of foundations ?
19 What are causeways ?
20 State the importance of bearings in bridges
102 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21A.) (i) What is Ribbon development ? State the effects of Ribbon development 4
(ii) What is gradient ? Explain the different types of gradient 8
OR
B (i) Explain how the plastic limit of soil is determined in the laboratory ? 4
(ii) What is road accident ? What are the causes of road accident ? Explain the 8
preventive measures for the road accident
22. A (i) Write short notes on preliminary survey in a road project ? 4

(ii) Explain with a neat sketch the different methods of construction of gravel road 8
OR
B (i) What are the factors to be considered in the alignment of hill roads ? 4
(ii) Explain with neat sketches the different types of surface dressing bituminous road 8
23. A (i) Write short notes on loading gauge ? 4

(ii) What are the functions and requirements of good sleepers ? 8
OR
B. (i) State the necessities for the maintenance of railway track 4
(ii) Explain how the telescopic method of plate laying is carried out ? 8
24. A. (i) Write short notes on examination pits and drop pits ? 4
(ii) Draw a neat sketch of left-hand turnout and name the various parts on it 8
.OR
B. (i) What are the objects of signalling ? 4
(ii) Explain the features of under ground railways and tube railways 8
25. A. (i) Explain how the ground water is controlled during construction of foundation ? 4
(ii ) What is cofferdam ? Explain with neat sketches the different types of
cofferdams
OR
B. (i) State Define : Abutment . State the different types of abutment 4
(ii) Explain with neat sketches the different types of bridges according to its 8
superstructure
103 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
SURVEYING II

104 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : SURVEYING II
Marks
Internal Board
SURVEYING II 5 Hrs 80 Hrs Total
25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
On completion of the course, the student will posses knowledge about :
 Theodolite surveying
 Tacheometric surveying
 Trignometric Surveying
 Curve setting
 Basics of Remote sensing
 Photogrammetric surveying
 Hydrographic surveying
 Total Station
 Geographical Information system
105 | P a g e
21043 SURVEYING II
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Contents: Theory
I THEODOLITE SURVEYING 18 Hrs

Introduction - Types of Theodolites : Transit and non-transit Theodolite,
Vernier and Micrometer Theodolites – Electronic Theodlite (Principles and
description only) – Component parts of a transit Theodolite – Functions –
Technical terms used in Theodolite surveying – Temporary adjustments –
Fundamental lines and relationship between them – Measurement of
horizontal angle by method of repetition and reiteration – Measurement of
vertical angle and deflection angle – Reading bearing of a line – Theodolite
traversing – Methods – Field checks in closed traverse - Latitude and
departure – Consecutive coordinates - Independent coordinates – Problems
on computation of area of closed traverse – Balancing the traverse - Omitted
measurements – Problems
II TACHEOMETRIC SURVEYING 14 Hrs

Introduction – Instruments used in tacheometry – Systems of tacheometry :
Stadia and Tangential tacheometry – Principles – Fixed hair method of
tacheometry – Distance and Elevation formulae – Anallactic lens (No proof) :
Advantages and uses – Simple problems – Distomats (Description only) –
Direct reading tacheometers - Determination of constants of a tacheometer
– Tacheometric traverse – Errors in tacheometric surveying – Problems.
III 3.1 TRIGONOMETRICAL LEVELLING 14 Hrs

Introduction – Finding elevation of objects – Base accessible - Base
inaccessible: Single Plane and Double Plane methods – Problems on
determination of elevation of objects.
3.2 REMOTE SENSING, PHOTOGRAMMETRIC SURVEYING AND

HYDROGRAPHIC SURVEYING
Remote sensing – Definition – Basic Process – Methods of remote sensing
– Applications -Photogrammetric Surveying – Definition – Terrestrial and
Aerial photographs – Applications - Hydrographic surveying – Definition-
Uses – Sounding: Definition, Purpose, Instruments needed – Steps in
hydrographic surveying.
106 | P a g e
IV CURVES 12 Hrs
Introduction – Types of curves – Designation of curves – Elements of simple
circular curve – Setting out simple circular curve by: Offsets from long
chords, Offsets from tangents, Offsets from chords produced and Rankine’s
method of deflection angles – Simple problems – Transition curves :
Objectives – Vertical curves : Definition and types.
V TOTAL STATION AND GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM 12 Hrs

5.1 TOTAL STATION
Introduction – Application of total station – Component parts of a Total
Station – Accessories used – Summary of total station characteristics -
Features of total station – Electronic display and data reading – Instrument
preparation, Setting and Measurement (Distance, Angle, Bearing etc.) –
Field procedure for co-ordinate measurement – Field procedure to run a
traverse survey - Linking data files.
5.2 GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM ( GIS )
Introduction – Geographical information – Development of GIS –
Components of GIS – Steps in GIS mapping - Ordinary mapping to GIS –
Comparison of GIS with CAD and other system – Fields of Applications :
Natural resources, Agriculture, Soil, Water resources, Wasteland
management and Social resources – Cadastral survey and Cadastral
records – Land Information System(LIS).
10 Hrs
REVISION AND TEST
Reference Book :
1. Kanetkar.T.P. & S.V.Kulkarni, “Surveying and levelling part 1 & 2 ”, Puna vidyarthi griha,
rd
Prakashan,23 edition, Reprint 2008.
2. Punmia.B.C, Ashok K.Jain & Arun K. Jain,”Surveying Volume I”, Laxmi, Publications Private
the
Limited., 16 edition, 2011.
3. Punmia.B.C, Ashok Jain & Arun K. Jain,”Surveying Volume II & III”, Laxmi, Publications
th
Private Limited., 15 edition, 2011.
4. Mimi Das Saikia, Bhargab Mohan Das & Madan Mohan Das, “Surveying”, PHI Learning
Private Limited, Edition 2010.
5. S. K. Roy, “Fundamentals of Surveying”, PHI Learning Private Limited, Edition 2010.
6. Sathesh Gopi, R.Sathikumar & N.Madhu, Advanced Surveying, (Total Station, GIS, Remote
Sensing), Pearson Education, Chennai, 2007.
7. M.Anji Reddy, Remote sensing and Geographical information system, B.S Publications,
Edition 2006.
8. Burrough P A, Principles of GIS for Land Resources Assessment, Oxford Publication, 2000.
9. Learning Material Development Project – NITTTR, Taramani,Chennai, CD programme on
GPS and GIS.
107 | P a g e
21043 SURVEYING II

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15

1. What is a transit theodolite?
2. Define the term changing face.
3. What is the function of an optical plummet in a theodolite?
4. Define Latitude.
5. What are the instruments used in tacheometry?
6. Write the distance formula in a stadia tacheometry, if the line of sight is horizontal.
7. What is an anallactic lens?
8. Mention any one instrumental error in tacheometric surveying.
9. What is the objective of trignometrical levelling?
10. When do you adopt single plane method to determine elevation of an object?
11. State any one application of photogrammetric surveying.
12. Define soundings in hydrographic surveying.
13. State any three elements of simple circular curve.
14. Mention any two linear methods of setting out simple circular curve.
15. What do you mean by right handed curve?
16. Define vertical curves.
17. What is the function of prism reflectors in total station?
18. Mention any two total station characteristics.
19. What do you mean by GIS?
20. State any two field applications of GIS.
108 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21. (A) Draw a neat sketch of a vernier theodolite and explain the functions of any five
component parts.
OR
(B) The following lengths and bearings were observed in running a closed traverse ABCD.
The length and bearing of line DA have been omitted. Calculate the length and bearing of DA.
Line Length (m) Bearing
AB 485 314º 48´

BC 1725 16º 24´
CD 1050 142º 06´
22. (A) What are the various constants of a tacheometer? Describe the field procedure of
determining the constants of a tacheometer.
OR
(B) A tacheometer fitted with an anallactic lens was set up at a station and the following
readings were obtained on a vertically held staff:
Staff Vertical
Station Stadia hair readings (m) Remarks
station angle
B.M - 2º 18´ 3.225, 3.550, 3.875

A
R.L of B.M = 743.565
B + 8º 36´ 1.650, 2.515, 3.380
Calculate the horizontal distance from A to B and R.L of B.
109 | P a g e
23. (A) Determine the R.L of top of a transmission tower from the following observations:
Vertical angle to Staff reading

Inst. Station R.L of B.M.
top of tower on B.M (m)
A + 18º 30´ 2.815

105.000
B + 12º 40´ 1.865
The distance between the station A and B is 60m. Stations A, B and the tower are in the
same vertical plane.
OR
(B) i) Write short notes on methods of remote sensing. (6)

ii) Briefly describe the steps in hydrographic surveying. (6)
24. (A) i) Derive the relationship between degree of curve and radius, for a unit chord of 30. (6)
ii) Describe the procedure for setting out the curve in the field based on offsets from long
chords. (6)
OR
(B) Two tangents intersect at chain age of 1190m. The intersection angle being 144º.
Calculate all the necessary data for setting out a curve of radius 300m by offsets from chords
produced. Assume peg interval as 20m.
25. (A) i) State the various applications of Total station. (3)

ii) Briefly write the field procedure to run a traverse survey using Total station. (9)
OR
(B) i) Briefly explain the components of GIS. (6)

ii) Briefly explain the application of GIS in Agriculture and Water resources. (6)
110 | P a g e
21043 SURVEYING II

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15

1. State the function of shifting head in a theodolite.
2. Define the term transiting.
3. State any one field checks in a closed theodolite traverse.
4. State any one rule to balance the theodolite traverse.
5. What are the two systems of tacheometry?
6. Write the distance formula in a stadia tacheometry, if the line of sight is inclined.
7. State one advantage of anallactic lens.
8. What is a Distomat?
9. When do you adopt trigonometrical leveling?
10. State any one method to find elevation of objects when the base is inaccessible.
11. Define remote sensing.
12. Name various instruments used for sounding in hydrographic surveying.
13. Mention different types of circular curves.
14. State the relationship between radius and degree of curve if the chord length is 20 m.
15. Mention any two methods of setting out simple circular curve.
16. Write any one objective of a transition curve.
17. Name any two accessories used in Total station.
18. Mention any one Linking software used, to transfer data files in Total station.
19. Mention any two geographical informations required in GIS.
20. List out the components of GIS.
111 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21. (A) i) What are the fundamental lines of a theodolite. State the relationship between them. 4
ii) Briefly describe the field procedure of running theodolite traverse by included angles. 8
OR
(B) The following table gives the latitude and departure of the sides of a closed traverse 12
ABCD. Calculate the Independent co-ordinates and find the area of the traverse.
Line Latitude (m) Departure (m)
AB - 88.00 + 133.90
BC + 416.10 + 356.90
CD + 7.00 - 14.84
DA - 335.10 - 475.96
22. (A) i) Briefly explain different systems of tacheometry. 8

ii) Write short notes on direct reading tacheometer. 4
OR
(B) A tacheometer fitted with an anallatic lens was set up over a B.M 250.000 12
above datum and the following readings were obtained on a vertically held staff:
Staff Vertical
Stadia hair readings(m)
station angle
P +5º 14´ 0.450, 1.035, 1.620
Q - 7º 33´ 0.860, 1.270, 1.680
Calculate the distances of P and Q from the instrument station and their elevation. The
height of the instrument is 1.500m.
23. (A) Determine the R.L of top of the temple from the following observations: 12
Vertical angle to Staff reading

Inst. Station Remarks
top of temple on B.M (m)
A + 16º 42´ 3.625

R.L of B.M = 1728.785
Distance AB = 30m
B + 11º 12´ 2.005
Stations A, B are in line with the top of the temple.

OR
112 | P a g e
(B) i) Briefly write about the basic process of remote sensing. 6
ii) Briefly write about the applications of Photogrammetric surveying. 6
24. (A) i) Briefly explain different types of circular curves with neat sketches. 6
ii) Define Transition curve and Vertical curve. State their uses. 6
OR
(B) Two tangents intersect at a chainage of 5637m. The intersection angle being 161º.
Calculate and tabulate all the necessary data for setting out a left handed curve of radius 345m, by
Rankine’s method of deflection angles. Assume peg interval as 30m and the least count of the
theodlite as 20”.
25. (A) i) Write short notes on Electronic display in Total station. 5

ii) Briefly write the field procedure for co-ordinate measurement, using Total station. 7
OR
(B) i) Briefly explain the various steps in GIS mapping. 8
ii) Briefly explain the application of GIS in Wasteland management. 4
113 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
ESTIMATING AND COSTING I

114 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : ESTIMATING AND COSTING I
Marks
Internal Board
ESTIMATING Total
5 Hrs 80 Hrs Assessment Examination
AND COSTING I
25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
 Different types of estimates, different systems of estimating in use;

 To determine the quantity of earth work in embankment and cuttings;
 To determine the rates for different items of works;
 To determine the quantities of different items of works in the construction of buildings using
Trade and Group systems
115 | P a g e
21044 ESTIMATING AND COSTING I
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Contents: Theory
I 1.1 INTRODUCTION 12 Hrs
Estimation- Definition of Estimate- Necessity of Estimates- Importance of

fair estimation- Duties and requirements of a good Quantity Surveyor-
Types of Estimates- Approximate and Detailed Estimates- Main and Sub
Estimates- Revised Estimates-Supplementary Estimates –
Maintenance/Repair Estimates-Taking off Quantities- Trade and Group
Systems- Merits of Trade/ Group systems- Stages in Detailed Estimation-
Units of measurements for materials and works-Degree of accuracy in
measurements- Measurement Books- Deduction for openings in
masonry/plastering/colour washing works- Painting Coefficients- Categories
of Labourers- Material requirements for different items of works- Labour
requirement for different items of works- Standard Data Book- Task or Out
turn of labourers -Cost of materials and wages of labour- Schedule of
Rates- Revision of rates- Market Rates- Lead- Cost of conveyance-
Handling charges –Lump sum and Contingency provisions in Estimates-
Abstract Estimates.
1.2 APPROXIMATE ESTIMATES

1.3
Necessity of Approximate Estimates- Types – Service Unit method- Plinth
Area method- Carpet Area method- Cubical Content method- Typical Bay
method- Rough Quantity method- Examples for each method- Problems on
preparation of Preliminary/Approximate Estimates for building projects.
2.1 AREAS AND VOLUMES

II 12 Hrs
Areas of regular and irregular sections- Computation of Areas of Irregular

figures- End Ordinate rule, Mid Ordinate rule, Average Ordinate rule,
Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s rule- Problems- Volumes of regular and
irregular solids- Computation of Volumes of Irregular solids- End Area rule,
Mid Area rule, Average Area or Mean Area rule, Trapezoidal rule,
Simpson’s or Prismoidal rule.
2.2 EMBANKMENTS AND CUTTINGS
Areas of cross sections of embankments of roads, tank bunds etc – Level
Section and Two level Section- Areas of cross sections of cuttings of
canals, drains etc- Level Section and Two level Section- Determination of
Volume of Earth work in Embankment / Cutting with level sections of varying
heights/ depths or with two level sections of uniform height/ depth.
116 | P a g e
III ANALYSIS OF RATES 16 Hrs
Analysis of Rates or Preparation of Data for the following Building works

using Standard Data Book:
1) Cement/ Lime mortars; 2) Plain Cement Concrete in Foundation/ Leveling
Course; 3) Flooring with cement concrete, plastered with cement mortar;
4) Flooring with PCC finished with ellis pattern cement concrete surface;
5) Flooring with Cuddapa slabs; 6) Mosaic/ Ceramic tiled flooring;
7) Brickwork in cement mortar in foundation; 8) Brickwork in CM in super
structure; 9) Brickwork in CM in partition with plastering; 10) Random rubble
masonry in CM; 11) Coursed rubble masonry in CM; 12) Lime-Surki
concrete in Weathering course finished with pressed tiles in CM;
13) Reinforced cement concrete in Slabs ( per unit volume/unit area);
14) R.C.C in Beams; 15) R.C.C in Columns; 16) R.C.C in Sunshades;
17) Plastering Brick masonry with CM; 18) Pointing Stone masonry with
cement mortar; 19) Painting the wood work; 20) Painting Steel work;
21) White/ Colour washing the plastered surfaces; 22) Form works
(strutting, centering, shuttering etc) for Slabs/Beams/ Columns;
23) Fabrication of Steel Reinforcement; 24) A.C Sheet roofing;
25) Supplying and fixing Rain water pipes – Exercises.
IV TAKING OFF QUANTITIES BY TRADE SYSTEM 16 Hrs

General- Methods of taking off quantities- Individual wall method- Centre
line method- Examples- Entering the dimensions- Standard forms for
entering Detailed measurements and Abstract estimates- Rounding of
quantities.
Preparing Detailed Estimate using Trade System and Take off quantities for
all items of works in the following types of Buildings:
A small Residential building with Two/Three rooms with RCC flat roof
A small Residential building with Two/Three rooms with RCC sloped roof
A Two Storied Commercial building (framed structure) with RCC flat roof
A Community hall with RCC columns and T-beams
A small Industrial building with AC/ GI sheet roof on Steel Trusses
117 | P a g e
V TAKING OFF QUANTITIES BY GROUP SYSTEM 16 Hrs

General- Standard method of measurement- Taking off and Recording the
dimensions- Order of Taking off- Dimension Paper- Entering dimension
paper- Spacing dimensions- Descriptions - Cancellation of Dimensions -
Squaring Dimensions- Method of Squaring- Checking the Squaring-
Casting up the dimensions- Abstracting and Billing-Function of abstract-
Use of Abstract sheets- Order of Abstracting- Preparing the Abstract –
Checking the Abstract – Casting and Reducing the Abstract- Writing the bill-
Method of writing the bill- Checking the Bill.
Preparing Detailed Estimate using Group System and Take off quantities for
all items of works in the following types of Buildings:
A small Residential building with Two/Three rooms with RCC flat roof
A small Residential building with Two/Three rooms with RCC sloped roof
A Community hall with RCC columns and T-beams
( Note: The same drawings of Unit 4 may be practiced and quantities
compared )
REVISION AND TEST 8 Hrs
Reference Book :
1. Rangawala, “Estimating & Costing” , Charotor Publishing;

2. N.A.Shaw, “Quantity Surveying & Valuation”, Khanna Publishers;
3. L.N.Dutta, “Estimating & Costing”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons
4. Bridie, “Estimating & Costing”
5. Indian Standard Code of Practice, IS:1200.
118 | P a g e
21044 ESTIMATING AND COSTING I

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15

1. Differentiate Group system and Trade system in quantity surveying.
2. What do you mean by “Contingency provision”?.
3. What is the purpose of preparing Preliminary estimate for a project?
4. Define the term “Carpet area” of a building.
5. What do you mean by “mean area” of a bund?
6. Write the trapezoidal rule used to calculate the area of an irregular field.
7. Differentiate level section and two level section.
8. In which practical case you come across a section with partial cutting and partial
embankment?
9. State the use of standard data book in the analysis of rates.
10. What is meant by lead cost?
11. Why sundries provision is provided in the analysis of rates?
12. How could the rates arrived for items of works not mentioned in the standard data book?
13. Define “abstract estimate”
14. How the quantities are to be rounded off?
15. What do you mean by individual wall method of taking off quantities?
16. State the unit of work “Pointing of stone masonry with cement mortar”.
17. Write any two advantages of Group system of estimating quantities.
18. What do you mean by “casting and reducing the abstract”?
19. How the dimensions are squared?
20. State how the entered dimensions are cancelled ?
119 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21. (A) The particulars of a proposed residential building are given below:
Carpet area = 216 m2
Circulation area = 12% of Plinth area
Non-livable area = 6% of Plinth area
Wall area = 10% of Plinth area
The total expenditure of a recently constructed similar residential building of plinth area
350m2 is ₨.49,00,000. Calculate the approximate cost of the proposed building.
OR
(B)(i) List out the duties and requirements of a good quantity surveyor.
(ii) A brick masonry wall of 200m2 area has to be plastered with 12mm thick 1:4 cement
mortar. Allowing 15% excess mortar for wastage and undulations in the surface,
calculate the quantities of cement(in kg) and sand (in m3) required for the work.
22. (A) (i) Explain mid ordinate rule and end ordinate rule used for calculating the area of
irregular shape.
(ii)The offsets measured to the curved boundary of a land from a straight chain line are
given below. Compute the area enclosed by the boundary and the chain line by
trapezoidal and Simpson’s rules.
Chainage (m) 0 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Offsets (m) 0 2.4 3.7 5.4 8.2 6.9 5.7 3.1 0
OR
(B) It is proposed to cut a drain of 1 km length with a uniform base width of 5m. The depth of
cutting will be 3.0m at the starting point, 4.2m at the mid length and 5.0m at the end
point. The sides have slopes of 2:1 on left side and 1½:1 on the right side. Compute the
volume of earth work in cutting using Prismoidal formula.
23. (A) Analyze and determine the rates for the following items of work with the given
data.
Flooring with 100mm thick base concrete using 40 mm size broken stone in
cement mortar 1:4 and finished with 20mm thick ellis pattern cement concrete
surface - 1 m2
OR
120 | P a g e
(B) (i) Flush pointing R R masonry with cement mortar 1:4 – 1m2.
(ii) Supplying and fixing 100mm dia rain water pipes – 1m.
Material and Labour requirement:
Cement concrete base with 40mm broken stone in CM1:4 – 10m3

40 mm broken stone 9.5 m3
Cement mortar 1:4 3.8 m3
Mason Category II 1.8 No.
Mazdoor Category I 17.7 No.
Mazdoor Category II 14.1 No.
Flooring with 100mm thick base concrete using 40mm size broken stone in CM1:4 and
finishing with 20mm thick ellis pattern cement concrete surface- 10m2
Cement concrete base 1 m3

Stone chips 0.24 m3
Cement 117 kg
Mason Category I 0.50 No.
Labour for tamping base concrete course Rs.400 per 10m2
Labour for fishing the floor work Rs.450 per 10m2
Flush pointing R R masonry with cement mortar 1:4 – 10m2.

Mazdoor Category I 0.5 No
Supplying and fixing 100mm dia rain water pipes – 3m

A.C pipe 100 dia 3 m
M.S clamp 2 No.
T.W plugs 4 No.
Plumber 1 No
Cement Packing LS
Cost of materials and lead particulars:
Material Unit Cost Lead Rate for Handling

( Rs) (kM) Lead/kM(Rs) charges(Rs)
Cement 50 kg 280.00 4 2.00 5.00

Sand 1m3 250.00 30 20.00 60.00
Broken stone(40mm) 1m3 380.00 20 18.00 40.00
Stone chips 1m3 520.00 20 18.00 40.00
A.C pipe 100mm dia 1m 65.00 4 3.00 5.00
M.S clamp 1No 16.00 -- -- --
T.W plugs 1No 3.00 -- -- --
121 | P a g e
Cost of Labour:
Mason Category I Rs.550.00 per day
Mason Category II Rs.500.00 per day
Plumber Rs.550.00 per day
Mazdoor Category I Rs.400.00 per day
Mazdoor Category II Rs.275.00 per day
Mixing charge for mortar Rs.200 / m3
24. (A) Take the quantity of earth work in foundation for the residential building shown in
(Sketch 1) by Centre line method using Trade system
OR
(B) Take the quantity of R.C.C in the sloped roof for the residential building shown in Sketch 1
using Trade system (Sketch 1) – A plan and section of a small residential building with
sloped RCC roof.)
25. (A) Take the quantity of brick work in foundation and basement for the residential building
shown in (Sketch 2) using Group system
OR
(B) Take the quantities of works in the parapet of the residential building shown in Sketch 2
using Group system. (Sketch 2) – A plan and section of a small office building with flat
RCC roof).
122 | P a g e
SKETCH – 1
123 | P a g e
SKETCH – 2
124 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
MATERIAL TESTING LAB PRACTICE II

125 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : MATERIAL TESTING LAB II
Marks
Internal Board
Total
MATERIAL TESTING Assessment Examination
3 Hrs 48 Hrs
LAB PRACTICE II
25 75 100 3 Hrs
126 | P a g e
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
PART A 18 Hours
1. Voids ratio and porosity of sand.
2. Determination of liquid limit and plastic limit of the given soil.
3. Determination of bulk density and specific gravity of Fine and Coarse
aggregates.
4. Proctor's compaction test on clay.
5. Direct shear test on sand.
6. Field Density of Soil
PART B 12 Hours
7. Attrition test on Aggregate.
8. Abrasion test on Aggregate.
9. Aggregate crushing value test.
10. Aggregate impact value test.
PART C 15 Hours
11. Determination of Total solids present in the given sample of water.
12. Determination of Turbidity of water by "Jackson candle turbidity meter."
13. Determination of settleable solids present in the given sample of water/
waste water by "Imhoff cone."
14. Moisture content in coarse aggregate (or) Water absorption test on coarse
aggregate.
REVISION & TEST 3 Hours
SCHEME OF EXAMINATION :
In the examination, each student has to be given either a Single question from
Part A ( or ) TWO questions, ONE from Part B and ONE from Part C.
ALLOCATION OF MARKS
PART A 70 marks
OR
PART B 40 marks
PART C 30 marks
VIVA VOCE 05 marks
RECORD 25 marks
Total 100 Marks
127 | P a g e
21045 MATERIAL TESTING LAB PRACTICE II

Duration : 3 Hours Max. Marks : 75
1. Determine the void ratio, porosity and bulk density of the given sand sample. (70 marks)
2. Determine the liquid limit and plastic limit of the given soil sample. (70 marks)
3. Determine the bulk density and specific gravity of the fine aggregate sample. (70 marks)
4. Determine the bulk density and specific gravity of the coarse aggregate sample (70 marks)
5. Find out the optimum moisture content of the given soil sample by conducting the Proctor’s
Compaction test. Use moisture meter or assume water added to the soil sample as its
moisture content. (70 marks)
6. Conduct a direct shear test on the given sand and find the friction angle of sand. (70 marks)
7. Determine the field density of soil at the given site using sand pouring cylinder below a depth
of 150mm from ground level. (70 marks)
8. a) Conduct the crushing strength test on the given aggregate and determine the aggregate
crushing value. (40 marks)
b) Determine the Total solids present in the given sample of water. (30 marks)
9. a) Conduct an abrasion test on the given stone specimen and determine the co-efficient of
Hardness/ Aggregate abrasion value. (40marks)
b) Determine the Turbidity of water using "Jackson candle turbidity meter”. (30 marks)
10. a) Determine the impact value of the given aggregate. From your result find the suitability of
the aggregate for road construction. (40marks)
b) Determine the settle able solids present in the given waste water using Imhoff cone
apparatus. (30marks)
11. a) Conduct Attrition test on the given coarse aggregate for a duration of 30 minutes and find
the percentage loss of material. (40 marks)
b) Determine the moisture content in the given sample of coarse aggregate / Conduct a
water absorption test on the given coarse aggregate and find the percentage water
absorption. (Any one) (30 marks)
[Allocation of Marks : Exam Marks:70; Viva Voce: 5; Record : 25. Total : 100]
128 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
SURVEYING PRACTICE II
129 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : SURVEYING PRACTICE II
Marks
Internal Board
Total
SURVEYING Assessment Examination
6 Hrs 96 Hrs
PRACTICE II
25 75 100 3 Hrs
Objective :
At the end of the course, Students
 will have experience in handling surveying equipments

 Do practical exercises in Theodolite surveying,
 Do Tacheometric surveying
 Do surveying using Total station.
130 | P a g e
21046 SURVEYING PRACTICE II
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
PART A: THEODOLITE SURVEYING 42 Hrs
1. Study of a Theodolite - Temporary adjustments – Reading horizontal angles.

2. Measurement of horizontal angle by:
a. Reiteration method (not for Exam)
b. Repetition method (not for Exam)
3. Determination of distance between two points when their bases are accessible, using
Theodolite - Measuring Horizontal angles by repetition method and distances from a
Thedolite Station.
4. Determination of distance between two points when their bases are inaccessible,
using Theodolite - Measuring Horizontal angles by reiteration method from a
baseline.
5. Run closed theodolite traverse - Measuring length, included angles, and bearing at
initial station. Plot the traverse.
6. Measurements of vertical angles to different points.
7. Determination of Elevation of an object when the base is accessible.
8. Determination of Elevation of an object when the base is inaccessible by :
a) Single plane method
b) Double plane method.
PART B: TACHOMETRIC SURVEYING 24

Hours
9. Determination of constants of a tacheometer.

10. Determination of distance and elevation of points by Stadia tacheometry.
11. Determination of gradient between two points (with different elevations) by Stadia
tacheometry.
12. Determination of distance and elevation of points by Tangential tacheometry.
131 | P a g e
PART C: TOTAL STATION 18 Hrs
13. Study of Total Station – General commands used - Instrument preparation and setting
– Reading distances and angles.
14. Measurement of distances and co-ordinates of given points, using Total station.
15. Measurement of altitude of given elevated points, using Total Station.
16. Run closed traverse using Total Station and plotting the traverse.
17. Determination of area of a field / land (enclosed between three or more known
points),using Total station.
SURVEY CAMP : ( Outside the Campus ) Duration: 7 days
The objective of the survey camp is to enable the students to get practical training in the field
work. Groups of not more than six members in a group will carry out each exercise in Survey
camp. The camp must involve work on a large area of not less than 30 acres outside the
campus. At the end of the camp, each student shall have mapped and contoured the area.
The camp record shall include all original field observations, calculations and plotting.
15 marks to be allotted for Survey file in the Board Examination.
Works to be conducted in survey camp :
i) L.S and C.S for a road / canal alignment
ii) Radial Tachometric contouring
iii) Contouring by block levels
iv) Curve setting by deflection angle
v) Theodolite / Tacheometric traverse (Balancing the traverse by Bowditch rule)
132 | P a g e
ALLOCATION OF MARKS
PART- A & B By Lot One question - 45 Marks
(Either Theodolite surveying or in Tacheometry surveying)
PART- C One question - 10 Marks
Survey Camp - 15 Marks
Viva-Voce - 5 Marks
Record Marks - 25 Marks

----------------
TOTAL 100 Marks
----------------
MARK ALLOCATION FOR PART – A & B
Part – A & B
S.No Description Max. Marks
(45)
1 Procedure, Handling Instruments / Tools 10
2 Field works, Observation and Tabulation 15

3 Calculations and Check 15
4 Accuracy of result 5
133 | P a g e
21046 SURVEYING PRACTICE II

PART – A & B: By Lot (45 Marks)
1. Determine the distance between two accessible points QR from the station point P. Measure
the included angles by repetition method. Use Theodolite.
2. Determine the distance between two inaccessible points QR taking observations from the
base line AB of length 5m / 10m. Measure the included angles by reiteration method. Use
Theodolite.
3. Determine the height of a Flag post and R.L. of its top and bottom, from a known bench
mark. Take the distance between Theodolite and Flag post as 5m / 10m / 20m.
4. Determine the R.L. of elevated points by Single Plane method, from a known bench mark.
Take the distance between the two Theodolite position as 5m / 10m / 20m.
5. Determine the R.L. of inaccessible elevated points, from a known bench mark by Double
Plane method. Take the distance between the two theodolite positions as 5m / 10m / 20m.
6. Determine the Constants (C and K) of the given Tacheometer. Keep the horizontal
distances as 10m, 20m, 30m, 40m and 50m.
7. Determine the distances and R.L. of two points (one Elevated and the other depressed),
from a known bench mark, by Stadia tacheometry. Take Multiplying constant as (100) and
Additive constant as (0).
8. Determine the Gradient between two points (say A and B) of different elevations, from a
known bench mark, by Stadia tacheometetry.
9. Determine the distances and R.L. of points, from a known bench mark, by Tangential
tacheometry. Keep the Stadia intercept between the targets as 2m / 2.5m / 3m.
PART – C: By Lot (10 Marks)
10. Display the distances and Co-ordinates of points (Minimum three points) lying at different
elevations, using Total station.
11. Determine the R.L. of elevated points, using Total station.
12. Determine the area enclosed between three / four points, using Total station.
134 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
CAD IN CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING PRACTICE I

135 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : CAD IN CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING PRACTICE I
Marks
CAD IN CIVIL Internal Board
Total
ENGINEERING 5 Hrs 80 Hrs Assessment Examination
DRAWING PRACTICE I 25 75 100 3 Hrs
Objectives :
On completion of the course, the student will be able:

 To know about CAD commands
 To understand building components
 To draw building drawing using CAD software
 To prepare approval drawing for submission to authority
21047 CAD IN CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING PRACTICE I
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Preparation of drawing using CAD Software
I. Introduction of CAD software for Preparation of Drawings 6 Hours

1. Definition of various commands used in CAD software.
2. Simple Exercises for familiarizing the drawing commands in CAD software.
136 | P a g e
II. Draw the given drawings in Computer and take print out of all drawings in A4 sheet using
Inkjet / laser printer or plotter and produced in file forms as record. 15 Hrs
3. Section of semicircular Arch
4. Elevation of door, partly paneled and partly glazed
5. Preparation of Plan showing arrangement of furnitures / fixtures and other features with
standard sizes for the followings ( Each room to be drawn separately - features and
furnitures may be pasted from the Blocks available in the packages )
(i) Living (ii) Bed Room (iii) Kitchen (iv) Toilet
6. Steel Structures: Cross section of I, Channel, T, Angle and Tubular section, Compound Beams.
7. Section of Load bearing wall from parapet to foundation showing all the details across
the section. (Single storey)
III Draw the building drawing using available CAD software 50 Hours
8. Plan, Section and Elevation of single bed roomed building (R.C.C. Roof)
9. Plan, Section and Elevation of Double bed roomed building (R.C.C. Roof)
10. Plan, Section and Elevation of a Primary School Building
11. Plan, Section and Elevation of a Hospital Building
12. Plan, Section and Elevation of a Workshop with steel columns, Steel roof truss and
Metal sheet Roofing of about 300 m2 area.
13. Preparation of approval drawing to be submitted to Corporation or Municipality showing
required details in one sheet such as
a) Site Plan (Land boundary, Building boundary, Car Parking, Passage, sanitary layout, septic
tank location etc.
b) G.F. Plan, F.F. Plan, Section and Elevation(line diagram is enough)
c) Key Plan
d) Septic tank Plan and section (line diagram)
e) Rain water harvesting pit (with all detail)
f) Typical foundation details (Column foundation or spread footing)
g) Title block showing – joinery details, Specification, Area statement, colour Index, Title of the
property, space for owners Signature and Licensed Surveyor’s Signature with address.
137 | P a g e
21047 CAD IN CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING PRACTICE I
PART – A
1. Draw a longitudinal sectional elevation of semicircular arch
2. Draw the elevation of door partly paneled and partly glazed

3. Prepare a plan showing arrangement of furniture / fixtures and other features with size
for a living room.
4. Prepare a plan showing arrangement of fixtures and other features with standard size
for a bedroom.
5. Prepare a plan showing arrangement of fixtures and other features with standard size
for a kitchen.
6. Prepare a plan showing arrangement of fixtures and other futures with standard size for
a toilet.
7. Draw a section of load bearing wall from parapet to foundation and showing all the
details across the section (Single storey).
8. Draw cross section of I, channel and compound beam of steel structures.
9. Draw cross section of T, Angle and Tubular section of steel structures.
PART - B (Line plan and detailed specifications to be given)
1. Draw the plan and section with schedule of opening of single bed room building.
2. Draw the plan and section with schedule of opening of double bed room building.
3. Draw the plan and section with schedule of openings of a primary school building.
4. Draw the plan and section with schedule of opening of a hospital building.
5. Draw the plan and section with schedule of opening of a small workshop with steel
columns, steel roof trusses and metal sheet roofing.
IN BOARD EXAMINATION, QUESTIONS WILL BE CHOSEN AS FOLLOWS
PART –A By lot one question 30 marks
PART – B By lot one question 40 marks
Viva - voce 5 marks
Record works 25 marks
Total 100 marks
138 | P a g e
V SEMESTER
139 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING

140 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Semester : V Semester
Subject Title : STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING
Marks
Internal Board
Total
STRUCTURAL Assessment Examination
6 Hrs 96 Hrs
ENGINEERING
25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
On completion of the course the students should be able to:
 Analyse and design simple RCC elements like singly / doubly reinforced rectangular beams,
and singly reinforced T-beams (Cantilevers, Simply supported/ Continuous beams, Lintels
etc.) for shear and flexure by limit state method;
 Design One way/ Two way slabs and Staircases by limit state method;
 Design Axially loaded Columns and Footings by limit state method;
 Design simple Steel members like Laterally supported Beams, Tension members,
Compression members and Welded connections by limit state method.
141 | P a g e
21051 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Contents: Theory
Unit Hours
Name of the Topic
REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE STRUCTURES
I 1.1 INTRODUCTION TO WORKING STRESS AND LIMIT STATE METHOD 18 Hrs
Reinforced Cement Concrete- Materials used in R.C.C and their basic

requirements – Purpose of providing reinforcement – Different types and
grades of cement and steel – Characteristic strength and grades of concrete
– Behaviour of R.C members in bending-Modular ratio and Equivalent area
of R.C.Sections – Different types of loads on structures as per IS: 875-1987
- Different methods of design.
Working Stress Method-Assumptions made in the W.S.M- Singly reinforced
rectangular sections – Strain and stress distribution due to bending – Actual
and Critical neutral axes – Under / Over reinforced sections- Balanced
sections – Lever arm – Moment of resistance of singly reinforced
rectangular sections (No problems).
Limit State Method ˗ Concept –Advantages- Different limit states-
Characteristic strength and design strength of materials – Characteristic
loads and design loads - Partial safety factors for loads and material
strength - Limit state of collapse in flexure – Assumptions – Stress Strain
curves for concrete and steel – Stress block – Maximum strain in concrete –
Limiting values of neutral axis of singly reinforced section for different
grades of steel -Design stress in tension and compression steel– Moment of
resistance of singly and doubly reinforced rectangular sections – Problems.
1.2 DESIGN OF RECTANGULAR BEAMS FOR FLEXURE BY L.S.M
Design requirements-Effective spans of cantilever and simply supported
beams – Breadth and depth requirements of beams – Control of deflection
– Minimum depth requirement for stiffness –Minimum concrete cover for
durability and fire resistance – Minimum and maximum areas/ spacing for
main reinforcement and side face reinforcement as per IS 456-2000-
Anchorage and Curtailment of reinforcements- Design bending moments –
Design of singly and doubly reinforced rectangular beams (Cantilevers and
Simply supported beams carrying point loads and u.d.l only)- Problems-
Practice on using Design Aids, SP16 (not for examination).
II 2.1 DESIGN OF T-BEAMS AND LINTELS FOR FLEXURE BY L.S.M 18 Hrs

Cross sections of Tee and L-beams- Effective width of flange-Neutral Axis
and M.R of Singly Reinforced T-Sections- Design of singly reinforced T-
beams/L-beams for flexure–Problems on Cantilevers (Inverted-T) and
Simply supported T- beams – Loads on Isolated Lintels over openings of
masonry walls - Design B.M for isolated lintels carrying
rectangular/triangular loads- Design of Lintel- Simple problems
142 | P a g e
II 2.2 DESIGN OF CONTINUOUS BEAMS FOR FLEXURE AND SHEAR BY L.S.M

Methods of analysis of continuous beams- Effective Span- Arrangement of
Loading for Critical Bending Moments- B.M coefficients specified by IS:456-
200-Design of rectangular continuous beams (Singly and Doubly
Reinforced) using B.M. coefficients (equal spans & u.d.l only) for sagging
and hogging moments.
Limit state of collapse in shear – Design shear strength of concrete – Design
shear strengths of vertical / inclined stirrups and bent up bars –Principle of
shear design – Critical sections for shear- S.F Coefficients specified by
IS:456- 2000– Nominal shear stress –Minimum shear reinforcement- Design
of vertical stirrups, inclined stirrups and bent up bars for rectangular beams
using limit state method –Simple problems- Practice on use of Design Aids
(not for examination).
III 3.1 DESIGN OF ONE WAY SLABS AND STAIRCASES BY L.S.M 18Hrs
Classification of Slabs – Effective spans – Loads (DL and IL) on floor/roof

slabs and stairs (IS: 875-1987) – Strength and Stiffness requirements –
Minimum and maximum permitted size, spacing and area of main and
secondary reinforcements as per IS 456 -2000- Cover to reinforcements in
slabs- Design of cantilever/simply supported one way slabs and sunshades
by limit state method – Design of continuous slabs using B.M coefficients-
Check for shear and stiffness – Curtailment of tension reinforcement –
Anchoring of reinforcement– Practice in designing slabs using design aids
(not for examination).
Types of stairs according to structural behaviour- Requirements of Stairs-

Planning a staircase – Effective span of stairs – Effective breadth of flight
slab- Distribution of loads on flights – Design of cantilever steps – Design of
doglegged and Open well stairs spanning parallel to the flight.
3.2 DESIGN OF TWO WAY SLABS BY L.S.M

Introduction –Effective spans –Thickness of slab for strength and stiffness
requirements - Middle and Edge strips – B.M coefficients as per IS:456 –
Design B.Ms for Simply supported, Restrained and Continuous slabs –
Tension and Torsion reinforcement requirement– Design of two way slabs
using B.M. coefficients – Curtailment of reinforcement – Check for shear
and stiffness.
IV 4.1 DESIGN OF COLUMNS BY L.S.M 18 Hrs
Limit state of collapse in compression – Assumptions - Limiting strength of
short axially loaded compression members - Effective length of compression
members – Slenderness limits for columns – Classification of columns -
Minimum eccentricity for column loads – Longitudinal and Transverse
reinforcement requirements as per I S 456-2000 – Cover requirement -
Design of axially loaded short columns with lateral ties / helical
reinforcement – Use of Design Aids (not for examination).
143 | P a g e
IV 4.2 DESIGN OF COLUMN FOOTINGS

Basic requirements of Footings-Types of footings –Minimum depth below
GL- Footings with uniform thickness and varying thickness (sloped footing) –
Critical sections for BM, Transverse/Punching Shears – Minimum
reinforcement, Distribution of reinforcement, Development length,
Anchorage, Cover, Minimum edge thickness requirements as per IS 456-
2000 – Design of Isolated footing (square and rectangular) with uniform/
varying thickness by limit state method- For Examination : Problem either on
(i) Designing Size of Footing and Area of tension steel for flexure only for
the given Column load and SBC of soil, or on (ii) Checking the footing for
Punching shear and Transverse shear only, for the given sizes and other
required details of the footing.
STEEL STRUCTURES 18 Hrs

V
5.1 DESIGN OF TENSION AND COMPRESSION MEMBERS BY L.S.M
General- Characteristic Actions, Partial Safety Factors for Loads, Design
Actions- Ultimate Strength, Partial Safety Factors for Materials, Design
Strengths of Materials - Rolled Steel Sections - Different forms of Tension
members – Gross area, Net area and Net Effective sectionalarea of Tension
members– Maximum permitted values of Effective Slenderness Ratio –
DesignStrength of Tension members against Yielding of Gross section,
Rupture of Critical section andBlock Shear- Design Strength of given Plates/
Angles connected to gussets by bolts/welds- Designof ties using single/
double angles, T-sections and channels.
Different forms of Compression members- Classification of Cross sections-
Limiting Width to Thickness Ratio- Effective sectional area- End Conditions
and Effective length of Compression members – Maximum permitted
values of Slenderness ratio –Imperfection factor and Stress reduction
factor– Design Strength of Compression members- Problems –– Design of
single angle and double angle Struts – Design of steel columns using rolled
steel sections (Symmetrical sections only) with or without cover plates.
(Lacing and battens not included).
5.2 DESIGN OF SIMPLE BEAMS AND WELDED CONNECTIONS BY L.S.M
Classification of Steel beams –Effective span- Design principles- Minimum
thickness of Web-Design Strength in Bending/ Shear- Limiting deflection of
beams - Lateral buckling of beams – Maximum permitted Slenderness
Ratio- Plastic Moment of Resistance and Plastic Section Modulus of
Sections- Shape Factor –– Design of laterally supported Simple beams
using single / double rolled steel sections (symmetrical cross sections only).
Types of welds – Size, Effective area and Effective length of Fillet welds –
Requirements of welds-Stresses in Welds –Design strength of fillet/ butt
welds – Lap and butt joints for plates and angles – Beam to Beam and
Beam to Column connections - Seat angle and Web angle
connections(Details only)–Problems on design of welded connections
(Moment resistant connections not included). 6 Hrs
REVISION AND TEST
144 | P a g e
Reference Book :
1. S.R.Karve and V.L.Shah,” Limit state Theory and Design of Reinforced Concrete”,Pune Vidya
Griha Prakashan.
2. P C Varghese,” Limit state Design of Reinforced Concrete”,PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd”,2011.
3. Dr.S.Ramachandra,Limit State Design of Concrete Structures”,Scientific publishers, 2004.
4. Mallick and Rangasamy,”Reinforced Cement Concrete” Oxford-IBH.
5. N Krishnaraju, “ Reinforced Concrete Design” New Age International Publications, 2012
6. B C Punmia, “ Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete”, Laxmi Publications,2007
7. B C Punmia, “ R C C Designs”, Laxmi Publications, 2006
8. S S Bhavikatti, “ Design of R C C and Structural Elements” ( RCC Vol I), New Age International
Publications, 2011
9. I S 456-2000 ; I S 875-1987; I S 800 -2007.
10. Explanatory hand book SP24, Design Aid SP 16, Detailing of Reinforcement,SP 34
11. M.R.Shiyekar “Limit State Design in Structural Steel”, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd, 2011
145 | P a g e

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15

1. What is meant by limit state ?
2. How design load is determined from characteristic load ?
3. What is meant by doubly reinforced section ?
4. Why cover is necessary for the reinforcement steel ?
5. How the width of lintel is being chosen ?
6. Write any one advantage of T-beam over rectangular beam
7. Where inverted T-beams are provided ?
8. How the effective width of flange of a T-beam is determined ?
9. When a slab is to be designed as a one way slab ?
10. Write the Clause number of IS:456-2000 with respect to maximum spacing of tension
reinforcement in slabs
11. What is meant by restrained slab ?
12. When torsion reinforcement has to be provided in two way slabs ?
13. State the minimum value of eccentricity to be considered in the design of columns
14. Why lateral ties are provided in columns ?
15. What is the purpose of footing ?
16. Specify the critical section for punching shear in an isolated R.C footing
17. Write the formula for the net effective area of tension plate connected by staggered bolts
18. When the cross section of a steel member is classified as compact section ?
19. Write the formula for calculating the strength of fillet weld
20. Write any two advantages of Butt weld
146 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21 (A) i) Explain critical neutral axis and actual neutral axis in working stress method with a neat
sketch.
ii) A RCC beam 300 mm  420 mm effective size is reinforced with 3 Nos of 16mm
diameter bars in its tension zone. Fe415 grade steel and M20 grade concrete are
used. Determine the limiting moment of resistance of the section by limit state
method
(OR)
(B) A cantilever beam of rectangular section 250 mm wide and 500 mm overall depth has to
carry an udl of 24 KN/m ( inclusive of self weight ) over an effective span of 3.4 metre.
M20 grade concrete and Fe415 grade steel are to be used. Design the reinforcement for
flexure by limit state method
22 (A) Find the moment of resistance of a T beam having the following data: Effective width of
flange = 740mm; Breadth of rib = 250mm; Reinforcement = 5 Nos 25 mm dia bars in
tension zone; Thickness of slab = 80 mm; Effective depth of beam= 400 mm ; Steel grade
Fe 415; Concrete grade M20
(OR)
(B) The support section of a continuous rectangular beam is subjected to a shear force of
150 KN. The effective size of the section is 305 mm x 510 mm. The beam had 5
numbers of 20 mm dia Fe 415 grade bars as tension reinforcement at mid span out of
which two bars are cranked at 45 0 near the support. The support section already had
2 numbers of 20 mm dia bars in its tension zone. Design the shear reinforcement for
the support section using Fe 415 grade steel by LSM. Concrete used is of
grade M25.
23 (A) Design a dog legged staircase for a flat using M25 grade concrete and Fe.415 grade steel.
The height between the floors is 3.0m. The effective span of a flight is 5.25 m including the
two landings. The tread and rise of brick steps are 300mm and 150mm respectively. The
unit weight of brick steps is 19KN/m3.The imposed load is 3KN/m2. The flight slab is
simply supported at their ends and their sides are not embedded in to the wall. Uniform
loading may be assumed for the full span.
(OR)
(B) Design a simply supported roof slab for a library of clear size 4 m  5 m by LSM. The
thickness of walls all-round is 230 mm. Access is not provided to the roof. The corners of
the slab are not held down. Weight of weathering course will be 1 KN/m2 . Use M 20 grade
concrete and Fe 415 grade steel ( Check for stiffness not necessary ).
24 (A) Design a circular RC column with lateral ties to carry an axial load of 1250 KN.
Take fck as 20 MPa and fy as 500 MPa. The unsupported length of the column is
4 m. The ends of the column are effectively held in position but not restrained
against rotation.
147 | P a g e
(OR)
(B) Design a square footing of uniform thickness for a RC Column carrying an axial load of
1800 KN. Size of column is 400 mm  400 mm safe being capacity of soil is 150 KN/m2
Use M20 grade concrete and Fe 415 grade steel. Check for shear not required
25 (A) Select a suitable single angle section to carry an axial tension of 240KN, due to
DL and IL. The member has to be connected to gusset plates at its ends by fillet
welds through one leg. The yield and ultimate strengths of steel are 250 N/m2 and 400
N/m2 . Connection need not be designed.
(OR)
(B) A laterally supported cantilever beam of 3 m effective span carries a load of 12.5 KN/m
inclusive of its self weight through out its span. Design the beam by limit state method
using double channels of yield stress 350 MPa. Check for stiffness not necessary.
148 | P a g e

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15

1. Specify the size of fine aggregate to be used in RCC.
2. Define lever arm with respect to RC cross section.
3. What do you mean by under reinforced section?
4. What is meant by curtailment of reinforcement?
5. What is the function of lintels in buildings?
6. Where inverted T-Beams are provided?
7. At which section of a continuous beam there will be maximum BM?
8. List out the different types of shear reinforcement in beams .
9. What is the functional difference between one way slab and two way slab?
10. Why distribution bars are provided in slabs?
11. Which portion of a flight slab is subjected to maximum intensity of load?
12. When torsion reinforcement has to be provided in two way slabs?
13. What is meant by effectively held in position?
14. Write the advantage of helical reinforcement in columns.
15. Specify the critical section for punching shear in RC footings.
16. Specify minimum nominal cover for the reinforcement bars of footings.
17. What are the three different strengths of a tension member?
18. Why imperfection factors are used in the design of compression members?
19. What is the maximum permitted slenderness ratio for the compression flange of
beams?
20. Specify the reduction factor for long welds.
149 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21 ( A) (i) Explain how the design stress for compression steel of a beam can be determined from
the stress-strain curve.
(ii) A rectangular section of overall size 300 mm x 600 mm is reinforced with 4# 20 mm ɸ

bars in the tension zone and 2# 20 mm ɸ bars in the compression zone with a clear
cover of 25 mm. M20 grade concrete and Fe415 grade steel are used. Find the
limiting moment of resistance of the section. ( fsc = 355 N/mm2 for d’/d = 0.05 and fsc =
352 N/mm2 for d’/d = 0.10 )
( OR )
(B) A simply supported rectangular beam has to be provided over a clear span of 12 m to
carry an UDL of 20 KN/m, excluding its self weight. Design the midspan section of the
beam using M20 grade concrete and Fe 415 grade steel in tension for the limit state of
collapse in flexure. Assume the width of support as 300 mm.
22 (A) A Tee beam with rib width 230 mm, breadth of flange 1600 mm, and thickness of
flange 100 mm has to carry an udl of 36 KN/m over its full span. The clear span of the
beam is 6metre. Width of supports is 300 mm. Design the mid span section of the
beam for limit state of collapse in flexure using M20 grade concrete and Fe.500 grade
steel.
(OR)
(B) A continuous rectangular beam with 7 metres equal spans (effective) carries an
imposed load (not fixed ) of 12 KN/m and a dead load of 24 KN/m throughout its
length. Design the beam for the maximum bending moment using M25 grade concrete
and Fe.415 grade steel.
23 (A) (i) List the different types of stairs used in ordinary buildings. Draw a neat sketch of any
one type.
(ii) The vertical height between two successive floors of a multi storeyed residential
building is 3.2m. The clear size of the staircase room is 2.10 m  4.25 m. Plan a
dog legged stair case for the building.
(OR)
(B) Design the corner panel of a continuous reinforced concrete slab , which is supported
by 230 mm wide RC beams at 3.8 m centres in X-direction and at 4.75 m centres in
Y-direction, using M20 concrete and Fe 415 steel by limit state method. Imposed load
(not fixed ) is 2 KN/m2 and weight of floor finish is 0.6 KN/m2..
150 | P a g e
24 (A) Design a short square column using M15 concrete and mild steel to carry an axial
load of 1800KN, by limit state method. Check the slenderness of the column if
its effective length is 3.2 m.
(OR)
(B) The size of the rectangular footing provided for an RC column of 300 mm x
500 mm size is 3.0 m x 3.6 m. The column carries an axial load of 1500 KN. The
thickness of footing is 1.0 m along the faces of column and 200 mm along its free
edges. 18 numbers of 12 mm dia Fe 415 steel bars are provided in each direction at
an average effective cover of 70 mm. Check the footing fo r transverse shear. The
concrete used is of M20 grade.
25 (A) Design a tie member using a single channel section to carry an axial load of 850 KN.
fy = 450 MPa; fu = 570 MPa. The member will be connected at its ends through its
web by side fillet welds of 300 mm length each.
(OR)
(B) Two mild steel flats of 240 mm x 10 mm and 240 mm x 8 mm size are to be
connected by a lap joint at the site. Using the maximum permissible size of welds,
determine the design tensile strength of the joint . The angle between the fusion
faces will be 1050. Ultimate strength of weld is 415 N/mm2. Determine the maximum
permissible design tensile stresses in the two plates.
151 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING
AND POLLUTION CONTROL

152 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING AND POLLUTION CONTROL
Marks
ENVIRONMENTAL Internal Board
Total
ENGINEERING AND Assessment Examination
5 Hrs 80 Hrs
POLLUTION
CONTROL 25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
 To know the procedure of estimating water requirements for a water supply scheme.
 To select suitable sources of water supply and pipe materials.
 To determine the quality of water , testing procedures and standards for drinking water.
 To understand the methods of purification of water.
 To understand the systems of distribution for a water supply scheme.
 To understand the basic facts of sanitary engineering, the methods of collection and
conveyance of sewage.
 To understand the primary and secondary treatment of sewage and disposal.
 To know the methods of disposal of sludge and solid wastes.
 To identify the various pollution and their prevention.
 To create awareness about environmental impact assessment.
153 | P a g e
21052 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING AND POLLUTION CONTROL
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Contents: Theory
Unit Hours
Name of the Topic
PART I - WATER SUPPLY ENGINEERING
I 1.1 QUANTITY OF WATER 14 Hrs

Water supply - need for protected water supply - objectives of public water
supply system – demand -types of demand - per capita demand -
prediction of population - problems in arithmetical increase method,
geometrical increase method, incremental increase method - sources of
water - surface and subsurface sources.
1.2 INTAKES AND CONVEYANCE

Intakes - types of intakes-description of intakes - necessity of pumps -
types of pumps - pipes for conveyance of water - cast iron, steel, G.I.,
cement concrete, R.C.C., hume and PVC pipes-pipe joints -laying and
testing of pipe lines - pipe corrosion - corrosion control.
1.3 QUALITY OF WATER

Impurities in water - testing of water - collection of water sample - physical,
chemical, bacteriological tests - standards of drinking water - water borne
diseases and their causes.
2.1 TREATMENT OF WATER
II 14Hrs
Object of water treatment - flow diagram of treatment plants –
sedimentation – purpose - types of sedimentation - coagulation -
coagulants and their choice - types of sedimentation tanks – filtration -
theory of filtration - types and description of filters - disinfection of water –
methods - water softening –miscellaneous water treatment(names only) -
mineral water – requirements - R.O process.
2.2 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Distribution system - methods of distribution – gravity system, pumping
system, combined system -systems of water supply - continuous and
intermittent supply of water - layouts of distribution - dead end , grid iron,
radial and circular systems - service reservoirs - types.
III PART II - SANITARY ENGINEERING 14Hrs
3.1 COLLECTION AND CONVEYANCE OF SEWAGE

Sanitation – purpose – terms - systems of sanitation - quantity of sewage -
variation in rate of flow of sewage - estimation of storm water – problems -
minimum size of sewer - shapes of sewer (names only) -materials
used for sewer- joints in sewer line - laying and testing of sewer lines -
ventilation of sewers -cleaning of sewers.
154 | P a g e
Unit Hours
Name of the Topic
3.2 SEWER APPERTENANCES

Sewer appurtenances – manhole - lamp hole - catch basin - street inlet -
grease and oil trap -flushing tanks – drainage arrangements in buildings -
sanitary fittings - sewage pumps –necessity - types of sewage pumps
(names only).
IV 4.1 TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL OF SEWAGE 14Hrs

Objects of sewage treatment - flow diagram of sewage treatment plants -
treatment of sewage - primary and secondary treatments - screens -
skimming tanks - grit chambers - sedimentation tanks – filters - types and
description of filters - activated sludge process - septic tanks for isolated
buildings - construction and working of septic tanks - disposal of septic
tank effluent – soak pits, dispersion trenches - oxidation ponds – sludge –
types - methods of sludge disposal.
4.2 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT
Solid waste – classification - collection and conveyance of solid waste -
disposal of solid waste – necessity - reduction and reuse of solid wastes -
methods of solid waste disposal - incineration, dumping, sanitary landfill ,
composting - energy from waste
PART III - POLLUTION CONTROL

V
5.1 ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 14Hrs
Environment – definition - water pollution - sources of water pollution -
effects of water pollution - control of water pollution - soil pollution -
sources of soil pollution - effects of soil pollution - control of soil pollution -
noise pollution - sources of noise pollution - effects of noise pollution -
control of noise pollution - air pollution - sources of air pollution - effects of
air pollution on human beings, plants, animals, materials - air pollution
control equipment - control devices for particulate contaminants -
environmental degradation - ozone layer depletion - green house effect -
acid rain.
5.2 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

Environmental impact assessment (EIA) - methodology of EIA - organising
the job - performing the assessment - preparation of environmental impact
statement (EIS) - review of EIS - environmental risk assessment - limitation
of EIA.
REVISION AND TEST

10Hrs
155 | P a g e
Reference Book :
1. N.N. BASAK- Environmental Engineering,Tata McGraw hill publishing company Ltd.,New

Delhi, 2010
2. A.KAMALA,D.L.KANTHRAO- Environmental engineering, Tata McGraw hill publishing
company Ltd.,New Delhi
3. GURCHARAN SINGH- Water supply and sanitary engineering vol.I &II,Standard publishers
& distributors,Delhi
4. Dr.SURESH K.DHAMEJA- Environmental engineering and management,S.K.Kataria &Sons,
New Delhi.
5. S.K.GARG- Water supply and sanitary engineering,Khanna publishers, Delhi.
6. M.ANJI REDDI- Text book of Environmental science and technology,BS Publications,
Hyderabad.
7. P.VENUGOPALA RAO – Principles of Environmental science and engineering, PHI learning
pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
8. B C Punmia, “Environmental Engineering”, Laxmi Publications, 2010
9. B C Punmia, “Waste Water Engineering”, Laxmi Publications, 2010
156 | P a g e
PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15
1 State the need for protected water supply to community

2 State any two subsurface sources of water
3 List any four types of pipes used in water supply
4 Define PH value
5 What impurities are removed by filtration?
6 State any two Types of sedimentation tanks
7 List the methods of distribution of water
8 State any two functions of service reservoir
9 Define sewage
10 State any two advantages of water carriage system
11 Write any two empirical formulae used for calculating quantity of storm water
12 List any four sewer appurtenances
13 State the types of filters used in secondary treatment of sewage
14 What is a septic tank?
15 Name the methods of solid waste disposal
16 Write any two merits of incineration
17 Define air pollution
18 State any two sources of noise pollution
19 Define EIA
20 State any two goals of EIA
157 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21 (A) The censes records of a city show the population as follows

Present : 50,000
Before one decade : 47,100
Before two decades : 43,500
Before three decades : 41,000
Workout the probable population after one, two, three decades by arithmetical
increase and geometrical increase methods
OR
(B) i) Describe canal intake with a neat sketch
ii) What is turbidity? How is it measured?
22 (A) Describe the construction and operation of a rapid sand filter with a neat sketch
OR
(B) i) Explain the systems of supply of water
ii) State and explain the types of service reservoirs
23 (A) Describe the procedure for laying and testing of sewers

OR
(B) What are sanitary fittings? State and explain any four sanitary fittings with sketches
24 (A) Explain the treatment of sewage by activated sludge process with the help of a flow diagram
OR
(B) Write short notes on i) Collection and conveyance of solid waste
ii) Energy from waste
25 (A) i ) State the effects of water pollution and explain the measures to be taken to
prevent water pollution
ii) Write short notes on ozone layer depletion
OR
(B) i) State the limitations of EIA
ii) How is the environmental impact statement prepared?
158 | P a g e
PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15

1 Define per capita demand
2 What is a shallow well?
3 State any two methods by which corrosion can be prevented
4 List any four chemical tests to be conducted on water to find the impurities
5 State any two advantages of rapid sand filter
6 State the common coagulants used for water treatment
7 Name the types of distribution layouts of water supply system
8 State the classifications of service reservoir
9 Define sullage
10 State the methods of disposing sewage
11 State any two types of non-circular sewer sections
12 Give any four types of sewage pumps
13 State the object of screening
14 State the function of soak pit
15 What do you mean by solid waste?
16 What are contact beds?
17 Define soil pollution
18 State any two types of air pollution controlling equipments
19 Define EIS
20 State any one limitation of EIA
159 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21 (A) Explain the various types of surface and sub surface sources of water
OR
( B) i) State and explain different types of pipe joints used in water supply
ii) Write short notes on water borne diseases
22 (A) i) State and explain different methods of disinfection of water

ii) Differentiate between plain sedimentation and sedimentation with coagulation
OR
(B) Mention the various layouts of distribution in water supply system and explain them in detail
23 (A) i) Compare conservancy system with water carriage system

ii) Write short notes on ventilation of sewers
OR
(B) i) Write short notes on grease and oil trap
ii) Draw a typical layout of house drainage system and state the functions of its
components
24 (A) Describe the structural features and functioning of a standard rate trickling filter with neat
sketches
OR
(B) i) How are solid wastes classified?
ii) State and explain the methods of solid waste disposal
25 (A) i) Describe the harmful effects of air pollution on human beings, animals and plants
ii) What is acid rain? State the effects of acid rain
OR
(B) With the help of flow chart , describe the EIA process
160 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY

161 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Semester : VI Semester
Subject Title : ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY
( ELECTIVE THEORY II )
Marks
Internal Board
ADVANCED Total
CONSTRUCTION 5 Hrs 80 Hrs
TECHNOLOGY 25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
 Pile foundations
 Modified Concrete
 Pre fabrication systems and methods
 Fire protection in buildings
 Earthquake proof construction
 Maintenance and Rehabilitation of buildings
 To take precautionary measures to prevent cracks in buildings
 House modernisation
 Lift modernisation
162 | P a g e
21071 ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY ( ELECTIVE THEORY II )
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Contents: Theory
I 1.1 PILE FOUNDATIONS 14 Hrs

Definition – uses of piles – types of piles – Bearing piles and Friction piles -
classification based on material – stone piles- Encased piles - Reinforced
cement concrete piles cast-in situ pile and pre cast piles description,
advantages and disadvantages - load bearing piles and friction piles -
purpose - sheet piles-types-description - choice of type of pile - factors to be
considered – pile cap and pile shoe – description - load test on piles –
description - Pile driving – equipments - types of hammer - choice of
hammer - causes of failure of piles – Reinforcement requirements for
R C piles
1.2 MODIFIED CONCRETE
Admixtures – definition – function – classification - uses of different types -

quantity to be used - light weight concrete - light weight aggregate -
production of light weight aggregate - shot crete or guniting – definition -
typical arrangement for gunite system - special concrete – Ferro cement-
production process – curing - advantages and limitations - fibre reinforced
concrete - production process – uses - Pre-stressed concrete - General
principle of pre stressing - advantages of pre stressed Concrete - materials
used - methods of pre-stressing - steel used - pretension method - post
tension method - system of pre-stressing - freyssinet system - Magnel
Blaton system - Lee-mc-call system - Causes for losses in prestress –
remedial measures – Composite member
II 2.1 PRE FABRICATION SYSTEM: 14 Hrs
Advantages and Disadvantages of Prefabrication system - Terms defined :

prefabricated building, module, composite members, modular co-
ordination, system; - Basic module - planning modules grid – modules in
horizontal plane for residential buildings and industrial buildings - other
consideration - Module for components:- flooring scheme, Beams, columns,
walls; Staircase,- lintel, sunshade - Tolerance on dimensions:- length, cross
sectional dimension, straightness, squareness, twist, flatness
2.2 PRE FABRICATION METHODS
Characteristics to be considered in devising a system - Types of pre

fabricated building - load bearing wall type - frame type; Design
considerations - bearing for pre cast units, joints; Requirements of an
ideal structural joint - manufacture of precast concrete elements – place -
process - main, auxiliary and subsidiary process; Stages of precasting –
163 | P a g e
preparation and storage of materials - moulding and curing; Pre
fabrication methods: individual method, battery form method, tilting mould
method , Flow line production method,- extension method - Handling
during transport and storage - Handling arrangement - Transport - inside
the factory - stacking yard to erection site, Erection works to be carried
out - Equipment required
III 3.1 FIRE PROTECTION IN BUILDINGS 14 Hrs
General - causes and effects of fire - precautionary measures to

minimize dangers of fire – limiting fire spread – factors to be considered
- Fire resisting properties of common building material - general rules
for fire resisting buildings - alarm system - protection of openings -
common wall stair-floor fire extinguishing arrangement – fire protection
systems – types - Emergency exit arrangements - Strong room
construction
3.2 EARTH QUAKE RESISTING CONSTRUCTION
Indian Seismicity – Earthquake History - Definition of terms used -

Behavior of structures in the past Earthquakes – Seismic forces – Effect
of seismic forces on Buildings – Planning of Earthquake resistant Buildings
- Roofs and Floors- Articulation joints – Expansion Joints – I.S. code
provision – Alterations to Buildings – Foundation – Permissible increase in
the allowable Bearing capacity of soils - Seismic coefficient for different
zones – Construction of framed buildings in Earthquake zones – Walls –
Beams etc.
IV 4.1 MAINTENANCE AND REHABILITATION OF BUILDINGS 14 Hrs
Rehabilitation of buildings - demolition of buildings - safety aspects –

general - precautions during demolitions - sequence of demolition of
operation – demolition process of trusses, girders and beams, walls,
flooring - catch plat form – lowering removal and disposal of materials -
mechanical demolition - Repairs to building – repairing of plastering works -
fixing doors in – Making opening in masonry and fixing doors and
windows - Renewing glass panes with wooden fillets – fixing fan
clamps in existing R.C.C slab - repair to terrazzo (mosaic) flooring
4.2 PRECAUTIONS TO PREVENT CRACKS IN BUILDINGS
Cracks - general – Hair crack – Structural crack – Horizontal crack in

masonry – Vertical/ diagonal cracks at walls - R.C.C beams or pillars -
transverse cracks in R.C.C slab and sunshade - Repairs – Methods-
materials used for filling cracks.
164 | P a g e
V 5.1 HOUSING MODERNIZATION

14 Hrs
Housing modernization and management ( building and construction

safety, energy efficiency in housing, Property Refurbishment / Upgrade /
Modernization / Renovation - Modular kitchens, bathrooms, New windows,
doors and timber floors, Roof insulation, dry lining and BER ( Building
Energy Rating ) - Certificates – Plumbing and Electrical to heating
efficiency Landscaping and driveways to patios and decking - Drafting
a Construction Contract – Transforming from Traditional to Modern Style
- Case Studies – Strengthening of Old buildings -Energy-saving houses,
Green House, Passive house, Passive house construction, Low-energy
house, Zero-energy house, Energy consulting, Energy efficiency: Passive
house standard, Quality-tested commercial passive house construction,
Office building construction, Residential building construction - Consulting,
planning, supervising.
5.2 LIFT MODERNISATION
Independent Lifting Services - Mechanical Modernisation - escalators or

pathways - Aesthetic Modernisation -Lift Car Interior-Eco-friendly
Modernisation – lift construction - Installation and modernization and
maintenance.
Reference Book :
1. Concrete Technology – M.S. Shetty
2. Fire Resistant Construction – Building Construction by S.P.Arora and S.P.Bindra
3. Earth quake Proof - Building Construction by Dr.Janardhanjha and Prof.Suresh Kumar
4. SinhaIS Code of Practice for Earth quake , IS Code of Practice for Fire resistance, IS Code
of Practice for pre stressing (2005)
5. Pile foundation – RD Chellis, MIS
6. Construction and foundation Engg – Sinha & Janatha Shau.
7. Principle Fine safty standards for building Construction – M.Ya Roytman
165 | P a g e
21071 ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY ( ELECTIVE THEORY II )

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15

1. When is sheet piling adopted?
2. Classify the piles based on materials used
3. Define admixtures
4. What are the methods available for mix design?
5. Define pretensioning.
6. Explain the need of High strength concrete and steel in prestressing.
7. What are the advantages of pre stressed concrete?
8. Write the names of pre fabricated elements in a load bearing wall type construction.
9. What are the fire protection measures to be taken in public buildings?
10. Define the seismic coefficient
11. What are the causes of Earth quake
12. Explain seismograph.
13. Define shrinkage cracks
14. What are the factors which influence the cracks?
15. What are the major causes for defects in buildings?
16. What are the materials used for repairs in buildings?
17. Define energy efficiency
18. Write shortly about land scaping
19. What are escalators?
20. What are Independent Lifting Services?
166 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21 A) Describe the process of casting a precast concrete pile and draw a neat sketch of a typical
concrete pile.
(or)
B) i) What are the composition of cement.
ii) Write the procedure of Mix design by I.S.Code method.
22 A) (i) Draw neat sketches of prestressing floor slab, grid floor , circular pipes.
(ii) What are the methods available for post tensioning and explain any one of them.
( or)
(B) (i) Draw the different applications of precast elements
(ii) State the advantages and disadvantages of Pre fabrication system.
23 (A) (i) Write short notes on Fire-resistance of concrete.

(ii) What are the general guidelines for planning an earthquake resistant buildings?
(or)
(B) (i) What are the Exit requirement as per NBC of India.
(ii) What are the precautions to be taken during Earth quake.
24 (A)(i) Explain the methods of repairing cracks in concrete.

(ii) What are the major causes for defects in building
(or)
B) (i) What are the materials used for repairs in buildings.
(ii) Define structural cracking in concrete and what are the factors to be considered during
demolition.
25 (A) (i) Explain briefly about Housing modernization and management.

(ii) What are the features of Lift Car
(or)
(B) (i) Explain about Passive house construction.
(ii) Explain where escalators are provided.
167 | P a g e
21071 ADVANCED CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY
( ELECTIVE THEORY II )

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15

1. What are factors to be considered during piling.
2. What is meant by pile cap ?.
3. State any two advantages of pre stressed concrete.
4. Give any one requirement for the pre stressing steel.
5. Define the term “module”
6. State any two disadvantages of pre fabrication system.
7. Write any two methods of pre fabrication.
8. State any two main equipments required at the site of a pre fabrication project .
9. Mention the fire precautionary measures.
10. Explain fire protection systems
11. Explain seismograph.
12. What are the causes of Earth quake.
13. What are the major causes for defects in building.
14. What are the materials used for repairs in buildings.
15. How to repair the plastering cracks in buildings.
16. Define shrinkage cracks
17. What is energy rating.
18. What is Low-energy house
19. What are the Renovation to be adopted to kitchens,
20. What is Eco-friendly Modernization
168 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
.
21 (A) (i) Describe a process of casting a precast concrete pile

(ii) Draw a neat sketch of a typical concrete pile
(or)
(B) (i) What are the advantages of pre stressed concrete?
(ii) Explain with a neat sketch Freyssinet system of prestressing
22 (A) (i) Write a short notes on modular co-ordination.

(ii Explain about the different tolerances in Pre fabrication system.
(or)
(B) (i) What are the Characteristics to be considered in devising a system
(ii) What are the stages of pre casting
23 (A) (i) Write short notes on fire resisting building materials

(ii) Write short notes on Fire-resistance of concrete
(or)
(B) (i) Explain the I.S.code provision for Earthquake in Buildings
(ii) What are the causes of Earthquake
24 (A) (i) Write short notes on “Patch repairs for plastering”

(ii) What are the factors which influences the cracks?
(or)
(B) (i) What are the precautions to be taken during demolitions?
(ii) What are the materials used for repairs in buildings
25 (A) (i) Explain Property Refurbishment
(ii) Write briefly about Building Energy Rating
(or)
(B )(i) Explain standards Passive house
(ii) What is quality-tested commercial passive house construction
169 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
REMOTE SENSING AND G I S

170 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : REMOTE SENSING AND GIS ( ELECTIVE THEORY I )
Marks
GIS AND REMOTE Internal Board
5 Hrs 80 Hrs Total
SENSING Assessment Examination
25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
On completion of the course, the student will be familiar :
 To understand the basic concepts of remote sensing

 To know the applications of Geographic information systems in Civil Engineering
 Identify the basic remote sensing concepts and its characteristics
 Implement the photogrammetry concepts and fundamentals of Air photo interpretation
 Use various analysis and interpretation of GIS results
171 | P a g e
21072 REMOTE SENSING AND GIS ( ELECTIVE THEORY I )
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Contents: Theory
Unit Hours
Name of the Topic
I INTRODUCTION TO REMOTE SENSING
Basic Concepts of Remote Sensing – Energy Sources and Radiation 14Hrs

principles – electromagnetic radiation – characteristic of real remote
sensing system, platforms, sensors, satellite, Indian Remote
Sensing satellite
II PHOTOGRAMMETRY
Geometric elements of a vertical photograph – Stereoscopic plotting 14Hrs
instruments, Ortho photos, Flight planning
III IMAGE INTERPRETATION & PROCESSING

Fundamentals of Airphoto interpretation - Elements of image
interpretation, concepts of digital image processing image Rectification
and Restoration, Image enhancement, Image classification, Application 14Hrs
of Remote sensing in Civil Engineering
IV INTRODUCTION TO GIS
Basic Concepts of GIS – Introduction to GIS - History of 14Hrs

development of GIS - Elements of GIS, Computer hardware –
Software, Data Input, Verification, Storage and Output
V GIS ANALYSIS
14Hrs
Map Overlay - Vector and raster data model, mapping concept, data
storage and database management - development of map overlay,
overlay operation Errors and quality control – Current issues and
Trends in GIS application in Civil Engineering
172 | P a g e
Reference Book :
 Lo & Yeung (2005), Geographic Information Systems, Prentice of India.

 Anji Reddy.M. (1998), Remote Sensing and Geographical information systems.
 Lillesand, T.M. & Kiefer R.W. (1998), Remote Sensing and image interpretation, John Wiley
& Sons, Newyork.
 Burrough P.A. (2000), Principle of Geographical Information Systems for land resources
assessment, Clarendon Press, Oxford.
 Clarke Parks & Crane (2005), Geographic Information Systems & Environmental Modelling,
Prentice-Hall of India.
 Wolf Paul (1998), Elements of Photogrammetry, McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
 Shahab Fazal,”G I S Basics”, New Age International Publications, Chennai.
173 | P a g e
PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15
1. How are remote sensing images obtained are or converted into digital form?
2. Why are digital forms used?
3. What are the four major areas of computer operations in digital image processing?
4. What is image restoration or preprocessing?
5. What is image enhancement?
6. What is image classification?
7. What is data-set merging?
8. Describe the characteristics of a digital image
9. How are digital numbers used in application to remote sensing images?
10. How are data stored and used by computers?
11. What is GIS?
12. What is projection ?
13. What ae the four functions to be included in all GIS?
14. Which are the areas of GIS application in commercial industry?
15. What is reverse geocoding?
16. What is geo-referencing?
17. What is geo-processing?
18. What is database organization?
19. What are the advantages and disadvantages of employing object-oriented GIS database
20. Give distinction between vector and raster GIS?
174 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21 (A) What are the five basic steps for image classification?
OR
(B) Differentiate between unsupervised classification and supervised classification?
22 (A) What are the advantages to be gained by multisensor image merging?

OR
(B) What are the other image variations which computers can produce from the input data?
23 (A) What is the size in pixels of a MSS Landsat image, a TM Landsat image, a
HRV multispectral SPOT image and a HRV panchromatic SPOT image?
OR
(B) What are the advantages to be gained by multisensor image merging?
24 (A) Describe the difference between raster and vector data models used to represent
maps in a GIS
OR
(B) Summarize the various definitions of a GIS .What elements do each have in common?
25 (A) What is the difference between projected coordinated system and geographic coordinate
system?
OR
(B) Describe the differences between raster and vector based GIS?
175 | P a g e
PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15
1. How are remote sensing images obtained are converted into digital form?
2. How are digital numbers used in application to remote sensing images?
3. How are digital numbers stored and used by computers?
4. What is the numerical range of values most often associated with remote sensing data?
5. What is enhancement?
6. What is the purpose of filtering?
7. Describe the X, Y, and Z parameters of a digital image.
8. Describe the characteristics of a digital image
9. Define GIS:
10. Why does selection of a particular GIS always involve compromise?
11. List four trends in GIS technology?
12. What is a scale.?
13. What is geocoding?
14. How does the "human factor" enter into GIS development and implementation?
15. How would you distinguish among GIS, CAD
16. What are different projection systems
17. What is image enhancement?
18. What is image classification?
19. What is data-set merging?
20. Why are digital forms used?
176 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21 A) Differentiate between unsupervised classification and supervised classification ?

OR
B) What are advantages to be gained by multisensory image merging ?
22 A) How many ratio combinations are possible with the four bands of the MSS ?
OR
B) Why is it useful to view GIS as a process rather than merely software of hardware ?
23 A) According to William E.Huxhold (1991) in Chapter 7 An Introduction to Urban Geographic

Information Systems
OR
B) Describe the characteristics of a digital image
24 A) What three issues are most critical to the overall success or failure of a GIS project ?
OR
B) Describe the differences between raster and vector based GIS ?
25 A) Paper and digital maps are sometimes referred to as "dumb maps. " Why are they
and what would make them "intelligent ?"
OR
B) Explain the difference between attribute and spatial data, give examples
177 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
SOIL MACHANICS AND FOUNDATION

ENGINEERING

178 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : SOIL MACHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
( Elective Theory I)
Marks
SOIL MACHANICS Internal Board
Total
AND FOUNDATION 5 Hrs 80 Hrs Assessment Examination
ENGINEERING 25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
 To study the Properties of Soil , Classification and Strength of soils

 To describe about the Sub-soil Sampling
 To study about the Seepage analysis , Bearing Capacity of soil and Settlement of
Foundations
 To study about the Types of Foundations , Pile foundations and Pile Groups
 To understand about the Foundations on Expansive soil and Machine Foundations
 To know about the Foundations of Transmission Line Towers
179 | P a g e
21073 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING ( ELECTIVE THEORY I )
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Contents: Theory
Unit Hours
Name of the Topic
I 1.1 SOIL MECHANICS AND INDEX PROPETIES

Introduction - Development of Soil Mechanics - Fields of
application of Soil Mechanics - Soil formation - Cohesive and
Cohesionless soil - Soil Properties - General, Index and Engineering
properties - Detailed description - Atter Berg limits - Simple
problems
12Hrs
1.2 HYDRAULIC PROPERTIES OF SOIL
Introduction - Permeability - Co-efficient of permeability - Darcy’s law
- Factors affecting permeability - Permeability tests - Simple
problems - Quick sand conditions
II 2.1 CLASSIFICATION AND STRENGTH OF SOIL 16Hrs

Classification of soil - Introduction - Necessity - Systems of soil
classification - Field identification of soil - Shear strength of soil -
Introduction - Shear strength - Mohr’s stress circle - Mohr-Coulomb
failure theory - Shear strength test - Unconfined compression test -
Mohr’s circle for unconfined compression test - Compaction -
Consolidation - Consolidometer - Optimum moisture content -
Proctor’s Compaction test - Methods of compaction - Degree of
compaction - Field density of soil - Tests - Compaction and
Consolidation - Comparison
2.2 STABILIZATION OF SOIL AND SUB-SOIL SAMPLING

Stabilization of soil - Introduction - Objects of stabilization - Methods
of stabilization - Soil exploration - Introduction - Objects of soil
exploration - Methods of soil exploration - Direct , Semi-direct and
Indirect methods - Spacing and depth of test borings - Boring log -
Sounding and Penetration tests - Geophysical methods - Sub-soil
Sampling - Disturbed and Undisturbed samples - Types of samplers
- Split spoon sampler - Thin-walled sampler - Chunk sampling
180 | P a g e
Unit Hours
Name of the Topic
III 3.1 SEEPAGE ANALYSIS AND SEEPAGE BELOW HYDRAULIC

STRUCTURES
Seepage analysis - Introduction - Head , Gradient and Potential -
14Hrs
Hydraulic gradient - Seepage pressure - Upward flow ( Quick
condition or Quick sand ) - Types of flow lines - Types of flow
( Definition only ) - Two dimensional flow ( Laplace equation ) -
Velocity potential -Properties of flow net - Uses of flow net -
Seepage below Hydraulic structures - Introduction - Hydraulic
gradient - Piping - Exit gradient - Khosla’s theory - Seepage flow
nets below hydraulic structures
3.2 BEARING CAPACITY AND SETTLEMENT OF FOUNDATIONS

Bearing capacity - Introduction - Terminology - Factors affecting
bearing capacity of soils - Methods of determining bearing capacity -
Types of failure in soil - General , Local and Punching shear failure
- Analytical methods - Rankine’s analysis - Terzaghi’s analysis -
Assumption and limitations - Effect of water table - Methods of
improving bearing capacity of soil - Settlement of foundation -
Introduction - Causes and Effect of settlement - Plate load test -
Simple problems
IV 4.1 FOUNDATIONS
Foundation - Introduction - Definitions - Objectives - Requirements of
foundation - Criteria for selection of type of foundation - Types of
foundations - Shallow and Deep foundations - Types - Foundation at
different levels - Foundation on made up grounds - Deep foundation
- Introduction - Pile foundation - Uses of piles - Types of piles -
Caisson foundation - Types - Selection of piles - Pile Driving -
16Hrs
Capacity of piles - Pile load test - Floating foundation - Negative
skin friction - Pile groups - Bearing capacity of pile groups -
Settlement of pile group
4.2 FOUNDATIONS IN EXPANSIVE SOIL

Introduction - Identification of expansive soil - Free Swell Test -
Differential free swell test - Indian expansive soil - Swell potential
and Swelling pressure - Traditional Indian practice - Methods of
foundation in expansive soils - Replacement of soils and “CNS”
concept - Under reamed pile foundation - Remedial measures for
cracked buildings
181 | P a g e
Unit Hours
Name of the Topic
V 5.1 MACHINE FOUNDATION 12Hrs

Introduction - Soil dynamics - Free vibration and Forced vibration
- Definitions -Natural frequency - Barkan’s method Pauw’s method -
Types of machines and machine foundation - General requirements
- Design of machine foundations - Reciprocating type - Centrifugal
type - Impact type - Steps to design - Couzen theory - In-situ
dynamic investigation of soil - Methods - IS code of practice -
Design criteria - Isolation of foundation - Simple problems
5.2 FOUNDATIONS OF TRANSMISSION LINE TOWERS

Introduction - Necessity - Forces on Tower Foundations - General
design criteria - Choice and type of foundations - Design
procedures - Stability conditions - Description – No problems
REVISION AND TEST 10Hrs
Reference Book :
 B C PUNMIA , “Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering”, Laxmi publications (P)

Ltd., 2005
 SWAMI SARAN , “Analysis and Design of Substructures” (LSD) – Second Edition
2010
 V N S MURTHY , “Soil Mechanics & Foundation Engineering”–Sai Kripa Technical
Consultants
 Dr S B SEHGAL, “A Text Book of Soil Mechanics”, CBS Publishers &
Distributors
 WAYNE C.TENG, “Foundation Design”, Prentice Hall of India ( P ) Ltd.,
182 | P a g e
21073 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
( ELECTIVE THEORY I )
PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15
1 Define : Cohesive soil

2 Define : Shrinkage limit
3 Define : Void ratio
4 What do you mean by co-efficient of permeability ?
5 Define : Shear strength of soil
6 What is consolidation ?
7 What is meant by soil exploration ?
8 Define : Boring log
9 Define : Hydraulic gradient
10 What is flow net ?
11 Define : Bearing capacity of soil
12 State any two causes for the settlement of foundation
13 Define : Shallow foundation
14 Define : Friction pile
15 What is “CNS” concept ?
16 What is under reamed pile foundations ?
17 Define : Natural frequency
18 State any two assumptions made in Pauw’s method
19 What are the forces acting on the transmission line towers ?
20 State the stability conditions to check the stability of tower foundations
183 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21.A ) i .Write short notes on soil formation

ii.Explain how the water content in soil is determined by oven drying method ?
OR
B) i. Explain with neat sketch that the ‘soil mass has a three phase system’
ii. Define “ Permeability.” Explain with neat sketch any one method to determine
the co-efficient of permeability of soil
22 A) i. Explain the purpose and method of unconfined compression test

ii.Describe the Mohr’s - Coulomb failure theory
OR
B) i .What are the objects of soil exploration ?
ii.Explain with neat sketches any two types of soil samplers
23 A) i.Write short notes on quick sand conditions

ii.Draw the different types of seepage flow nets below hydraulic structures
OR
B) i.Explain the different types of shear failures of soil.
ii.Explain how the plate load test is carried out to determine the bearing capacity of soil ?
24 A) i.Briefly describe about the foundation on reclaimed soil

ii.What do you mean by pile driving ? Explain how it is to be carried out in the field ?
OR
B) i.Describe free swell test
ii. What are the remedial measures to be carried out for cracked buildings ?
25 A) i.Distinguish between free and forced vibrations

ii.What are the design criteria for design of foundation for impact type machine
as per IS code ?
OR
B) i.State the general design criteria for the foundations of transmission line towers
ii.Explain with neat sketches any two types of foundations for the construction of
transmission line towers
184 | P a g e
21073 SOIL MECHANICS AND FOUNDATION ENGINEERING
PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15
1 Differentiate unit weight and density of soil

2 Define : Degree of saturation
3 Define : Darcy’s law
4 What do you mean by quick sand conditions ?
5 Define : Optimum moisture content
6 State any two necessities for the classification of soil
7 Mention any two objects of soil stabilizations
8 What is SPT value ?
9 State the different types of flow of fluids
10 List two uses of flow nets
11 Define : Safe Bearing capacity of soil
12 What is punching shear failure ?
13 State any two uses of pile foundations
14 Define : Deep foundations
15 What is swelling pressure ?
16 Mention any two methods of foundations on expansive soil
17 What is damping ?
18 What is frequency ratio ?
19 What are the factors to be considered in the choice of tower foundation?
20 What are the two cases for which the tower foundation are to be checked?
185 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21 A) i.Define : Liquidity index and Plasticity index
ii.Explain the liquid limit test on soil with neat sketch
OR
B) i.Explain how the plastic limit of soil is determined in the laboratory
ii.Explain in detail the factors affecting the permeability of soil
22 A) i.Compare compaction and consolidation of soil

ii.Explain with neat sketch the standard Proctor’s compaction test to determine the
density of soil
OR
B) i.Write short notes on disturbed and undisturbed soil samples
ii. Explain with neat sketch any one type of geophysical method of soil exploration
23 A) i.State the different properties of flow nets

ii.Explain how the uplift pressure and exit gradient are calculated by using Khosla’s
theory
OR
B) i.What are the factors affecting the bearing capacity of soil ?
ii.What are the assumptions and limitations of Terzaghi’s analysis on bearing
capacity of soil
24 A) i.Explain with neat sketch the negative skin friction

ii.Explain how the pile load test is carried out to determine the bearing capacity of piles ?
OR
B) i.Explain how the expansive soils are identified ?
ii.Explain with neat sketch about the under reamed pile foundation
25 A) i. What are the general requirements for machine foundations

ii.Briefly describe the resonance method and wave velocity method for dynamic
investigation of soil at the site
OR
B) i.Give the necessary information required for the design and conastruction of transmission
line tower foundation
ii.Explain how is the safety of a tower foundation checked against Uplift and overturning
186 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT

187 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT ( ELECTIVE THEORY I )
Marks
WATER Internal Board
Total
RESOURCES 5 Hrs 80 Hrs Assessment Examination
MANAGEMENT 25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand water resource potential in India and need for water resource management .
 To understand the components of hydrological cycle and hydrograph.
 To understand the occurrence of ground water and ground water exploration methods.
 To understand the ground water basin management concept.
 To study the classification of rivers and river training works.
 To know the different types of storage works and dam structures.
 To understand the distribution system of canals and management of canal irrigation.
 To understand the concept of water shed management including GIS approach.
 To study the types of detention basins and reclamation of water logged lands.
188 | P a g e
21074 WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT ( ELECTIVE THEORY I )
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Contents: Theory
Unit Hours
Name of the Topic
I 1.1 INTRODUCTION 14Hrs

Water resources – world water inventory - Importance of water
resources - Necessity for conservation and development of water
resources – water resources of India - water resources management -
purpose - factors involved in water resources management.
1.2 HYDROLOGY
Introduction – Definition -Application of Hydrology in engineering -
Hydrological cycle - Precipitation – forms of Precipitation -
measurements of rain fall - Rain gauge - types of rain gauges - rain
gauge network – mean rainfall over a drainage basin – methods -
Radar and Satellite Measurements of rainfall - runoff - Estimation of
runoff - losses – Hydrograph – Unit Hydrograph - uses
II 2.1 GROUND WATER 14Hrs

Ground water resources- zones of Ground water-Aquifer - types- terms
used –porosity, permeability, yield, specific yield, specific retention,
coefficient of storage, specific capacity – Darcy’s law- measurement of
yield of well -pumping test- recuperation test-ground water exploration –
geo physical methods -Electrical resistivity method – seismic resistivity
method- logs.
2.2 MANAGEMENT OF GROUND WATER

Concept of basin management - Ground water basin investigations -
data collection and field work -mining yield - perennial yield - salt balance
- basin management by conjunctive use - artificial recharge of Ground
water - recharge methods.
III 3.1 RIVERS AND RIVER TRAINING WORKS 14Hrs

Classification of river - Major rivers in India and Tamil Nadu - Inter
linking of rivers in India and its importance – flood - flood forecasting -
flood control in India. River training - objectives of river training -
classification of river training - methods of river training – levees -
guide banks – spurs – types - artificial cut-offs – launching apron -
pitching of banks - pitched islands - miscellaneous methods.
189 | P a g e
Unit Hours
Name of the Topic
3.2 STORAGE WORKS

Surface storage - purpose of surface storage – tanks – types - tank
weirs – tank outlet – reservoirs – types - storage capacity of reservoir -
methods of determination of storage capacity of reservoir – reservoir
losses – dams - classification of dams - selection of dam site - Earth
dams – types - methods of construction- causes of failure of earth dam -
remedial measures – spillway - types - spillway crest gates-types –
sluiceway - types.
IV 4.1 DISTRIBUTION WORKS

Irrigation Canal - Typical cross section of canal - components of canal
section - classification of canal -alignment of canal - canal head works –
types - components of diversion head works - cross drainage works –
types - canal losses - lining of canal – necessity - types of lining.
4.2 MANAGEMENT OF CANAL IRRIGATION
Canal irrigation system - Need for canal irrigation management -
objectives of canal irrigation management - methods of improving canal 14Hrs
irrigation management - cropping pattern - need for crop rotation - crop
water requirement - water delivery system - irrigation scheduling -
frequency of irrigation - optimum use of irrigation water - irrigation
efficiencies - conservation of water on the field - farmer’s participation -
irrigation manager.
V 5.1 WATER SHED MANAGEMENT

14Hrs
Water shed - classification of water sheds - integrated approach for
water shed management - role of remote sensing and GIS in water shed
management - soil and water conservation – Necessity - soil erosion –
causes - effects – remedial measures against erosion - contour bunding
- strip cropping - bench terracing – check dams - vegetated water way –
afforestation - crop residue - land drainage - surface drains - sub surface
drains.
5.2 WATER HARVESTING AND RECYCLING

water harvesting - runoff collection - onsite detention basin - ponds -
types - Seepage control – methods -evaporation control - Recycling of
harvested water - waste water recharge for reuse – methods - water
logging - remedial measures - soil reclamation
REVISION AND TEST

10 Hrs
190 | P a g e
Reference Book :
 Santhosh Kumar Garg, Hydrology and water resources engineering, khanna

publishers,Delhi.
 G.L.Asawa,Irrigation and Water Resources Engineering ,New age international(p)
ltd.,publishers, New Delhi.
 David Keith Todd.,Ground water Hydrology,John wiley &sons,Singapore.
 Dilip Kumar Majumdar, Irrigation water management - Principles and Practice, PHI
Pvt.Ltd.NewDelhi-1.
 Madan Mohan Das&Mimi Das Saikia, Irrigation and water power Engineering,PHI learning
pvt. Ltd., NewDelhi-1
 K.Subramanya, Engineering hydrology,Tata McGraw-Hill publishing company ltd.,New
Delhi.
191 | P a g e
21074 WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15
1. State the importance of water resources.

2. State the factors involved in water resources management.
3. Define hydrology.
4. State any two uses of unit hydrograph.
5. Define Darcy’s law.
6. Define aquifer.
7. State any two methods of artificial recharge.
8. State the levels of study in ground water basin investigation.
9. Name any four major rivers in India.
10. What are the methods of river training?
11. What is a storage work?
12. Name the reservoir losses.
13. State the classification of canals.
14. State the different types of cross drainage works.
15. Define crop rotation.
16. State any two methods of improving canal irrigation management.
17. Define water shed.
18. State the causes of soil erosion.
19. State the types of pond.
20. Define water harvesting.
192 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21. (A) i) Write short notes on world water inventory.

ii) State the necessity for conserving water resources.
OR
(B) Explain the different types of rain gauges with neat sketches and also state their merits and
demerits.
22. (A) i) How do you measure the yield of a well?
ii) Briefly explain the types of aquifers.
OR
(B) Explain the methods of artificial recharge in detail.
23. (A) i) With neat sketches, explain the various types of spurs.
ii) State the objectives of river training works.
OR
(B) With neat sketches, explain the causes of failure of earth dam and suggest suitable
remedial measures.
24. (A) i) Explain different types of cross drainage works with sketches.
ii) Explain any three types of canal lining.
OR
(B) Explain the various methods of improving canal irrigation management.
25. (A) i) Explain contour bunding and bench terracing.

ii) Explain surface and sub surface drains.
OR
(B) i) Write short notes on water logging and soil reclamation.
ii) Explain the types of ponds
193 | P a g e
21074 WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT ( ELECTIVE THEORY I )

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15
1. Name any two surface water sources.

2. Why do you need to conserve water resources?
3. Define runoff.
4. State the methods to find mean rainfall over a drainage basin.
5. Define permeability.
6. State any two methods of ground water exploration.
7. Define mining yield.
8. State the concept of basin management.
9. What do you mean by interlinking of rivers?
10. What are pitched islands?
11. Name the types of earth dams.
12. State any two types of spillway crest gates.
13.Mention the canal losses.
14. State the necessity of lining of canal.
15. State the objective of canal irrigation management.
16. Define frequency of irrigation.
17. Define water shed management.
18. How are watersheds classified?
19. Define water logging.
20. State any two methods of seepage control.
194 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21. (A) i) Write short notes on water resources management.

ii) Write about water resource potential in India.
OR
(B) i) Explain the various components of a hydrological cycle with a neat sketch.
ii) Explain any two methods of estimation of runoff.
22. (A) Explain the geophysical methods of ground water exploration in detail.
OR
(B) i) Describe the data to be collected in a ground water basin investigation.
ii) Write short notes on basin management by conjunctive use.
23. (A) Explain the different methods of river training.

OR
(B) i) How will you compute reservoir capacity from mass diagram?
ii) What are the points to be considered in the selection of a dam site?
24. (A) i) Draw the typical cross section of canal and explain its components.
ii) Explain the classification of canals based on their alignment.
OR
(B) i) Write short notes on farmer’s participation in irrigation management.
ii) Explain irrigation scheduling.
25. (A) i) Describe the role of remote sensing and GIS in water shed management.
ii) Mention the effects of soil erosion.
OR
(B) i) Explain the methods of waste water recharge for reuse.
ii) Write short notes on evaporation control.
195 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING II

196 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING II
Marks
Internal Board
Total
CIVIL ENGINEERING Assessment Examination
6Hrs 96 Hrs
DRAWING II
25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
On completion of the course, the student will be :
 Able to Prepare Public Health Engineering Drawing

 Able to Prepare Bridge Drawing
 Able to Prepare Structural Engineering Drawing With Bar Bending schedule.
197 | P a g e
21054 CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING II
LIST OF DRAWINGS
PUBLIC HEALTH ENGINEERING DRAWING 24 Hours

1. Infiltration gallery (with one infiltration well, one straight gallery pipe, one inspection well and
one jack well)
2. Rapid Sand Filter
3. Septic Tank with dispersion Trench / Soak pit
4. Bio gas plant with floating type
BRIDGE DRAWING 18 Hours

5. R.C.C Slab Culvert with splayed wing walls
6. Two span Pipe Culvert
7. Two span Tee Beam Bridge with square returns.
STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING DRAWING WITH BAR BENDING SCHEDULE 42 Hours

8. Simply supported one-way slab
9. Simply supported two-way slab
10. Restrained two-way slab
11. Singly reinforced Simply supported beam
12. Doubly reinforced Continuous beam with two spans
13. Tee Beams supporting continuous slab
14. Dog-legged staircase
15. Lintel cum Sunshade
16. R.C.C Column with square Isolated footing
17. Steel Beam to Steel Column Connection – Seat angle and Web angle Connections.
18. Steel Beam to Steel Beam Connections – Web to Web connections.
REFERENCE:
1. Drawing manual - T.T.T.I – Chand & Co.

2. Structural Drawing and Detailing - Krishnamoorthy
198 | P a g e

N.B. 1. Answer any One Question in the drawing sheet supplied.

2. The Drawing should be drawn using pencil and drawing Instruments to scale.
3. Any data, not given may be assumed suitably and should be indicated in the drawing.
I. The following data refer to a rapid sand fillter unit:
Size of unit :7500x5000mm

Size of inlet chamber :1000x5000mm
Thickness of wall at top :450 mm
Thickness of wall at bottom :600 mm
Thickness of foundation concrete 1:4:8 :450 mm
Diameter of manifolds :400 mm
Diameter of laterals :100 mm
Spacing of laterals :300 mm c/c
Slope of laterals :1 in 50
Rakers-50 mm dia. at :300 mm c/c
Raw water inlet :300 mm dia
Size of wash water troughs :300x400 mm
Number of troughs :2
Bottom of trough above sand bed :450 mm
Free board :500 mm
Wash water drain pipe :800 mm dia.
Draw to a suitable scale the following views:

a. Plan of filter unit showing the drainage system. (30)
b. Cross-section of filter unit showing the filter media and wash water through. (15)
c. Longitudinal section of filter unit showing the under drainage system regulating
arrangements and back wash. (25)
d. Neatness, scale, details. (5)
199 | P a g e
II. The following are the details of a doubly reinforced partially fixed beam:
Clear span :6m

Width of support :300mm
Size of beam :300mmx700mm
Reinforcement details:
Tension reinforecement : 5 No. of 20 mm dia. Fe 415 steel bars
Compression reinforecement : 4 No. of 16 mm dia. Fe 415 steel bars.
Both tension and compression reinforcement are placed at an effective cover of 40 mm.
Shear reinforecement :
Use 8 mm dia. 2 legged stirrups of fe 415 steel at 150 mm c/c up to a distance of 1000 mm from
the edges of the support s on both sides. beyond this point provide these stirrups at 300 mm c/c.
Use standard curtailment procedures.
Assume any data required suitably.
a. Draw to a suitable scale

i. The longitudinal section of the beam. (20)
ii. The cross section of the beam at mid span. (10)
iii. The cross section of the beam at support. (10)
iv. The top and bottom plan of reinforcement. (15)
b. Prepare a bar bending schedule. (20)
200 | P a g e

N.B. 1. Answer One Question either I or II. in the drawing sheet supplied.
2. The Drawing should be drawn using pencil and drawing Instruments to scale.
3. Any data, not given may be assumed suitably and should be indicated in the drawing.
I. The details of a column with square footings are given below :
Column details:
Size of column :300mm x 300mm.
ongitudinal steel :4 no. 22 Φ RTS & 4 No. 16 Φ RTS
Ties :8 mm Φ MS @ 200 mm c/c
Clear cover :40 mm
Height of column above ground level :4 m
Footing detials:
Size of footing :1.2m x 1.2m
Thickness of footing at the edges :200 mm
Thickness at the junction with column :500 mm
Bottom cover : 50 mm
Cover at the sides : 75 mm
Steel: 16 mm Φ RTS- 9 No. In each direction.
Draw to a suitable scale the following views:

a. Plan of the footing showing details of reinforcements. (20)
b. Plan of the column with reinforcement details. (15)
c. Sectional view of the column with footing. (20)
d. Bar bending schedule. (20)
201 | P a g e
II. Draw The following views of an infiltration gallery for a town from a river nearby, from the
particulars given below:
a. General layout of the scheme showing galleries, manhole wells, infiltration wells,
pump house, etc., (not to scale) (15)
b. Longitudinal section of infiltration well, one straight gallery,
one inspection well and one jack well. (25)
c. Plan of the above. (25)
d. Cross sectional details of the gallery. (10)
River bed level : +100.00m

Maximum flood level (MFL) : +102.00m
Lowest summer water level (LSWL) : +98.00m
Bottom of gallery : +95.30m
Sill level of pipes : +95.45m
Diameter of S.W. pipe : 400 mm Φ - 1 No.
Length of gallery (total) : 300 m
Length of one gallery : 60.0m
River bank level : +103.20m
Width of gallery : 2.4m
Diameter of well
Inner : Φ 3.60 m
Outer : Φ 4.50 m
Pump house-cum-collecting well
Inner diameter : 6 m
Outer diameter : 6.90 m
Bottom of pump house : +94.70m
Floor level of pump house : +102.20m
Roof level : +106.00m.
202 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
CONSTRUCTION PRACTICE LAB

203 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : CONSTRUCTION PRACTICE LAB
Marks
Internal Board
Total
CONSTRUCTION LAB Assessment Examination
3 Hrs 48 Hrs
PRACTICE
25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
 To Prepare centre line plan and foundation plan for a building.

 For Setting out foundation in the field for spread footing and column footing for a building.
 To determine the Workability of concrete by Compacting factor, slump cone test and Vee –
Bee consistometer test.
 To cast Concrete cubes and to test for compressive strength.
 To determine the fineness Modulus of fine and coarse aggregate.
 For Shape test on coarse aggregate.
 To determine the bulking characteristics of the given sand.
 For Non - Destructive test on hardened concrete.
ALLOCATION OF MARKS
PART A 20 marks
PART B 50 marks
VIVA VOCE 05 marks
RECORD 25 marks
Total 100 Marks
204 | P a g e
21055 CONSTRUCTION LAB PRACTICE
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
PART A 21 Hours
1. Prepare and develop a centre line plan and foundation Plan for a given line sketch of a
building.
2. Setting out spread footing foundation in the field for a given line plan of a building.
3. Setting the layout of columns and footing foundation in the field for a given line plan of a
building (Framed structure).
4. Arrangement of bricks using English bond for one brick thick wall and one and half brick
thick wall for right angled corner junction.
5. Arrangement of bricks using English Bond for one brick thick wall, one and half brick thick
wall for Tee junction.
6. Arrangement of bricks using English bond for one brick thick, one and half and two brick
thick square pillars.
7. Cutting, hooking, cranking and arrangement of reinforcement for:
a Beam
b Lintel and sunshade
c Column and footing
PART B 21 Hours
8. Determination of workability of concrete by slump cone test.
9. Determination of workability of concrete by compaction factor test.
10. Casting of concrete cube and compression test on concrete cube.
11. Determination of Fineness Modulus of fine aggregate sample and plot a particle size
distribution curve and also find the effective size and uniformity co-efficient.
12. Determination of Fineness Modulus of coarse aggregate sample and plot a particle size
distribution curve and also find the effective size and uniformity co-efficient.
13. Vee- Bee Consistometer Test on concrete.
14. Non Destructive Test on concrete - Rebound Hammer Test.
15. Determination of bulking characteristics of the given sand sample .
16. Shape Test for Coarse aggregate.
a. Flakiness Index test
b. Elongation Index test
c. Angularity number test
PART C 6 Hours
17. Study of other Non Destructive Test on hardened concrete ( Not for exams):
i. Ultra sonic pulse velocity test
ii. Concrete core Extraction.
205 | P a g e
21055 CONSTRUCTION LAB PRACTICE

1. (a) Draw the centre line sketch and the foundation trench plan for the load bearing wall type
residence shown in the plan. Sketches are to be drawn in the answer book with pencil and
straight edge, but need not be to scale.(A plan of a small residential building with at least
three rooms shall be given) (20marks)
(b) Determine the fineness modulus of the given sample of sand by sieve analysis. Draw the
particle size distribution curve and find the effective size and uniformity co efficient of the
sample. (50marks)
2. (a) Set out the foundation plan on the field for the given line plan of the building (A line sketch of
a small building with two or three rooms, with foundation details shall be given) (20marks)
(b) Determine the fineness modulus of the given coarse aggregate by sieve analysis. Draw the
particle size distribution curve and find the effective size and uniformity co efficient of the
sample. (50marks)
3. (a) Set the layout of columns of the building shown in the sketch, on the field, marking the
footing of at least one column.(A line sketch or plan of a small school building with at least
eight columns in two straight rows(4+4) shall be given mentioning the size of footing.
(20marks)
(b) Draw the bulking characteristic curve for the given sand and find the maximum bulkage
and the corresponding moisture content . (50marks)
4. (a) Arrange a layer of bricks by English bond for the corner junction of a 1½ brick thick wall
(20marks)
(b) Conduct slump cone test for 1:2:4 mix concrete with w/c ratios 0.55, 0.60 and 0.70 and draw
a curve “w/c ratio vs slump. From the graph find the w/c ratio required to produce a slump of
75 mm. (50marks)
5. (a) Arrange two consecutive layers of bricks by English bond for the Tee- junction of a 1 brick
thick wall (20marks)
(b) Conduct compaction factor test on 1:2:3 mix concrete with w/c ratios 0.55,0.60 and 0.70 and
draw a curve “w/c ratio vs compaction factor. Find, from the graph, the w/c ratio required to
have a compaction factor 0.95. (50marks)
6. (a) Arrange two consecutive layers of bricks by English bond for the 1½ brick size square pillar
(20marks)
(b) Conduct a Vee-Bee test on 1:2:4 mix concrete with at least three w/c ratios and draw a graph
w/c ratio vs Vee Bee time. (50marks)
206 | P a g e
7. (a) Bend a stirrup for a 230mmx150mm overall size lintel using 6mm dia mild steel bar.
(20marks)
(b) Conduct sieve analysis on the given coarse aggregate using standard set of sieves and
determine the Flakiness index and Elongation index of the aggregate. (50marks)
8. (a) Bend a 450 crank on the given 8mm dia deformed steel bar. (20marks)
(b) (i) Conduct a Rebound Hammer test on the surface of a hardened concrete element and find
its rebound index, and hence determine its compressive strength. (25marks)
(ii) Determine the Angularity number of the given coarse aggregate sample. (25marks)
9. (a) The model of a simply supported rectangular beam of total length 2metres,overall size
150mmx200mm, has 2#10mm dia bars at top and 3#12mm dia bars at bottom. 6mm dia
stirrups are provided at 200mm c/c. Fabricate the reinforcement for the beam using the
given binding wires.(All bars and stirrups of required length and size shall be provided)
(20marks)
(b)(i) Cast a 150mm size concrete cube using 1:1½:3 concrete mix with standard compaction.
(25marks)
(ii) Conduct a compression test on the already cured concrete cube and find out its ultimate
compressive strength. (25marks)
207 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
CAD IN CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING II

208 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : CAD IN CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING II
Marks
CAD IN CIVIL Internal Board
Total
6 Hrs 96 Hrs
DRAWING PRACTICE
II 25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
 To prepare Public Health Engineering drawings using CAD

 To know about RCC and Steel bridge structures and draw views using CAD
 To understand and draft structural Engineering drawings using CAD
ALLOCATION OF MARKS
In Board examination, questions will be chosen as follows

By lot one question
Plan / Elevation - 40 marks
Cross section / longitudinal section - 30 marks
Viva – voce - 5 marks
Record works - 25 marks
Total - 100 marks
209 | P a g e
21056 CAD IN CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING PRACTICE II
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
PREPARATION OF DRAWINGS USING CAD SOFTWARE
I PUBLIC HEALTH ENGINEERING 18 Hours

Draw plan and sectional views of the following
1. Rapid Sand Filter
2. Septic Tank with dispersion Trench / Soak pit
3. R.C.C square overhead tank supported by four columns
II BRIDGE DRAWING 18 Hours

Draw plan and sectional views of the following
4. R.C.C Slab Culvert with splayed wing walls
5. Steel Foot over bridge across a highway
6. Two span Tee Beam Bridge with square returns
III STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING 50 Hours

Draw plan, cross section and longitudinal section
7. Continuous one-way slab ( with three equal spans )
9. Singly reinforced rectangular beam
10. Doubly reinforced Continuous beam ( with two equal spans )
11. Tee Beams supporting continuous slab
12. Lintel and Sunshade
14. R.C.C. Column with square isolated footings
15 Steel Beam to Steel Column connections – Seat angle and Web angle connections.
16. Steel Beam to Steel Beam connections – Web to Web connections.
210 | P a g e
ALLOCATION OF MARKS
In Board examination, questions will be chosen as follows

By lot one question
Plan / Elevation - 40 marks
Cross section / longitudinal section - 30 marks
Viva – voce - 5 marks
Total - 100 marks
Note:
1. For all the drawings, detailed specifications shall be given. Designs are not to be included in the
examinations. The drawings must include Layout plans, full plan, sections, etc., as applicable to
each topic.
2. For all the drawings, detailed specifications shall be given and students should draw free hand
sketch in the observation book based on the given specifications. The drawings to be drawn
using computer and CAD Software.
3. In examination any one of drawings 1 to 16 can be asked by lot.
211 | P a g e
21056 CAD IN CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING PRACTICE II

Prepare drawings using CAD software
( Any one by lot )
1. Draw the *specified views of rapid sand filter for the given detailed specification
2. Draw the *specified views of septic tank with dispersion trench for the given detailed
specification
3. Draw the *specified views of septic tank with soak pit for the given detailed specification
4. Draw the *specified views of R.C.C square overhead tank supported by four columns for the
given detailed specification
5. Draw the *specified views of R.C.C slab culvert with splayed using walls for the given
detailed specification
6. Draw the 8specified views of steel foot over bridge across a highway for the given detailed
specification
7. Draw the *specified views of two span Tee beam bridge with square returns for the given
detailed specification
8. Draw the *specified views for a continuous one-way slab with given details
9. Draw the *specified views for a simply supported two-way slab with given details
10. Draw the *specified views for singly reinforced rectangular beam with given details
11. Draw the *specified views for doubly reinforced beam with given details
12. Draw the *specified views for TEE beams supporting continuous slab with given details
13. Draw the *specified views for lintel cum sunshade with given details
14. Draw the *specified views for dog legged staircase with given details
15. Draw the *specified views of R.C.C column with square isolated footing with given details
16. Draw the details of seat angle connection between a steel column and steel beam of given
details
17 Draw the details of framed connection between the webs of a steel column and steel beam
of given details.
18. Draw the details of the web angle connection of webs of two steel beams of given details.
*Specified view means ( Plan / Elevation/ Longitudinal section/ Cross section/etc) Any two view depending
upon the drawing may be specified in the question paper.
212 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
COMMUNICATION AND LIFE SKILLS PRACTICAL

213 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : COMMUNICATION AND LIFE SKILLS PRACTICAL
Marks
COMMUNICATION Internal Board
Total
AND LIFE SKILLS 4 Hrs 64 Hrs Assessment Examination
PRACTICAL 25 75 100 3 Hrs
TOPICS AND ALLOCATION OF HOURS:
Sl. No. Section No. of Hours
1 Part-A:Monodic Communication 16
2 Part-B:Dyadic Communication 16
3 Part-C:Professional Communication 16
4 Part-D:Life Skills 16
Total 64
214 | P a g e
RATIONALE
Nowadays, effective and error free communication is a basic need. Communication through English
is the order of the day for entry and survival in any corporate. Training in Monodic communication
(one man communication) Dyadic communication (a pair communication) and Professional
communication (may be Monodic, Dyadic or Group communication) is attempted through these
practical modules. One can improve one’s communication skills by enriching one’s vocabulary
,particularly active vocabulary and standard everyday expressions and using them in various
contexts. Practice alone, both on the campus and outside the campus, can help a learner to grow
proficient in the art of Communication.
Language is the most commonly used and effective medium of self-expression in all spheres of
human life - personal, social and professional. A student must have a fair knowledge of English
language use and various communicative functions. He/she must be able to pursue the present
course of study and handle the future jobs in industry. The objective of the course is to assist the
diploma holders to acquire proficiency in monodic, dyadic and professional communication skills
and selective but most important life skills. At the end of the course, the student will be able to
communicate his ideas fearfree and errorfree, in social and professional spheres of life and imbibe
life skills.
SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

Communication is crucial as it influences every aspect of one’s personal development. Having a
sound grounding in reading and writing techniques allows a student to progress on to higher level
literacy skills. Many students struggle because their basic decoding is so inaccurate that advanced
comprehension is difficult for them. Because of their poor exposure and poor use of English
language in various spheres of life they suffer proper communication. They also tend to be ‘afraid’
of words and in turn they are not able to develop their personal vocabulary. In otherwords, without
solid literacy skills, the student’s prospects and life chances are limited. It is a fact that
Communication skills and Life Skills shapes one’s personality.
MONODIC COMMUNICATION
The student is able to:
1. Practice using departmental words and terminology in sentences.

2. Prepare and perform oral presentations.
3. Introduce oneself and others.
4. Deliver welcome address and vote of thanks.
5. Compare a program.
6. Describe the visuals.
7. Take notes, answer very short questions.
8. Comprehend an auditory/oral passage.
215 | P a g e
DYADIC COMMUNICATION
1. Adopt various communicative functions.

2. Prepare and perform a dialogue.
3. Adopt the basics of telephone etiquette.
PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICAITON
1. Prepare a resume.
2. Take part in a group discussion.
3. Communicate through body language.
4. Adopt the interview skills with professional presence.
5. Perform mock interview.
LIFE SKILLS
1. Prepare for and deal with change.

2. Adopt motivation, goal-setting and self-esteem.
3. Adopt Teamwork skills.
4. Adopt Time management.
5. Adopt Emotional intelligence skills.
6. Assert Positively.
7. Adopt Interview etiquette.
8. Plan career.
Understand Strength, weakness (long term, short term).
216 | P a g e
LEARNING STRUCTURE
To enable the students to practise monodic communication, dyadic communication professional

communication and imbibe life skills through various modes of practical learning and assignments.
PROCEDURE MONODIC DYADIC PROFESSIONAL LIFE SKILLS

COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION
Exposure to
Exposure to
dialogue situations, Exposure to selective life
Identifying various exposure to resume writing,
PRINCIPLES skills/problem
platforms telephone group discussion, solving skills.
etiquette. interviews.
Understanding the
basic Writing resume,
Imbibe and
Sharing opinions, communicative performing group
practise the
feeling, with or functions. discussion, facing
selective life skills.
without audience. Conversing with a interviews.
CONCEPTS neighbour
Oral presentation,
art of introduction,
Stories,
enhancing the list FAQ, Resume
Audio tapes, anecdotes,
of active models, Audio
compact disk, incidences, case
FACTS vocabulary, tapes, compact
mikes, various studies and
listening skills, note disk, mikes.
contexts. assignments.
taking skills,
describing skills.
217 | P a g e
20002 COMMUNICATION AND LIFE SKILLS PRACTICAL
SYLLABUS
PART A: MONODIC COMMUNICATION (16 hours/ periods)
a) Vocabulary enrichment: recording important words and terminology alphabetically

connected to the concerned department – playing antakshari.
b) Introducing oneself: using greeting phrases – opening and closing with courteous notes –
supplying personal information.
c) Introducing others: using greeting phrases – opening and closing with courteous notes –
with information.
d) Welcome address, vote of thanks and compering a program: keeping notes – and
personal information of the dignitaries – concerned.
e) Making an Oral Presentation: Preparing the presentation - Talking about people, animals
and places – Keywords technique and the rehearsal – Presentation outline – Performing the
presentation – answering the questions.
f) Oral description: a picture from an English magazine – a visual ad – a natural scene.
g) Auditory/Oral comprehension – small passage – small dialogue -very short story – note -
taking skill.
h) News Caption: giving caption for a news item from an English daily.
PART B: DYADIC COMMUNICATION: COMMUNICATIVE FUNCTIONS (16 hours/ periods)
a) Dialogue: preparing and performing - Meeting people, exchanging greetings and taking
leave – Giving instructions and seeking clarifications – Thanking someone and responding
to thanks - minimum seven exchanges including the courteous openings and closings – ten
common contexts.
b) Telephonic dialogue: telephonic etiquette - Answering the telephone and asking for
someone – Dealing with a wrong number – Taking and leaving messages – Making
enquiries on the phone-ordering for supply-bookings and arrangements-handling the
complaints – calling for appointment.
218 | P a g e
PART C: PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION (16 hours/ periods)
a) Group Discussion - Taking part in a Group Discussion – focus on team spirit.

b) Interview - Frequently asked questions in an interview – Mock interview - Body language.
c) Resume Writing – components.
PART D: LIFE SKILLS (16 hours/ periods)

a) Preparing for and dealing with change.
b) Motivation, goal-setting and self-esteem.
c) Teamwork skills.
d) Time management
e) Emotional intelligence skills
f) Career planning.
g) Assertive Skills.
h) Interview skills.
References :-
1) Malcolm Goodale, Professional Presentations with VCD, Cambridge University Press
2) B.Jean Naterop and Rod Revell, Telephoning in English with 2 Audio CDs Cambridge
University Press
3) Priyadarshi Patnaik, Group Discussion and Interview Skills with VCD, Cambridge University
Press
4) Kamalesh Sadanand and Susheela Punitha, Spoken English: A Foundation Course for
Speakers of Tamil, Orient BlackSwan.
5) S. P. Dhanavel, English and Soft Skills, Orient BlackSwan
6) Robert Sherfield and et al, Developing Soft Skills, Pearson Education.
7) Poly Skills: A course in communication skills and Life skills, Cambridge University Press.
8) English and Communication Skills for Students of science and Engineering by S.P.Dhanavel
, Orient BlackSwan.
9) Speak Well, edited by Kandula Nirupa Rani, Jayashree and Indira,OrientBlackSwan.
Fifty ways to improve your telephoning and teleconferencing Skills by Ken Taylor
219 | P a g e
Model Question Paper - 1
Time: 3 hrs Max Marks: 75
PART –A (35 Marks)

Monodic Communication:
1. Introduce one self (5)
2. Use the mentioned words orally in sentence (2x2 ½ =5)
3. Prepare and present a welcome address for your college annual day programme. (5)
4. Listen to the passage read out from the English daily of the week of the examination. Please
note: No prerecorded passage (10)
5. Write a news caption for the passage given from the English daily. (5)
6. a) Describe orally the visual or the picture found in the English daily of the week of the
examination. (5)
(Or)
b) Make an oral presentation about an animal.
PART – B (15 Marks)

Dyadic Communication:
1. Play antakshari of five pairs of departmental words with your partner. (5)
2. Prepare and perform a dialogue with your partner on the given situation (10)
(minimum seven exchanges)
Or
Prepare and perform a telephonic dialogue on a flight booking.
PART-C (25 Marks)

Professional Communication:
1. Form a group of six members and perform a discussion on the given theme. (10)
2. Imagine you are V.Gokulraj ,a diploma holder. Prepare a resume for the post of supervisor in
Oberoi computers Ltd.Chennai. (10)
Professional appearance: Interview etiquette-dress code- Body language (5)
220 | P a g e
Model Question Paper - 2
Time: 3 hrs Max Marks: 75
PART –A (35 Marks)

Monodic Communication:
1. Introduce your friend S.Mohan an a excutive engineer to a group of audience. (5)
2. Use the mentioned words in sentence orally. (2x2 ½ =5)
3. Prepare and present a Vote of thanks in your college sports day programme. (5)
4. Listen to the passage read out from the English daily of the week of the examination.
Please note: No prerecorded passage (10)
5. Write a news caption for the passage given from the English daily. (5)
6. a) Describe the visual or the picture found in the English daily of the week of the conduct of
the examination. (5)
(Or)
b) Make an oral presentation about your polytechnic college.
PART – B (15 Marks)
Dyadic Communication:
1. Play antakshari of five pairs of your departmental words with your partner. (5)
2. Prepare and perform a dialogue with your partner on the given situation (10)
(Or)
Prepare and perform a telephonic dialogue on ordering the supply of a computer
PART-C (25 Marks)
Professional Communication:
1.Form a group of six members and perform a discussion on the given theme. (10)
3. Imagine you are M.Kishore a diploma holder. Prepare a resume for the post of operating
engineer in REC Electricals Ltd.Madurai. ( 10)
Professional appearance: Interview etiquette-dress code- Body language (5)
221 | P a g e
NOTES OF GUIDANCE
Role of the media:
To equip a learner with vocabulary, particularly active vocabulary and standard everyday
expressions ,using English dailies and watching selective English T.V. channels both in the
classroom and outside the classroom is focused. Such a provision is recommended for the students
to establish familiarity with the English dailies and selective English T.V. channels.
Minimum two copies of two English dailies in the laboratory room (students can bring their own
copies also).Minimum two systems with net connection for information collection in the laboratory
itself.
Synopsis of the news item:

During every lab work day, students must choose a news item from the English daily or
weekly or monthly, and write a synopsis of the chosen news item, in not more than five lines. The
news item should be pasted on the left page and synopsis on the right page (the chosen news item
should not be politically, socially or communally controversial). Students should exercise care in
choosing the news items. Teachers have to advise them on this aspect. This can be done outside
the class hours also but every record exercise should begin with the synopsis of news item of the
date of the lab session.
For example, first lab exercise namely departmental vocabulary and antakshari is
performed on 15/12/2011. The student should choose a news item from any English daily of
15/10/2011 and record the synopsis on the right page (in not more than 5 lines) under the caption
Synopsis of the news item of the day/date 15/10/2011.There is no harm in repeating or copying
the lines form the passage. The essence of the passage should be there. The cutout news item for
presenting the synopsis should be pasted on the left page of the record notebook.
This is to be done with interest for developing one’s personality. This work does not carry
any marks but without which the record exercise should not be valued. This is the precondition for
valuing the record exercise. Each record exercise follows the synopsis of the chosen news item.
At the bottom of the synopsis, the student should record the dictionary meaning of atleast
one strange word found in the chosen news item. At the end of every month, a minimum of 10
Headlines of 10 different days i.e. one Headline a day from anyone English daily should be pasted
on the right or left page of the Record Note Book. (This work does not carry marks but this is the
precondition for marking the record exercises)
External examiner, before signing the record notebook, should verify whether the
Newspaper works were recorded/pasted in the record notebook.
Verbal communication in any language begins with sounds in isolation, union and word
formation. Learning everyday words and expressions is the primary factor. Grammar comes next.
One can enrich one’s every day vocabulary by reading English magazines and listening to or
watching an English channel on television. So an English laboratory should be equipped with a
minimum of two copies of two English dailies and English weeklies or monthlies.
222 | P a g e
Watching English channels helps the students improve their vocabulary and expressions. If
there is a provision, students may be permitted to watch selective, mind corruption free English
channels (sports, education, news, animal channels and so on) for at least 15 min. during the
English lab sessions. This will serve as motivation for the students and help them shed their
inhibition.
What is antakshari? (Polar word game)
This game can be played on the stage by two or three students using the departmental words.
Suppose Mr. A belongs to Dept.of Electrical and Electronics and he says his departmental word ‘
ampere ‘Mr. B has to supply a word beginning with the ending letter of Mr. A’s word. The word
ampere ends with the letter ‘ e’ so Mr. B says ‘ electrical ‘.Mr. A has to continue with the letter ‘ l ’.
Like that five pairs of words are to be spoken.(Letter ending only, not sound ending. ) Suppose
departmental words are not available in some English letters like
‘ x ‘ ‘ y ‘ ‘ z ‘ the students may be permitted to use common words.
ANTAKASHARI ( Five Exchanges )

(Dept. of Mechanical Engineering.)
EXAMPLE:
Mr. A Mr. B
1. Governor Reservoir
2. Rack Kelvin
3. Nut Tool
4. Lathe Emission
5. Naphtha Anvil
223 | P a g e
Introducing oneself:
One is not expected to introduce one’s family. One or two sentences on his family will do. Care
must be taken to include general proficiency, titles and merits, awards possessing or secured in
academic activities like paper presentation, participation in inter polytechnic or intra polytechnic
competitions, sports activity, forums like NCC,NSS, hobby, ambition, strengths and weaknesses.
Introducing others – merits – credentials—one or two points on his family.
Vote of thanks / Welcome address.No doubt it should be all-covering but Focus should be on the
important persons/invitees/chief guest and the message of the speaker.
Description (pictures from English weekly/daily) Pictures may be displayed through projector or
Magazine cuttings may be used. Just five lines on the picture will do.
Auditory/oral comprehension: A Passage from any English daily of the week of the examination
is to be read out for two to three minutes in the end examination. Display of recorded passages can
be used as an addition in the class room. The use of pre-recorded passage discouraged in the end
examination.
Oral presentation: Students must be encouraged to use English magazines and internet for
collecting information on the topic, noting keywords and use them in their presentation in his own
language. One must be able to talk extempore for 2 min on any topic, given a time of two minutes
for organizing his/her thoughts. The topics can be kept simple and general (current events of
interest like sporting event for headline of the day). It must be totally an oral activity without the aid
of any other media.
News Caption: A news item ,without heading,of not more than ten lines from an English daily of the
week of the conduct of Examination is to be given. The caption may be a passive construction or a
catchy phrase on the given news item.
Face to face dialogue: Selective nine situations / topics are to be performed in the class room.
(Minimum seven exchanges with courteous openings and closings).
Telephonic dialogue: Selective seven situations to be given. (Minimum seven exchanges).
Resume writing: cover letter—the components of a resume like sender’s address, recipient’s
address, career objective to be explained.
Group Discussion: Topics of common interest, avoiding controversial ones, are to be given for
discussion. A group may consist of six members.
Students should be exposed to 44 phonemes (sounds) in English language and their symbols.
There shall be no question on this end examination.
224 | P a g e
COMMUNICATION SKILLS EXERCISES:-
1. Departmental Vocabulary alphabetically (using it in sentence, antakshari).Using the words
orally in sentences
2. Introducing oneself and others
3. Vote of thanks / Welcome address
4. Description (pictures from English weekly/daily)
5. Auditory/oral comprehension
6. Oral presentation
7. Face to face dialogue
8. Telephonic dialogue
9. Resume writing
10. Group Discussion
Communication Skills:
Ten Marks for each exercise leading to a maximum of hundred marks in total.
The total marks to be reduced to an average of ten marks.
Texts of the performed activities to be recorded in the Record Note book. Synopsis of the news
item of the day/date is mandatory at the beginning of every record exercise.
Life Skills:
i) Preparing for and dealing with change.

j) Motivation, goal-setting and self-esteem.
k) Teamwork skills.
l) Time management
m) Emotional intelligence skills
n) Career planning.
o) Assertive Skills.
p) Interview skills.
Life skills are to be intensely inculcated through lectures, quotes, anecdotes and case studies. An
excellent awareness of the eight essential life skills is to be created through continuous internal
assessment. Five assignments in these topics are to be recorded in the record note book.
 A minimum of five assignments on five different topics.

 Each assignment to be assessed for twenty marks.
 The total marks to be reduced to an average of ten marks.
 All the topics to be covered in the lab.
225 | P a g e
TIME MANAGEMENT IN THE END EXAM.
For written part 30 min
 Written part of the examination should be the first / beginning of the examination, monadic oral
exam to start during the written exam.
Written Part exercises:
 auditory / oral comprehension.

 Resume writing.
 Giving news caption for the passage.
 During the written examination time of 30 minutes, monodic communication examination may
also take place simultaneously.
MONODIC COMMUNICATION ( ONE MAN COMMUNICATION)

Oral part – 75 min.
Both internal and external examiners (simultaneously) are to examine the students.
Five minutes for each student. 15 students for external & 15 students for internal and within 75
minutes both internal and external examiners complete the monadic communication exam.
DYADIC COMMUNICATION ( ONE PAIR COMMUNICATION)

 5 min for each pair.
 15 pairs in total. 8 pairs for external and 7 pairs for internal examiner. (8x5=40 min) within 40
min both internal and external examiners completes the dyadic communication exam.
 The students examined by the external for monadic exam are to be examined by the internal for
dyadic and vice versa.
PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION
 30 min for group discussion.
 6 members in each group.
 5 min for discussion for each group.
 Both internal and external examiners to supervise / examine simultaneously one group each.
 Within fifteen minutes all the six groups to be examined.
LABORATORY REQUIREMENT
1. An echo-free room for housing a minimum of sixty students.
2. Necessary furniture and comfortable chairs
3. Public Address System.
4. A minimum of two Computers with internet access, with Audio for Listening Skill and related
software packages.
5. A minimum of Two different English dailies.
226 | P a g e
6. A minimum of one standard Tamil daily.
7. Headphone units – 30 Nos. with one control unit with a facility to play and record in Computer.
8. A minimum of Three Mikes with and without cords.
9. Colour Television (minimum size – 29”).
10. DVD/VCD Player with Home Theatre speakers.
11. Clip Chart, white board ,smart board.
12. Projector.
13. video camera.
14. Printer,Xerox,scanner machines desirable.
15. English Weeklies/monthlies/journals like ELTOI desirable.
16. Frozen thoughts –monthly journal for Lifeskills by Mr.Rangarajan / www.frozenthoughts.com
Mark Pattern
End Examination – 75 Marks
Monodic Communication – 35 Marks
Dyadic Communication – 15 Marks
Profession Communication – 20 Marks
Professional Appearance – 5 Marks
Internal Assessment 25 Marks
Communication skills Record Notebook 10 Marks
Life skills assignments 10 Marks
Attendance 5 Marks
227 | P a g e
Allocation & Statement of Marks
Duration:3Hrs.
Name of the Candidate Reg. No.
A. Monodic communication : 35 Marks

Vote of
Description/
Use in thanks / Auditory/Oral News
Introduction Oral Total
sentence welcome comprehension caption
presentation
(5 mks) address (35 mks)
(5 mks) (10 mks) (5 mks)
(5 mks)
(5 mks)
B. Dyadic communication: 15 Marks

Antakshari Dialogue Total
(5 mks) (10 mks) (15 mks)
C. Professional communication: 20 Marks

Group Discussion Resume Total
(10 mks) (10 mks) (20 mks)
D. Internal Assessment: 25 Marks

Record Notebook Assignments Attendance Total
Commn.skills (10 mks) Life Skills (10 mks) (5 mks) (25 mks)
E. Professional Appearance: /5 Marks

Total : /100 Marks
Internal Examiner External Examiner
228 | P a g e
FACE TO FACE DIALOGUE TOPICS
1. Between Friends (On any acceptable topic).
2. Between a conductor and a passenger.
3. Between a doctor and a patient.
4. Between a Shopkeeper and a Buyer.
5. Between a Teacher and a Student.
6. Between a tourist and a guide.
7. In a Bank.
8 At a railway enquiry counter.
9. Lodging a complaint.
Note: A resourceful teacher may add a few more topics of common interest.
TELEPHONIC DIALOGUE TOPICS

1. Placing an order.
2. Making Enquiries.
3. Fixing appointments
4. Making a hotel reservation.
5. Dealing with a wrong number.
6. Travel arrangements.
7. Handling complaints.
229 | P a g e
MECHANICAL DEPARTMENTAL VOCABULARY FOR ANTAKASHARI AND USING IN SENTENCES
EXAMPLE:
A:
1. Anvil – made of cast Iron used in foundry shop.

2. Axle – A metal rod that connects two wheels.
3. Alloy – alloy is a mixture of two or more metals.
4. Addendum – distance between top of gear teeth and pitch circle.
5. Annealing – It is a heat treatment process for softening the metals.
B:
1. Bearing – it is which supports the shaft.

2. Bolt – it is a type of fastener. Combined with screw.
3. Brake – it is used to halt an auto mobile vehicle.
4. Beed – steel wiring used in tyres to withstand stress.
5. Baffles – it is used to reduce noise, filter dust particles in auto mobile.
C:
1. Cam – it is a lobe like structure, which actuates the valve.

2. Crown – the slope like structure in the piston.
3. Calipers’ – they are measuring instruments.
4. Clutch – it is used to disengage and engage the fly wheel and main shaft.
5. Chamber – it is the distance between vertical line and tyre center line.
D:
1. Damper – it is a type of shock absorber, reduces the vibration.

2. Differential – it controls the speed of rotating wheel in the rear axis.
3. Diaphram – it is used to separate two layers.
4. Detonation – it is the continuous knocking with serious effect on cylinder head.
E:
1. Evaporator – it absorbs heat to vapourise liquid into air

2. Engine-the place where fuel is burnt and heat energy is converted. mechanical energy
3. Electrolyte-it is a liquid substance which is used to transfer current or any metal particle.
4. Emission-the release of burnt gas from automobile.
5. Elongation-the increase of dimension due to application of load.
F:
1. Filter-which is used to remove dust particles.

2. Friction-the resistance on wear occur due to rubbing of two metals.
3. Fly wheel-the wheel like structure used to balance the uneven weight in engine.
4. Fuel – it is a substance that burns with oxygen in the air.
5. Factor of safety - it is the safety limit after which the material will break down.
G:
1. Governor – it is used to control the flow of fuel according to load.

2. Gear – it is used to transmit power from one place to another.
3. Generator – it is used to generate power.
4. Gasket – it prevents the leakage and to provide sealing effect.
5. Goggle – the protective device used to guard the eyes.
230 | P a g e
H:
1. Hub – it is the center part of wheel.

2. Hammer – it is used to beat sheet metals.
3. Hydraulics – it deals with fluid for various function.
4. Hatching – it is used to highlight the parts in drawings.
5. Head stock – it is the main function unit of lathe.
I:
1. Ignition – it is the function by which fuel is burnt.

2. Injection – it is the process of spraying fuel into engine block.
3. Impeller – it is which converts kinetic energy into pressure energy.
4. Inventory – it is the place where raw materials are stored.
5. Idling – it is the condition at which the automobile engine at stationary state.
J:
1. Jig – it guides the tool and hold the job.

2. Jaw – it is teeth like structure used to hold work pieces.
3. Jog mode – Jog mode is used to give manual feed for each axis continuously.
4. Junk – it is known as waste material in industry.
5. Journal – It is a type of bearing.
K:
1. Keyway – it is a specific path made in shaft to joint parts.

2. Knocking – the sound produced due to Burning of uncompleted burnt fuel.
3. Kelvin – it is the degree of hotness.
4. Knurling – it is the process of lathe done to work piece to improve the gripness.
5. Knuckle joint – It is a type of joint used to connect two work pieces.
L:
1. Lubrication – process of reducing heat by applying cooling substances.

2. Layering – it is used to draw parts of a machine separately and combine together.
3. Lever – it is a supported arm used to engage gears.
4. Lathe – it is the father of machines used in turning operations.
5. Lead screw - it is the screw through which the carriage travels.
M:
1. Manometer – it is used to measure the pressure of fluids.

2. Milling – process of removing metal from work piece by rotating cutting tool.
3. Manifold – it is a passage made for flow of fuel in automobile.
4. Moulding – it is the process of passing hot liquid metal into mould made through sand.
5. Module – it is a metric standard used to identify or specify pitch.
N:
1. Nozzle – it is used to reduce the pressure and increases the velocity.

2. Nut – it is a type of fastener used to couple with screw.
3. Nomenclature – Dimensional property of specific part on component is notified by
nomenclature.
4. Neck – Distance between drills body and shank.
5. Naphtha – kind of inflammable oil.
231 | P a g e
O:
1. Orthography – it is the three dimensional view of an object.

2. Ovality – Elliptical shape of piston.
3. Over haul – it is the complete checking and servicing of a machine or vehicle.
4. Optimum temperature – suitable temperature condition for certain process on working.
5. Offset – it is by which the axis of certain job is defined.
P:
1. Pinion – a small gear is called pinion.

2. Pulley – A cylindrical object used to connect belt for transmitting power.
3. Pump – it is which transfers fluid from one place to another.
4. Piston – it is which transfer power from combustion chamber to connecting rod.
5. Port – it is the opening in two stroke engine for movement of fuel and exhaust.
Q:
1. Quilt – it is used to give automatic feed in machines.

2. Quality control – it is an inspection processl.
R:
1. Reaming – it is the operation used to finish inner surface of a hole.

2. Reservoir – it is used to store fuel or any liquid.
3. Rack – it is a spur gear with infinite radius.
4. Retainer – it is used to bring back to the original position.
5. Radiator – it is the part used in automobile for cooling water.
S:
1. Shackle – it is a rod connected to leaf spring.

2. Spring – it is a circular rod which compresses on load and retracts when released.
3. Strainer – it is used to remove micro particles.
4. Shock absorber - it is used to reduce vibration and give cushioning effect.
5. Suspension- it is used to absorb shocks and give cushioning effect.
T:
1. Tail stock – it is used in lathe to support the job.

2. Tool – it is a metal.removal device.
3. Torque – it is the twisting load given on a work piece.
4. Trimming – it s the process of removing excess metal .
5. Turning – it is a metal cutting process used to reduce diameter.
U:
1. Universal joint-it is used to connect propeller shaft and differential unit.

2. Universal divider head- it is used to index various components.
V:
1. Valve – valve is the part used in automobile for flow of fuel and exhaust to cylinder head.
2. Vent hole – it is the hole made in casting for ventilation purpose.
3. Vulcanizing – it is the process of adding carbon to rubber.
4. Vibration – it is caused due to the movement in an uneven surface.
5. Velocity-rate of change of displacement.
232 | P a g e
W:
1. Wheel-it is a circular object which rotates and moves the vehicle.

2. Wiper-it is used in wind shield to remove water droplets.
3. Work piece-it is the material in which various processes are done to make a component.
4. Wage-it is the amount paid to a worker for his work.
5. Washer-washer is a component used in fasteners to reduce gap.
Y:
1. Yawing-the turning of wind mill towards direction of air is called yawing.

2. Yoke-it is which holds the other end of spindle in milling machine.
3. Yield stress-It is the stress above which it will attain the breaking stress.
4. Young’s modulus-it is the ratio between stress and strain.
Pl.note: Suppose departmental words are not available in some English letters like
‘ x ‘ ‘ y ‘ ‘ z ‘ the students may be permitted to use common words. This is only an example.
Another student of Mechanical Engineering can have different sets of words under each
letter of the English alphabet.Like that there may be variety of sets. The most important
point is that One is not supposed to murmur but speak the words intelligibly in an
audible manner. Swallowing the words will deprive a student of winning a selection in an
interview. In the same way, students of other Departments can have different sets of
words
TELEPHONE LANGUAGE AND PHRASES IN ENGLISH

Answering the phone
" Good morning/afternoon/evening, Madras Enterprises, Premila speaking.”
" Who's calling, please?”
Introducing yourself
" This is Raghavan speaking.”
" Hello, this is Raghavan from Speak International.”
Asking for someone
" Could I speak to Mr. Raman, please?”
" I'd like to speak to Mr Raman, please.”
" Could you put me through to Mr Raman, please?”
" Could I speak to someone who …”
233 | P a g e
Explaining
" I'm afraid Mr. Raman isn't in at the moment”.
" I'm sorry, he's in a meeting at the moment.”
" I'm afraid he's on another line at the moment.”
" Putting someone on hold”
" Just a moment, please.”
" Could you hold the line, please?”
" Hold the line, please.”
Problems
" I'm sorry, I don't understand. Could you repeat that, please?”
" I'm sorry, I can't hear you very well. Could you speak up a little, please?”
" I'm afraid you've got the wrong number.”
" I've tried to get through several times but it's always engaged.”
" Could you spell that, please?”
Putting someone through
" One moment, please. I'll see if Mr Raman is available.”
" I'll put you through.”
" I'll connect you.”
" I'm connecting you now”.
Taking a message
" Can I take a message?”
" Would you like to leave a message?”
" Can I give him/her a message?”
" I'll tell Mr. Raman that you called”
" I'll ask him/her to call you as soon as possible.”
" Could you please leave your number? I shall ask him to get back to you.”
Pl.note: The above ones are samples only. A resourceful teacher may add more.
234 | P a g e
DAY-TO-DAY EXPRESSIONS ( For dialogues )
COMMON PARLANCE
How are you?
Fine. Thank you.
How are you?
Me too.
How do you do?
How do you do?
It’s good to see you again.
Glad to meet you.
Thank you.
Thanks very much.
Welcome.
Hello! How is everything?

Just fine. Thanks. What’s new?
Nothing much.
I’m pleased to meet you.

The pleasure is mine.
I’ve heard Paul speak about you often.
Only good things! I hope.
Look who’s here!

Are you surprised to see me?
Sure. I thought you were in Chennai.
I was, but I got back yesterday.
Sorry, May I help you?

So kind of you.
That’s so nice of you.
Nice talking to you.
Nice meeting you.
It’s getting late, and I’ve to go now.
Certainly. Come back soon.
In that case, I’ll be seeing you.
Fine.
Thank you.
Welcome
So long. See you later.
Take care. Bye.
Good-bye.
Could you tell me the time, please?

Certainly. It is 5.35 p.m.
My watch says 5.40 p.m.
Then your watch is five minutes fast.
235 | P a g e
Excuse me. Can you tell me the way to …?
May I come in?
How is the weather today?
It is pleasant. / sunny / rainy / warm /windy.
I am sorry, Can you repeat what you have said.

I am sorry, I can’t hear you properly.
It is not audible. Can you please repeat it?
Beg your pardon; I don’t get your words clearly.
How do you feel now?
Are you ok?
I am fine. And how about you?
I am fine. Thank you.
GROUP DISCUSSION
Let me begin with introducing this concept,
Well, this is to convey that
At the outset, I am here to convey
At this juncture, I would like to
May I intervene?
May I add?
Kindly permit me to say
If you could allow me to say
Let me add a few words
Let me first answer your question
Can you please allow me to convey
Excuse me; I would like to add further
On behalf of my colleagues,
On their behalf
Firstly/ secondly/ thirdly.
Finally/ conclusively/ at the end / Summing up
Eventually/ in the event of
In spite of / otherwise/ although/ though
Please Note:
 The above ones are samples only.
 A resourceful teacher may add more.
 A potential student may exhibit variety.
236 | P a g e
VI SEMESTER
237 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT WITH MIS

238 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT WITH MIS
Marks
CONSTRUCTION Internal Board
Total
MANAGEMENT 5 Hrs 80 Hrs Assessment Examination
WITH MIS 25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
On completion of the course, the student will be able to :
 Describe the Role of government and construction agencies in the field of housing
 Describe the organization set up of PWD
 Mention the construction activity and fixing the construction agency.
 Describe the aspects of inspection and quality control methods
 Describe the banking system.
 Carryout the Feasibility study of a project
 Understands the process of Planning for civil engineering projects.
 Explain the significance of CPM and PERT Techniques.
 Understand the types of contract system
 Study the organization chart of a construction company.
 Understands the concepts and requirement of Entrepreneurship
 Perform the Computation of Net present value.
239 | P a g e
21061 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT WITH MIS
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Contents: Theory
I 1.1 CONSTRUCTION SECTOR IN INDIA 14 Hrs

Construction Management – Definition- Need – Scope - Objectives and &
functions - Role of government and private construction agencies – Types of
construction sectors - Public and Private functions of construction
management in national development - Construction practice:- the owner,
consultant, and contractor - Duties and responsibilities - Various stages
of a construction project.
1.2 FEASIBILITY STUDY
Study of necessity of project– Technical feasibility, Financial feasibility,
Ecological feasibility, Resource feasibility, Recovery from the project,
Economical Analysis –Building Economics – Preliminary studies-Analysis –
valuation.
1.3 PLANNING OF CIVIL ENGINEERING PROJECT
Objectives of planning – Public Project - Preliminary planning – Design
factors – Site utilization- – Reconnaissance survey – Preliminary survey –
Analysis and plotting of data – Estimate : preliminary and detailed estimate
–Project report – Land acquisition – Administrative approval – Technical
sanction – Budget provision- Private project – Advantages of planning to
client and engineer – limitations -Stages of planning by owner and
contractor.
1.4 CONTRACT MANAGEMENT
Types of contracts - Contract documents - Contractual obligations -
Specifications - Tender notice – Types - Tender documents - Earnest
money deposit (EMD) and Security deposits (SD) - Scrutiny and acceptance
of a tender - Contract agreement – Contractual changes and termination of
contract – Work order – Execution of agreement – Sub contract - Rights and
duties of sub-contractor.
II 2.1 CONSTRUCTION ORGANISATIONS AND THEIR 14 Hrs
SUPERINTENDENCE
Forms of business organizations - sole proprietorship – Partnership - Joint
stock company,- Co-operative society,- and State enterprises- Advantages
and Disadvantages -delegation of responsibility, personnel requirements
and division of works – Decentralization - Construction supervision and
Superintendence – Requirements and Responsibilities of Executives of the
project – Qualities of Efficient construction Manager - Pay rolls and Records
- Purchase and delivery of construction materials and equipments –
Percentage completion report - Insurance record - Project office
requirement - Organisation chart of a small / medium / large construction
company (broad outline only).
240 | P a g e
II 2.2 DEPARTMENTAL PROCEDURE AND ACCOUNTING

Organisation of P.W.D. - Responsibilities of officers - Accounting procedure
(administrative sanctions, technical sanctions, payment of bills) – Imprest
and Temporary accounts – Cash book - Works register - Accounting for
consumable materials - Record for tools and plants – Importance of M-book
and its entries – Work charged establishment – Nominal muster roll (N.M.R)
– Daily labour reports (D.L.R)
III 3.1 SCHEDULING AND TIME MANAGEMENT 14 Hrs

Scheduling – Definition – Preparation of Schedule – uses and advantages
– Classification of Schedules – Methods of scheduling – Bar chart – Job
layout – Work breakdown chart(WBC) – Network for projects management
– Activity – Event – Dummies – Basic assumptions in creating a network –
Rules for developing networks – Fulckerson’s rule for numbering the events
- Critical Path Method Critical and Subcritical paths – Critical and Non
critical activities/events - – Significance of critical path – Simple Problems -
PERT – Time estimate – EST, EFT, LST, LFT - Earliest expected time –
Latest allowable occurrence time –Floats - Slack. Standard deviation -
Variance – Simple problems.
3.2 RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Definition – Need for resource management – Optimum utilization of
resources- finance, materials, machinery, human resources - Resource
planning – Resource levelling and its objectives – Construction planning –
Stages – Operations – Schedule –Crashing – Need for crashing an activity
– Methods and tips for crashing – Time Vs Cost optimization curve – Cost
slope and its significance in crashing – simple problem on resource
levelling ( not for examination)
IV 4.1 QUALITY MANAGEMENT AND SAFETY 14 Hrs

Importance of quality – Elements of quality – Quality assurance
techniques ( inspection, testing, sampling ) Importance of safety –
Causes of accidents – Role of various parties ( designer / employer /
worker ) in safety management – Benefits – Approaches to improve
safety in construction.
4.2 CONSTRUCTION DISPUTES AND THEIR SETTLEMENT
Introduction – Development of disputes – Categories of disputes – Modes of
settlements - Arbitration
4.3 CONSTRUCTION LABOUR AND LEGISTATION
Need for legislation - Payment of wages Act - Factories Act – Contract
labour( Regulation and abolition) Act – Employees Provident Fund (EPF)
Act.
4.4 ETHICS IN ENGINEERING
Human values - Definition of Ethics - Engineering ethics - Engineering as a
profession - Qualities of professional - Professional institutions - Code of
ethics - Major ethical issues - Ethical judgement - Engineering and
management decision - Value based ethics.
241 | P a g e
V 5.1 ENTREPRENEURSHIP 14 Hrs

Definition – Role and Significance – Risks and Rewards – Concepts of
Entrepreneurship – Profile and requirement of entrepreneur - Programmes
existing in India – SISI, DIC, TANSIDCO – Funding and technical
assistance to Entrepreneurship- NIDCO,ICICI,IDBI,IFCI,SFC
5.2 INFORMATION MANAGEMENT AND COMPUTERS

Introduction – Definition of MIS – Out lines of MIS – Use of computers in
construction industry – Requirements of MIS – A data base approach –
Definition –Benefits - A data base approach to contractor’s account and its
advantage – Basic concepts of estimation – Project management and
operations simulation packages – Construction automation and Robotics.
5.3 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Elements of cash flow – Time value of money – Interest rate of capital –
Present value computation - NPV method – IRR method – simple problems
- Global banking culture - Types of banks –Activities of Banks – Corporate
finance – Personal, retail and rural banking – Treasury management.
REVISION AND TEST
Reference Book :
1. Sanga Reddy. S, “Construction Management”,Kumaran Publications, Coimbatore.

2. Sengupta.B, &H.Guha. “Construction Management and Planning ”,Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi
3. Seetharaman. S, ” Construction Engineering & Management “,Umesh Publications,
NaiSarak, New Delhi
4. Boyd.C. & Paulson Jr, “Computer Applications in Construction ”,Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
company Ltd., New Delhi.
5. Rangwala.S.C.,”Construction of Structures and Management of Works” Charotar Publishing
House, Anand 388 001, 2000
6. B C Punmia, “ Project Planning and control with PERT and CPM”, Laxmi Publications.
242 | P a g e

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15

1. What is meant by Construction management?
2. What are the classifications of construction planning?
3. What is meant by Project Report?
4. What is the necessity of EMD?
5. Mention the different types of Construction organizations?
6. State any two requirements of a project office.
7. What is cash book?
8. What is nominal muster roll?
9. What ist meant by Project scheduling?
10. What is the Bar chart?
11. What is the expansion of CPM?
12. What is PERT?
13. Define Quality Control ?
14. When disputes are developed between the Owner and contractor ?
15. Define labour wage act ?
16. What is the function of trade Union?
17. Define entrepreneurship.
18. What is SIDCO?
19. Define MIS.
20. What is the function of rural bank?
243 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
1. (A) (i) What are the objectives of construction management ? (6)

(ii) What are the factors to be considered in the feasibility study of a project ? (6)
OR
(B) Explain the function of construction management in National development (12)
22.(A) Describe in detail the different forms of Business organizations. Also mention the
merits and demerits (12)
OR
(B) (i) What do you mean by check measurement? Explain (6)
(ii) Write short notes on (6)
1. Nominal muster roll.
2. Daily labour report.
3. Work charged Establishment
23.(A) Draw a critical path and determine the project duration time for the following details. (12)
Activity 0-1 0-2 1-3 2-3 3-4 4-5 4-6 5-6
Duration 18 4 5 4 6 6 8 8
in days
OR
(B) Explain the terms “material resource” and “human resources” (12)
24. (A) Describe in details the different forms of quality assurance Techniques (12)
OR
(B) (i) What are the causes of accidents in the construction site? (6)
(ii) What is the need of labour legislation ? (6)
25. (A) (i) Write any four requirements of an entrepreneur (4)

(ii) How computers are being used in the field of construction industry? (8)
OR
(B) Calculate the net present value of a machine from the following data and also find the
profitability index . (12)
Initial investment Rs.50, 000/- Expected life 5 years
Salvage value Rs.5000/- PV factor for 5 years 0.621 @10%
Year Cash inflow P.V discount factor @10%
1 Rs.20,000 0.909
2 Rs.16,000 0.826
3 Rs.14,000 0.751
4 Rs.12,000 0.688
5 Rs. 8,000 0.621
244 | P a g e

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15

1. Define “Ecological Analysis” with respect to Construction Project .
2. What is meant by “Public Sector”.
3. State any two limitations in planning of Construction projects?
4. What is sub contract?
5. Expand P.W.D and C.P.W.D
6. What is the purpose of Measurement book?
7. What is meant by engineering ethics?
8. What is meant by pay roll?
9. Define “variance”.
10. Define resource management.
11. What do you mean by “Cost slope”?
12. Define the term nominal cost.
13. What is meant by accident?
14. What is arbitration?
15. What is EPF?
16. What is the purpose of Contract Labour Act?
17. Define database.
18. What is meant by cash outflow?
19. Name any two types of banks.
20. Write the basic concept of estimation.
245 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21 (A) Explain in detail the various stages of a construction project?
OR
(B) Explain objectives of planning and site utilization ?
22 (A) (i) What do you understand by decentralization?Explain (4)
(ii) Explain the basic difference between construction supervision and (8)
construction superintendence?
OR
(B) Explain the duties and responsibilities of chief engineer and superintending engineer
of State P.W.D.
23 (A) The following are the three estimates of activities. In weeks. Compute the average expected
time for each activity. Draw the project network. Identify the critical path. What is the
duration of the project.:
Activity 1-2 1-3 1-5 2-4 3-4 4-5 4-6 5-6

To 2 4 2 1 5 3 2 1
Tm 3 5 2 2 6 4 3 2
Tp 5 5 4 4 8 9 6 5
OR
(B) (i) Write short notes on (6)
1.Work breakdown Chart[WBC]
2.Time Vs Cost optimization curve.
3. Resource Levelling.
(ii) What are the advantages of network analysis? (6)
24 (A) (i) Explain the importance of safety in construction? (6)

(ii) What are the causes of disputes? (6)
OR
(B) Explain the Engineering Ethics and Integrity?
25 (A) Mention the different types of entrepreneurial development programs existing in India? (12)
OR
(B) (i) Mention the objectives of MIS? (4)
(ii) Describe the scheme of financial assistance provided by commercial bank to
business enterprises and professionals (8)
246 | P a g e
.
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
HYDRAULICS

247 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : HYDRAULICS
Marks
Internal Board
Total
HYDRAULICS 6 Hrs 96 Hrs
25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
On completion of the course, the student will be able to:
 To define the properties of fluids and their physical quantities.

 To list different types of pressures and various pressure measuring devices.
 To calculate hydrostatic forces on plane surfaces immersed in water.
 To explain types of forces, energy and application of Bernoulli’s theorem.
 To describe different types of Orifices and Mouthpieces and to derive discharge formulae
and their practical applications.
 To state the different losses of head of flowing liquids in pipes and their equations.
 To describe different types of Notches and Weirs, and deriving the discharge formulas and
their Practical applications.
 To describe different types of Channels and their discharge formulas and to determine the
condition for maximum discharge ;.
 To explain the procedure of Canal Linings and explain the different forms of ground water
resources
 To explain the construction details, specifications and efficiencies of Reciprocating Pumps
and Centrifugal Pumps.
248 | P a g e
21062 HYDRAULICS
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Contents: Theory

I
1.1 INTRODUCTION
18 Hrs
Hydraulics – Definition - Properties of fluids - Mass, force, weight, specific
volume, specific gravity, specific weight, density, relative density,
compressibility, viscosity, cohesion, adhesion, capillarity and surface
tension - Dimensions and Units for area, volume, specific volume, velocity,
acceleration, density, discharge, force, pressure and power.
1.2 MEASUREMENT OF PRESSURE
Pressure of liquid at a point – Intensity of pressure - Pressure head of liquid
– Conversion from intensity of pressure to pressure head and vice-versa -
Formula and Simple problems - Types of pressures - Static pressure,
Atmospheric pressure, Gauge pressure, Vacuum pressure and Absolute
pressure – Simple problems - Measurement of pressure - Simple mercury
barometer - Pressure measuring devices- Piezometer tube - Simple U-tube
manometer - Differential manometer – Micrometer - Problems.
1.3 HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE ON SURFACES
Pressure on plane surfaces - Horizontal, vertical and inclined surfaces-Total
pressure-Centre of pressure - Depth of centre of pressure - Resultant
pressure – Problems on Practical application - Sluice gates, Lock gates and
Dams- Descriptions.
2.1 FLOW OF FLUIDS

II 18 Hrs
Types of flow – Laminar and turbulent flow - Steady and unsteady flow –
Uniform and Non-uniform flow - Equation for continuity of flow (law of
conservation of mass) – Energy possessed by a fluid body - Potential
energy and Potential Head – Pressure energy and Pressure Head -
Kinetic Energy and Kinetic Head - Total Energy and Total Head –
Bernoulli’s theorem – ( No proof) – Problems on Practical applications of
Bernoulli’s theorem – Venturimeter - Orificemeter (Derivation not
necessary) - Simple problems.
2.2 FLOW THROUGH ORIFICES AND MOUTHPIECES
Definitions- Types of orifices - Vena contracta and its significance –
Hydraulic coefficients Cd, Cv and Cc - Formula - Simple problems - Large
orifice – Definition – Discharge formula – Simple problems - Practical
applications of orifices – Types of mouthpieces - External and internal
mouthpieces - Discharge formula - Simple problems.
2.3 FLOW THROUGH PIPES
Definition of pipe-Losses of head in pipes – Major losses - Minor losses -
Sudden enlargement, sudden contraction, obstruction in pipes (no proof) -
Simple problems – Energy / Head losses of flowing fluid due to friction -
Darcy’s equation - Chezy’s equation (No derivation) – Problems -
Transmission of power through pipes – Efficiency - Pipes in parallel
connected to reservoir - Discharge formula - Simple problems.
249 | P a g e
III 3.1 FLOW THROUGH NOTCHES

Definitions- Types of notches – Rectangular, Triangular and Trapezoidal
notches – Derivation of equations for discharges - Simple problems -
Comparison of V-Notch and Rectangular Notch.
3.2 FLOW THROUGH WEIRS
Definitions - Classification of weirs - Discharge over a rectangular weir and
trapezoidal weir – Derivation – Simple problems – End contractions of a
weir – Franci’s and Bazin’s formula – Simple problems - Cippoletti weir –
Problems - Narrow crested weir – Sharp crested weir with free over fall -
Broad crested weir - Drowned or Submerged weirs - Suppressed weir -
Stepped weir – Problems - Definition of terms - Crest of sill, Nappe or Vein,
Free discharge - Velocity of approach – Spillways and Siphon spillway -
Definition.
IV 4.1 FLOW THROUGH OPEN CHANNELS

16 Hrs
Definition - Classification - Rectangular and Trapezoidal channels –
Discharge – Chezy’s formula, Bazin’s formula and Manning’s formula -
Hydraulic mean depth – Problems - Conditions of
rectangular/trapezoidal sections - Specific energy, critical depth –
Conditions of maximum discharge and maximum velocity - Problems -
Flow in a venturiflume –Uniform flow in channels – Flow through a sluice
gate – Types of channels – Typical cross-sections of irrigation canals -
Methods of measurements of velocities – Channel losses - Lining of canals
– Advantages of lining of canals - Types of lining- Cement concrete lining
with sketches - Soil cement lining with sketches – LDPE lining.
V 5.1 GROUND WATER 18 Hrs
Aquifer - Water table – Exploring the availability of ground water - Taping of
ground water - Open well - Bore well-Types of well construction - Yield of a
open well – Equation - Specific capacity or specific yield of a well -Test for
yield of well – Methods of rain water harvesting - Sanitary protections – No
problems.
5.2 PUMPS
Pumps – Definition – Difference between a pump and a turbine-
Classification of pumps - Positive displacement pumps and roto-dynamic
pressure pumps - Characteristics of modern pumps -Maximum
recommended suction, lift and power consumed- Reciprocating pump -
Construction detail and working principle - Types - Single acting and Double
acting -Slip -Air vessels-Discharge and Efficiency- Problems - Centrifugal
pump – Advantages and disadvantages over a reciprocating pump - Layout
-Construction details – Priming of centrifugal pump – Working of the pump –
Classification – Functions of Foot valve, Delivery valve and Non-return
valve – Fundamental equation of centrifugal pump - Characteristics of a
centrifugal pump – Discharge, power and efficiency - Problems -
Specifications of centrifugal pumps and their sections- Hand pump - Jet
pump- Deep well pump - Plunger pumps - Piping system.
250 | P a g e
Reference Book :
1. Dr. Jagadish Lal - Hydraulics, Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines-Metropolitan Book
2. Company- New Delhi
3. P.N. Modi & S.M. Sethi - Fluid Mechanics - Standard Publishers – New Delhi
4. S. Ramamirtham-Hydraulics,Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics Machines- Dhanpat Rai &
Sons, New Delhi
5. K.L.Kumar - Fluid Mechanics – Eurasa Publshing House – New Delhi
6. R.K. Bansal - Fluid Mechanics - Lakshmi Publications
7. Prof. S. Nagarathinam - Fluid Mechanics - Khanna Publishers – New Delhi
8. K.R. Arora - Hydraulics, Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics Machines –Standard Publishers &
Distributors, New Delhi
9. B C S Rao, “Fluid Mechanics and Machinery” Tata-McGraw-Hill Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
251 | P a g e
21062 HYDRAULICS

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15
1. Define the term: fluid

2. Differentiate cohesion from adhesion
3. What are the types of mechanical pressure gauges?
4. Define total pressure
5. Distinguish between steady and unsteady flow
6. What are the limitations of Bernoulli’s theorem ?
7. What is an orifice? How are orifices classified ?
8. Mention the various minor losses of head of water
9. What is the use of a notch ?
10. Define crest and nappe
11. What is a weir? How are weirs classified ?
12. State the purpose of spillway in a dam ?
13. What is uniform flow and non-uniform flow in open channels
14. How are canals classified ?
15. List the advantages of canal lining
16. Define the term” Critical Depth” with respect to open channel flow.
17. What is the principal source of ground water?
18. Define Aquifer
19. Differentiate pump and turbine.
20. What is meant by centrifugal pump ?
252 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21. (A)(i) A capillary tube of diameter 2.5x10-3m is dipped in water. The surface tension at the
contact surface is 73.5x10-3N/m. If the angle of contact is 250, determine the capillary
rise.
(ii)The pressure of water at a point in a pipe line is 5N/m 2. What is the corresponding
pressure head in terms of water ? What is the corresponding pressure head in terms of
kerosene of specific gravity 0.8.
OR
(B)(i) To measure the pressure at a point in a pipe line carrying water, a sensitive manometer
having a basin of area 60 times the area of the tube is employed. The deflection of
mercury between the limbs is 0.90m. The mercury is 0.3m below the centre of pipe in the
basin. Determine the pressure head in terms of water.
(ii) A triangular plate of base 3m and altitude 4m is immersed in a liquid of specific 0.8. Its
base is parallel to and at a depth of 1m from the free liquid surface. Its plane makes 300
to the free surface. Its base is nearer to the free liquid surface. Compute, (1) Total
pressure on one side of the plate and (2) Depth of centre of pressure.
22 (A)(i) A horizontal pipe line of 100mm diameter discharges under a pressure of 343.4x103Pa.
The mean velocity is 1.2m m/s. Determine,(a)pressure head (b)velocity head and (c)total
head.
(ii) A jet issuing from an orifice of 30mm diameter under a head of 2m falls 1m vertically in
a horizontal distance of 2.75m from the vena contracta. The actual discharge is 100 litres
in 37 seconds. Find (1) coefficient of discharge, (2) coefficient of velocity and
(3) coefficient of contraction.
OR
(B) (i) A rectangular orifice, 2m wide and 4m deep is discharging water from a tank. The water
level is 10m above the upper edge of the orifice. Taking Cd=0.6.Find the discharge.
(ii) A pipe line connects two reservoirs whose difference in water level is 15m. The length of
the pipe is 600m. If the discharge is 300 lps, find the diameter of the pipe line, taking f as
0.02.
23 (A)(i) A triangular notch is discharging under a head of 0.7m. If the coefficient of discharge of
the notch is 0.60,find the discharge. Angle of the notch is 600.
(ii) A trapezoidal notch, 600mm wide at the bottom has side slopes 1:1. If the discharge over
the notch is 300 lps, determine the head causing flow over the sill of the notch. Take Cd
as 0.62.
253 | P a g e
OR
(B) (i) A weir,10m long is divided into 4 bays by vertical posts, each 300mm wide. Determine the
discharge if the head of water over the weir is 1m. Take Cd as 0.60.
(ii) Determine the discharge over a sharp crested weir of length 20m under a constant head
of 0.10m. Take Cd as 0.60.
24(A) (i) Calculate the hydraulic mean depth for a rectangular channel having a bottom width of
2m, and depth of flow 1.75m.
(ii) Design an economical rectangular channel to carry 90m3/s with a bed fall of 1 in 1500. In
the Chezy’s formula, C=50.
OR
(B) (i) Design a most economical rectangular section to carry 0.30m 3/s for a bed slope of 1 in
1000. Take, C=60.
(ii) An economical trapezoidal channel has a bed width of 4m and side slopes of 1:1. It has a
bed fall of 1 in 1600. Taking C as 60, determine the discharge.
25 (A) (i) State various methods of tapping ground water.

(ii) Give a brief note on “Open wells”.
OR
(B) (i) What are the different types of heads for a centrifugal pump?
(ii) A centrifugal pump, installed in a well for irrigation, pumps 2400litres of water per
minute to a height of 25m through 120m long and 150mm diameter pipe. The overall
efficiency of the pump is 60%. Taking friction factor as 0.04, calculate the power required
to drive the pump.
254 | P a g e
21062 HYDRAULICS

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15
1. Define vapour pressure

2. What is a viscosity of a liquid ?
3. Define intensity of pressure
4. What is piezometer ?
5. Define: Discharge
6. Distinguish between, laminar and turbulent flow
7. What is mouthpiece ?
8. How are mouthpieces classified ?
9. Define the term, jet of water
10. What is meant by “velocity of approach”
11. What is a Cippoletti weir ?
12. What is a stepped weir ? Where it is used ?
13. What is “Critical depth”
14. How are canals aligned ?
15. Define the term, “hydraulic mean depth”
16. Define open channel
17. What is yield of a well ?
18. List the factors affecting yield of wells
19. List the factors involved in the selection of pump
20. What are the different efficiencies of centrifugal pump ?
255 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21.(A) (i) The specific gravity of a liquid is 0.85. What will be its specific weight, density and specific
volume?
(ii) A U-tube mercury manometer is used to measure differential pressure between two
points of a horizontal pipe line carrying oil of specific gravity 0.8. Calculate the differential
pressure head in terms of Pa, if the deflection of mercury is 0.20m.
OR
(B) (i) Derive an expression for total pressure on a inclined immersed plane surface.
(ii) A circular plate, 3m diameter is immersed in a liquid of relative density 0.9. Its peripheral
distance are 2m and 4m from the free surface of the liquid. Compute, (i) Total resultant
thrust on the plate and (ii) Position of its application from the free liquid surface.
22 (A) (i) A pipe line tapers from 100mm to 200mm diameter. The velocity at smaller section is
10m/s. Find the velocity at the larger section and the discharge.
(ii) An orifice meter is provided in a 500mm dia. pipe to carry 200 lps of water at a pressure
head of 0.5m of mercury. If the coefficient of the meter is 0.64, calculate the diameter of
the orifice.
OR
(B) (i) Under a constant head of 0.10m, the co-ordinates of the jet from the vena contracta are
0.4m and 0.42m. If Cd = 0.62. Determine (i) Cv and (ii) Cc.
(ii) A large rectangular orifice, 2mx1m is provided to the side of a tank. The water level in the
tank is 0.3 m above its top edge. If the coefficient of discharge is 0.63, what will be the
discharge through this orifice ?
23(A) (i) With a coefficient of discharge of 0.62, a rectangular notch of 0.9m width discharges
120 lps. Find the head causing flow.
(ii) A rectangular notch, 4m wide discharges water at the rate of 1000 lps. Calculate the
head over the notch, if Cd = 0.64
OR
(B)(i) A submerged weir,2.25m long, has upstream and downstream water levels 1.5m and
0.50m above the crest of the weir. Find the discharge over the weir. Take Cd for free
portion as 0.60 and that for submerged portion as 0.80.
(ii) An ogee weir, 4m long has a head of 0.50m. If Cd = 0.62, find the discharge.
256 | P a g e
24 (A)(i) Design an earthen trapezoidal channel with a velocity of flow of 1m/s and to discharge
10m3/s, having side slopes of 2 in 1
(ii) A rectangular channel is 2m wide and the depth of flow is 1m. If the discharge is 1.18
cumecs and K is 1.54, using Bazin’s formula, find the longitudinal slope of the channel.
OR
(B) (i) A trapezoidal channel of most economical section has side slopes of 1:1. It is required to
discharge 10m3/s. The bed slope is 1 in 1500. Take C=50. Design the section.
(ii) Design a trapezoidal channel with a velocity of flow of 1.0m/s to discharge 4.50m3/s.
Assume side slopes of 1 to1 and C = 50
25 (A) (i) Explain different types of bore wells.

(ii) Write brief notes on “Open wells”.
OR
(B) (i) Explain in detail, the piping system and the system of supply of water.
(ii) A single acting reciprocating pump has a piston diameter of 300mm and a stroke of
450mm. It operates at a speed of 45 rpm and lifts 25 litres of water per second to a
height of 6m. Determine (i) Theoretical discharge (ii) Coefficient of discharge
(iii) Percentage slip (iv) Theoretical power required and (v) Efficient of the pump
257 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
STEEL STRUCTURES

258 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : STEEL STRUCTURES ( ELECTIVE THEORY II )
Marks
Internal Board
Total
STEEL Assessment Examination
5 Hrs 80 Hrs
STRUCTURES
25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the behaviour of structural steel in its plastic stage;

 To learn plastic analysis of simple members;
 To design simple steel members to resist axial forces;
 To design simple flexural members;
 To design welded / bolted connections for steel members.
259 | P a g e
21081 STEEL STRUCTURES ( ELECTIVE THEORY II )
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Contents: Theory
I INTRODUCTION TO PLASTIC ANALYSIS AND LIMIT STATE DESIG 14 Hrs
Plastic Analysis: Analysis of Steel Structures– Methods– Elastic, Plastic

and Dynamic Analysis and Advanced method of analysis based on IS:800-
2007– Idealized Stress vs Strain curve for Structural Steel– Requirements
and Assumptions of Plastic method of analysis– Formation of Plastic hinges
in Flexural members– Plastic Moment of Resistance and Plastic Modulus of
Sections– Shape Factors of rectangular / circular/ I / T-Sections– Collapse
load– Determination of Collapse loads for Cantilever, Simply supported and
Fixed beams by any (Statical or Kinematical method– Problems.
Limit State Design: Advantages of Limit State Design of Steel structures–

Basis for design– Classification of Limit States– Characteristic and Design
Actions– Ultimate and Design Strengths- Partial Safety Factors for Loads
and Materials– Design requirements– Strength requirements: Stability,
Fatigue and Plastic collapse– Serviceability requirements: Deflection limits,
Vibration, Durability and Fire resistance –Geometrical properties of gross
and effective cross sections– Classification of Cross Sections as per IS:800-
2007– Internal, external(outstands) and tapered elements of sections–
Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio of members – Necessity of Bracings
and Expansion joints in Steel Structures
II DESIGN OF TENSION AND COMPRESSION MEMBERS BY L.S.M 14 Hrs
Tension Members- Design Strength of Tension members against yielding

of gross section, against rupture of critical section and due to block shear–
Design requirements–Problems on determination of design strength of given
members and designing tension members using rolled steel sections for
given loads– Design of bolted and welded connections for tension members
–Problems.
Compression Members- Effective Length and Effective Sectional Area of

Compression members – Design Stress and design strength– Buckling
Class of cross sections– Imperfection factor–
Stress reduction factor– Thickness of elements– Eccentricity of loads on
columns– Single angle and double angle struts–Bolted and welded
connections for struts– Design of Built up Columns– Connecting the
components of built up columns by tacking bolts/ welds– Requirements of
connections– Laced Columns– Single and Double laced systems–
Requirements of lacing bars- Design of Lacings– Battened Columns–
Requirements of battens– Design of battens– Problems
260 | P a g e
II Column Bases- Slab base and Gusseted base – Code Provisions (IS:800-
2007) – Minimum thickness and Effective Area of Base plate– Design of
Slab base and Gusseted base for Axially loaded columns using bolts /
welds.
III DESIGN OF FLEXURAL MEMBERS FOR BM AND SF BY L.S.M 14 Hrs
Laterally Supported Beams– Classification of Steel beams –Effective

span– Design principles- Web Buckling and Web Crippling– Minimum
thickness of Web – Sections with webs susceptible /not susceptible to
buckling under shear before yielding– Design Bending Strength of sections
with Low shear –Effect of holes in Tension zone– Nominal shear strength
and Design shear strength of sections– Limiting deflection of beams –
Design of laterally supported Simple beams for Bending moment and Shear
force using single / double rolled steel sections (symmetrical cross sections
only) – Problems – Un symmetrical (Bi-Axial) bending – Design of laterally
supported Purlins for sloped roof trusses (for given vertical UDL with BM
coefficient 0.085) – Simple problems.
Laterally Un-Supported Beams- Lateral Torsional Buckling of compression

flange – Maximum permitted Slenderness Ratio of Compression flange –
Design Bending Strength of laterally un supported beams – Bending stress
reduction factor–Imperfection parameter–Elastic lateral buckling moment of
doubly symmetric sections– End Torsional Restraints and Intermittent
Bracing of Compression flange– Requirements, Types and their Effects–
Design of laterally un supported beams for bending and shear using
symmetrical rolled steel sections– Problems.
IV DESIGN OF SECTIONS FOR COMBINED ACTIONS 14 Hrs
Sections subjected to Bending moment and High Shear force-– Effect

of high shear on flexural capacity of sections–Limiting value of shear force
for full moment capacity of sections– Reduced design strength of
Plastic/Compact/Semi Compact sections subjected to high shear– Design of
support sections of cantilevers and continuous beams– Problems
Sections subjected to Bending moment and Axial Compression

(Beam-Column)- Columns carrying eccentric loads, Columns subjected to
vertical and horizontal loads (wind loads), Columns of frames, Principal
rafters with purlins at non nodal points – Material failure and Buckling
failure– Interaction equations – Overall buckling– Design problems( with
axial compression and uni-axial BM only).
261 | P a g e
IV Sections subjected to Bending moment and Axial Tension– Bottom

chord members of Bridge girders–Tie members of trusses with hanging
loads–Reduced effective moment– Interaction equations– Design Problems
V DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS AND DETAILING 14 Hrs
General- Types of connections– Bolted, Riveted and Welded connections–

Rigid and Flexible connections– Components of connections– Basic
requirements of connections- Clearance for holes– Minimum and Maximum
spacing of fasteners– Minimum edge/ end distances– Requirements of
Tacking fasteners.
Bolted Connection– Types of bolts– Bearing type Bolts– Nominal and

Design shear strengths of bolts– Reduction factors for Long joints, Large
grip lengths, Thick packing plates– Nominal and Design bearing strengths of
bolts– Reduction factors for over sized and slotted holes– Nominal and
Design tensile strengths (tension capacity) of bolts – Friction grip type
Bolts– Advantages– Requirements as per IS 3757– Nominal and Design
Slip resistance of bolts in shear– Slip factors– Nominal and Design tensile
strengths of friction bolts– Simple design problems (Combined actions not
included).
Welded Connection- Types of welds– Fillet welds– Minimum and

maximum sizes– Effective length of weld- Fillet welds on inclined faces–-
Design strengths of shop/site welds– Butt welds– Effective throat thickness
and effective length of butt weld– Strength of butt weld- Intermittent welds–-
Slot or plug welds– Reduction factor for long joints– Stress in the weld due
to individual forces– Design requirements of connections– Simple Design
problems(Combined actions not included).
Detailing- Beam to Beam and Beam to Column connections – Seat angle

and Web angle connections– Designing and detailing of simple connections
for vertical forces (Moment resisting connections are not included) – Simple
problems –Connection details of Truss members at Joints(neat sketches).
Reference Book :
1. M.R.Shiyekar “Limit State Design in Structural Steel”, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd, 2011
2. K.S.Sai Ram “Design of Steel Structures” Pearson-Porling Kindersley Pvt Ltd
3. Dr.Subramaniam “Steel Structures”
262 | P a g e
21081 STEEL STRUCTURES ( ELECTIVE THEORY II )
PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15
1. Define the term “Shape factor”

2. What do you mean by “Collapse load”?
3. State any two advantages of limit state design with respect to steel structures.
4. Why expansion joints are to be provided in steel structures?
5. List the three different design strengths of a tie member.
6. What is the advantage of bolted connection?
7. Why lacings are provided in compression members?
8. How a slender compression member generally fails?
9. Why steel beams are provided with lateral supports?
10. Specify minimum thickness of web for a beam to avoid web buckling, as per IS:2007?
11. What is the effective length of a beam for torsional buckling under normal loading condition
when its ends are partially restrained against torsion but not restrained against warping?
12. Which member of a steel roof system is subjected to bi-axial bending?
13. When a flexural member is said to be under high shear?
14. When a column is called “beam column”?
15. Give two examples for members subjected to combined bending and tension.
16. What will be the reduced effective moment of a beam section when it is under tension?
17. List the different types of bolts?
18. What is meant by tacking fasteners?
19. Specify the value of minimum edge distance for a 20 mm dia bolt hole in case of hand flame cut
edges.
20. Define “effective length of butt weld”.
263 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21. (A) i) What are the assumptions made in the plastic method of analysis?.
ii) Explain briefly the serviceability requirements of structural elements to be considered in
the limit state design.
OR
(B) A simply supported steel beam of effective span 6 metres is subjected to a point load at 2
metres from the left support. The plastic moment of resistance of the section is 200kN.m.
Find the collapse load by kinematical method.
22. (A) Design the tie member of a roof truss to carry an axial force of 200 kN, due to live and
dead loads, using double angles, which are to be connected back to back on either side of
8mm thick gusset plates by 4 numbers 16mm dia bolts at each end.
OR
(B) Design the slab base and concrete pedestal for a steel column ISMB350@52.4kg/m
carrying an axial design load of 1000 kN. The pedestal is of M20 grade concrete and the
SBC of soil is 300kN/m2. Yield strength of steel is 250 N/mm2. Suggest suitable size of
weld if fu=460 N/mm2.
23. (A) (i) Differentiate the behaviours of laterally supported and laterally un-supported beams.
(ii) When a beam section has to be designed for the combined effects of bending and
shear?
OR
(B) Design a simply supported steel beam using suitable I-Section to carry an udl of 50 kN/m
on an effective span of 5 m. The beam is not supported laterally. Yield strength of steel
used is 300 MPa. Assume both flanges to be fully restrained against torsional rotation and
warping at both ends.
24. (A) A steel column of effective length 4.0 metre is subjected to an axial compression of 600KN
and a bending moment of 25kN.m about its major axis. Select suitable rolled steel I-
section for the column by limit state method, taking fy of steel as 340 MPa. Check for
overall member strength is not necessary.
OR
(B) An ISLB400@569N/m is used as a laterally supported cantilever beam. The support
section of the beam is subjected to a design shear force of 360kN. Determine the design
bending strength of the section if fy of steel is 300 MPa.
25. (A) (i) Explain different types of bolts.

(ii) Draw a neat sketch of beam to column seat angle connection using fillet welds.
OR
(B) A single angle tension member ISA 100x100x8 mm carries an axial force of 150kN. Find
out the minimum overlapping length required, on a 10mm thick gusset plate, at its end if
(i) 5mm size fillet welds of permissible design shear strength 150 N/mm2 are used and
(ii) 16mm dia bolts of design bolt value 50kN are used.
264 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
TOWN PLANNING

265 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : TOWN PLANNING ( ELECTIVE THEORY II )
Marks
TOWN Internal Board
5 Hrs 80 Hrs Total
PLANNING Assessment Examination
25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the principle of Town Planning and surveys.

 To study the requirements of housing and slum clearance.
 To study the requirement of Public buildings, parks and play grounds.
 To study the requirements and types of Urban roads and Traffic management
 To study the Importance of housing and slum clearance programmes
 To prepare Master plan and for Re-planning of existing Towns.
 About Building bye laws and other miscellaneous topics.
266 | P a g e
21082 TOWN PLANNING ( ELECTIVE THEORY II )
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Contents: Theory
I 1.1 TOWN PLANNING PRINCIPLES 14 Hrs

General - Evolution of planning - Objects of town planning – Economic
justification for town planning - Principles of Town planning - Necessity of
town planning - Origin of towns - Growth of towns – Stages in town
development - Personality of town - Distribution of land - Forms of
planning - Site for an ideal town - Requirements of new towns -
Planning of a modern town - Powers required for enforcement of
Town planning scheme - Cost of Town planning - Present position
of Town Planning in India.
1.2 SURVEYS
General – Necessity - Collection of Data - Types of surveys for planning a
new town - Uses of surveys.
1.3 ZONING
Meaning of the term - Uses of land, objects and Principles of Zoning -
Advantages of Zoning - Importance of Zoning - Aspects of Zoning –
Transition Zone – Economy of Zoning - Zoning powers - Maps for
Zoning.
II 2.1 HOUSING 14 Hrs

General - Importance of housing - Demand for houses - Building site -
Requirements of residential buildings -Classification of residential
buildings - Design of residential areas - Rural Housing - Agencies for
housing -Investment in housing - HUDCO – CIDCO - Housing problems
in India.
2.2 SLUMS
General - Causes of slums - Characteristics of slums - Effects of slums -
Slum clearance - Problems in removing slums - Improvement Works -
Open plot scheme - Slum clearance and rehousing - Prevention of
slum formation - Resources for slum clearance programmes - The
Indian slums.
III 3.1 PUBLIC BUILDINGS 14 Hrs

General – Suitable Location of Public Buildings – Classification of Public
Buildings - Principles of design of public buildings - Town centres - Grouping
of public buildings – Requirements of Public buildings – Green House– Civic
aesthetics.
3.2 PARKS AND PLAY GROUNDS

General – Types of recreation - Necessity of open spaces - Location of
urban green spaces - Classification of parks - Park systems - Park design
– Finance for parks – Parkways – Playgrounds - Space standards -
Landscape architecture.
267 | P a g e
III 3.3 MASTER PLAN

General – Objects – Necessity - Factors to be considered - Data to be
collected - Drawings to be prepared - Features of master plan - Planning
standards – Report – Stages of preparation – Method of Execution -
Conclusion.
3.4 RE-PLANNING EXISTING TOWNS

General - Objects of re-planning – Analyzing the defects of existing
towns - Data to be collected –difficulties in Master Planning existing
towns / cities - Urban renewal projects- merging of suburban areas –
Decentralization - Satellite Towns - Surface drains – Refuses of Towns –
Refuse disposal methods.
IV 4.1 URBAN ROADS 14 Hrs

General - Objects - Requirements of good city road – Factors to be
considered – Classification of urban roads – Types of street systems -
Through and By-pass roads – Outer and inner ring roads -
Expressways – Freeways – Precincts - Road aesthetics.
4.2 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
General - Object – Traffic survey - Traffic congestion – Traffic control -
Traffic diversion - Road junction –Parking - Traffic capacity of road - One
way traffic - Road traffic problems – Use of islands and flyovers at
crossings – causes of road accidents - Traffic signal – Advantages and
disadvantages of Automatic Light signals – Road sign – Road marking -
Name boards of streets - Direction boards - Street lighting in a town –
Traffic problem of existing towns – Peculiarities of traffic.
v 5.1 BUILDING BYE -LAWS
14 Hrs
General - Objects of bye-laws - Importance of bye-laws - Function of
local authority - Responsibility of owner - Applicability of bye-laws - Set
backs to buildings – Necessity of setbacks - Light plane – Plot coverage -
Floor space index- Maximum Height of buildings - Off-street parking –
Fire protection - Minimum width of streets and plot sizes – Some other
terms - Principles underlying in framing building bye-laws – Building
bye-laws for residential area of a typical town planning scheme –
Building bye-laws for other types of buildings -Development control
rules - General rules of metropolitan Area - CMDA rules.
5.2 MISCELLANEOUS TOPICS
Airports – Location - size - Noise control - Parts of an airports -
Betterment and compensation – City blocks –Conurbations - Cul-de-sac
streets - Focal point - Green belt - Public utility services - Rapid transit –
Remote sensing application – Urban planning using remote sensing –
Site suitability analysis Location of Bus Terminus, Whole sale markets,
Exhibition Centres etc., – Location for water/sewage treatment plants,
location for waste disposal etc.,– Transportation planning.
268 | P a g e
Reference Book :
1. Town Planning - S.C. Rangwala,: Charotar Publisher (2011), Publisher

2. K.S.Rangwala and P.S.Rangwala,. ‘Town Planning ”,Charotar Publishing House,15th
Edition,1999.
3. Michael Hord, R. Remote sensing methods and application, John Wiley and Sons,
NewYork, 1986.
4. National Building Code of India- Part-III.(2005).
5. Municipal and Panchayat bye-laws, CMDA Rules and Corporation bye-laws.
6. KA. Ramegowda, Urban and regional planning , University of Mysore
7. Principles and practice of town and country planning Lewis B. Keeble, Estates Gazette,
University of Michigan,2010
269 | P a g e

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15
1. What is meant by the term “Town planning”

2. What is meant by zoning ?
3. What are the requirements of New towns ?
4. What is meant by Transition zone ?
5. Define “Housing”
6. How a slum can be improved?
7. Write a critical note on good housing ?
8. Define “HUDCO”
9. Define “parkway”
10. Name the groups of shops
11. Define “Green House”
12. Write a notes on “Business centre”
13. What are the major role of an urban road?
14. What are the types of traffic signals?
15. Give a sketch of (i) By-pass road (ii) Outer ring road
16. What is the use of road signs ?
17. Define floor space Index( FSI).
18. Expand the term CMDA
19. Where is the rapid transit system employed?
20. Write notes on light plane
270 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21. (A)(i) Explain the various principles of town planning

(ii) Explain town planning in Ancient India
OR
(B) (i) Explain different types of surveys undertaken in the process of Town Planning
(ii) Explain about aspects of Zoning
22 (A) (i) Explain about classifications of Residential Buildings

(ii) Why was CIDCO formed? Give an idea about its functions and achievements
OR
(B) (i) Mention the aspects to be considered in the design of residential buildings.
(ii) Describe the agencies involved in housing industry.
23 (A) (i) Explain the various objects of re-planning of existing towns.

(ii) Write short notes on
(a) Different categories of refuse
(b) Advantages of water carriage system in refuse disposal
OR
(B) (i) State the data to be collected for the re-planning of a town
(ii) What are the drawings to be prepared for the master plan
24 (A) (i) Explain the essential features of freeways

(ii) Explain the general principles to be observed in the design of road junction
OR
(B)(i) What are the various usual form of road marking

(ii) What are the factors which contributes road accidents?
25. (A) (i) Mention the requirements to be considered for approval of plan by local authority
(ii) Briefly mention few building-laws of typical municipality for residential area
OR
(B)(i) Enumerate the various parts of an airport

(ii) What are the application of remote sensing in transportation planning
271 | P a g e

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15

1. Mention the objects of town planning
2. Enumerate the objects of zoning
3. Mention the stages involved in the Lewis Mumford method
4. Name any two surveys of Town planning ?
5. What are the methods adopted for slum clearance ?
6. Mention any two agencies for housing
7. What is the effect of slum?
8. Mention any two requirements of housing
9. Write shorts notes on “green house”
10. Which types of trees can be planted in the clayey soil ?
11. What is a garden city?
12. What are the maps required for master plan ?
13. What are the types of urban roads ?
14. What is a sub Arterial road
15. What are the factors considered in the selection of road junction ?
16. Write the necessity of rapid transport in a city
17. What are the objects of Bye laws ?
18. Distinguish plinth area and carpet area
19. . Write notes on National Housing Policy
20. List the drawings to be submitted to the municipality for approval ?
272 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21. (A) (i) What are the principles of town planning ? Explain them briefly.
(ii) What are the objects of zoning ? Explain the advantages of zoning
OR
(B) (i) Discuss the growth of towns according to origin

(ii) Distinguish natural growth and planned growth
22 (A) (i) Explain the advantages of housing finances

(ii) What are the objectives of NHP
OR
(B) (i) Describe the various housing programe by HUDCO

(ii) What are the factors to be considered while selecting a building site ?
23. (A) (i) State the data to be collected for Replanning of a town
(ii) Explain the principles of a Garden city
OR
(B)(i) What is a master plan? What are the objects of master plan ?
(ii) List the drawings to be prepared for the master plan
24. (A) (i) Write short notes on a) Arterial road

b) Rectangular street system
OR
(B) (i) Describe the travel and transport strategy and policy
(ii) Explain the transport policy of Tamil Nadu
25. (A) Write about i) Reforms of Bye laws ii) Supervising agencies
OR
(B) (i) What are the drawings to be submitted for plan approval ?
(ii) What are the details to be provided with the application for getting an approval for a
building ?
273 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING

274 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING ( ELECTIVE THEORY II )
Marks
Internal Board
Total
EARTHQUAKE Assessment Examination
5 Hrs 80 Hrs
ENGINEERING
25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
 To know the causes and consequences of earthquakes;

 To understand the magnitude and effects of earthquakes on structures;
 To understand the behaviour of various types of buildings during earthquakes;
 To know about the design concepts of earthquake resisting buildings;
 To know the methods of evaluation and retrofitting of damaged structures.
275 | P a g e
21083 EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING ( ELECTIVE THEORY II )
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Contents: Theory
I INTRODUCTION TO EARTH QUAKE 12 Hrs
Objective of earthquake engineering - Engineering Seismology - Structure

of the earth - Temperatures and Pressures with respect to depth -
Plate Tectonics - Evolution of Indian Sub Continent - Seismotectonics of
India - Severe earthquakes in Indian sub continent - Causes of
earthquake - Definition of terms : Fault line, Active Fault, Focus or
Hypo centre, Epicentre, Epicentre distance, Focal depth, Peak
ground acceleration, Foreshocks, Aftershocks, Aseismic, Isoseismal,
Seismic gap - Ground shaking - Seismic waves -Body waves - P-waves and
S-waves - Surface waves - Reyleigh and Love waves – Earthquake
Intensity - Earthquake size - Magnitude - Wave magnitude, Duration
magnitude, Moment magnitude - Energy released - Classification of
Earthquake based on magnitude - Consequences of earthquake - Ground
motion, Ground rupture, Liquefaction, Landslides, Fire, Tsunamis, etc-
Seismic Zoning Map of India (2002) - Earthquake frequency - Prediction of
Earthquake risk -Measurement of Earthquake - Instruments used - Various
scales - Richter’s Magnitude Scale .
II SEISMIC EFFECTS ON STRUCTURES 12 Hrs
Nature of ground motion - Effects of source, path and site - Ground

shaking effect on structures - Effects of Amplitude, Duration and Distance
of Earth quake - Damage potential of earthquakes -Effects of Inertia
forces, Seismic load, Deformations in structures, Horizontal and Vertical
shaking of structures, Transfer of inertia forces from top to bottom
- Effects of Soil - Influence of ground condition on earthquake motion -
Causes for Seismic damages in buildings: Soft storey failure, Floating
columns, Plan irregularity, Vertical irregularity, Lack of confinement of
concrete, Long cantilevers with heavy dead loads, Insufficient shear
reinforcements in columns, Poor quality construction, Poor quality materials,
Corrosion of reinforcement, Pounding of adjacent buildings - Short
column effect - Effects of size and shape of buildings - Horizontal
and vertical layout of buildings - Effect of shifting of filler wall locations from
floor to floor, non uniform rigidity distribution - Ductility and flexibility of
buildings.
276 | P a g e
III BEHAVIOUR OF STRUCTURES DURING EARTHQUAKES

Characteristics of buildings affecting their behavior - Symmetry, regularity, 14 Hrs
stiffness, flexibility, strengthtime period, damping, ductility, materials and
method of construction - Ductile, Brittle and Fatigue fractures - Behavior of
structures on sloped ground - Behaviour of Structures with load bearing
walls – Brick / Stone /Mud masonry - Large inertia forces due to heavy
weight, Very low tensile / shear strengths and brittleness of walls, Stress
concentration at corners of openings, Unsymmetrical openings, Poor
mortars, Free standing masonry walls, Wall enclosures without roof –
Cracks in load bearing walls due to flexure and shear caused by
earthquake – Improvements in the behavior of reinforced masonry
structures - Behaviour of RCC Structures – Framed / Shear wall / Dual
structures - Shear failure of columns - Types of damages
in beams - Functions of stirrups in seismic beams - Outward bulging of
concrete and buckling of compression reinforcement of beams - Effect of
joints on the ductile behaviour of RCC / Steel members -
Behaviour of Steel structures - Types of joints, Joint collapse, Joint ductility -
Behaviour of Non-Structural elements in buildings during earthquakes -
Behaviour of brittle elements - Behaviour of structural
members under cyclic loading - Soil characteristics and its impact on
various types of structures during earth quake – Twisting of buildings
IV CONCEPTS OF DESIGN OF EARTHQUAKE RESISTING BUILDINGS
EarthQuake proof building - EarthQuake resisting building - Acceptable

damages to building elements under minor and frequent earth quakes,
moderate and occasional earthquakes, and strong but rare earth
quakes - General requirements of structures for earthquake resistance
and structural safety - Concepts of ductility, deformability and
damageability - Concept of base isolation - Ductile performance of
structures - Reinforcement detailing for ductility of RC structures -
Flexible building elements - Special requirements for RC columns and
beams to resist earthquake - Confining steel in columns - Special
confining reinforcement for Short columns - Maximum spacing of ties
and minimum lapping length of main bars in columns - Ductile
detailing of RC buildings - Joints of framed structures –
Reinforcements in Beam Column Joints - Providing Shear walls –
Arrangement of shear walls - Boundary elements of shear walls –
Reinforcements for shear walls - Advantages of shear walls in stilt
floors of RC buildings - Earthquake resistant features for masonry
buildings - Protection of openings in masonry walls - Masonry bond -
Horizontal bands or Ring beams at plinth / lintel / roof levels in masonry
- Horizontal / Vertical reinforcements in masonry walls - Framing of thin
load bearing walls – Reinforcement for hollow block masonry - Reduction
of earthquake effects - Base isolation technique - Types - Seismic dampers
- Types of Dampers: Viscous, Friction, Yielding dampers – Seismic
vibration control.
277 | P a g e
V RETROFITTING OF BUILDINGS 16Hrs
Evaluation, Repair, Restoration and Seismic Strengthening of Buildings:

Assessment of structural and non structural damages caused by
earthquakes, major and minor damages, Feasibility study for retrofitting –
Structural level retrofitting method and Member level retrofitting method
- Repair materials: Shotcrete, Epoxy resins, Epoxy mortar, Gypsum
Cement mortar, Quick setting mortars, Mechanical Anchors -
Techniques to restore original strength: Repair of minor and medium
cracks, Repair of major cracks , crushed concrete and fractured /
excessively yielded / buckled reinforcement - Seismic strengthening
techniques: Modification of roofs or floors, Insertion of new slab,
Stiffening existing slab, Anchoring the slab to supporting walls / beams -
Inserting new walls - Strengthening existing walls: Grouting, Use of
wire mesh, Connecting the walls, Pre stressing, Providing buttress -
Strengthening of RC members: Reinforced concrete rings around 10 Hrs
existing columns, Jacketing the existing weak beams, Welding new
steel to the old steel and replacing the cover, Pre stressing of old
beams - Introduction of additional load bearing elements in the
structure - Strengthening of Foundations : Improving drainage, Providing
apron, Adding RC strips with keys – Strengthening of soft or weak
stories of Existing buildings - Bracing of roof truss frames, Anchoring of
roof trusses to supporting walls .
REVISION AND TEST
Reference Book :
1. Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures by Pankaj Agarwal and Manish Shrikhande
(2010) PHI Learning Pvt Ltd
2. Guidelines for Earthquake Resistant Non Engineered Construction by The Associated
Cement Companies Ltd
3. Criteria for Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures - General Provisions and
Buildings, IS: 1893 ( Part 1 ) - 2002
4. Code of practice for ductile detailing of RC structures subjected to Seismic forces,
IS:13920-1993.
5. Earthquake Tips by C.V.R.Murty, IIT, Kanpur, Sponsored by BMTPC, New Delhi.
6. Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering Hand Book by Robert W.Day – McGRAW - HILL
7. Introduction to Earthquake Engineering by Shunzo Okamoto – University of Tokyo
Press
8. Repair and Seismic strengthening of buildings - Guidelines, IS:13935 - 2002
9. Dr Kamalesh Kumar, “Basic Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering”, New Age International
Publications, New Delhi, 2009
10. Robert W. Day, “Geotechnical Earthquakes Engineering Hand Book, Tata McGraw-Hill, New
Delhi, 2002
278 | P a g e
21083 EARTHQUAKE ENGINEERING ( ELECTIVE THEORY II )

PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15

1 Define the term “Epi centre”
2 Name any one of the severe earth quake of India
3 When Tsunami is generated due to earth quake ?
4 Name the different types of seismic waves
5 Define “inertia force” on structures due to earth quake
6 What is meant by “soft storey” ?
7 Whether the building as a whole is to be ductile or brittle for good seismic performance ?
8 List any two effects on a masonry wall due to a minor earth quake
9 What do you mean by stress concentration ?
10 What is the reason for twisting of buildings ?
11 Why buildings on slopes are more vulnerable to earth quakes ?
12 When a masonry wall is called reinforced masonry ?
13 What type of damages are expected during moderate and occasional earthquakes ?
14 Specify the requirement of a shear wall
15 Define “base isolation”
16 What are the different types of Dampers ?
17 What do you mean by retrofitting of buildings ?
18 What are the materials used for filling the cracks in masonry walls ?
19 How a damaged RC column could be repaired ?
20 Mention any two methods recommended for strengthening the old masonry structures
279 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21 (A) i) Explain briefly the structure of the earth, with a neat sketch
ii) Explain in detail how the earthquakes are being measured
(OR)
(B ) i) Write short notes on Plate Tectonics
ii) How earth quakes are classified based on their magnitude ?
22 ( A) Explain in detail with necessary sketches the effect of ground shaking on different types of
structures
(OR)
(B) How Architectural features affect buildings during earthquakes ? Explain with neat
sketches
23 (A) List out the various characteristics of buildings which affect their behavior during
earthquakes and explain how they affect
. (OR)
(B) Write short notes on:
(i) “joint collapse” in steel structures, (ii) “flexural cracks in load bearing walls” and
(iii) “effect of cyclic loading”
24 (A) Explain in detail the special requirements for RC columns and beams to resist the effect of
earthquakes
(OR)
(B) (i) How shear walls are to be arranged in a building with stilt floor ?
(ii) How the vibration of building elements due to earthquake can be controlled ?
25 (A) (i) Write a note on “stiffening of slabs”

(ii) Explain any one method of strengthening of foundation
.
(OR)
(B) (i) Explain how a soft storey of an existing multi-storey building can be strengthened
(ii) What is the necessity of bracing of roof truss frames ?
280 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
BUILDING SERVICES

281 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : BUILDING SERVICES ( ELECTIVE THEORY I )
Marks
BUILDING Internal Board
5 Hrs 80 Hrs Total
SERVICES Assessment Examination
25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
 To know principles of electrical services in buildings

 To describe electrical layout
 To explain mechanical services
 To know the principles of air conditioning
 To explain lighting in building
 To describe ventilation system
 To know fire protection in building
 To describe acoustics and sound installations
 To explain the types of maintenance work in building
 To describe defects and repair works in building
282 | P a g e
21084 BUILDING SERVICES ( ELECTIVE THEORY I )
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Contents: Theory
Unit Hours
Name of the Topic
I
1.1 ELECTRICAL SERVICES
14Hrs
Conventional symbols for electrical Installations – Main – Submain – Wiring
accessories – Wire, Cable, Switches, Wall plugs, Fuses and Cutouts – H.R.C
type, round type, cartridge type – Distribution boxes, circuit breaker, Junction
boxes – 2 pin and 3 pin sockets, lamp holder, ceiling roses, change over
switches –Various systems of wiring – wooden casing wiring, cleat wiring, CTS
wiring, conduit wiring – Insulation – Earthing – Electrical meters – Use of
generators, inverters, emergency lamps.
1.2 ELECTRICAL LAYOUT

Planning of Electrical Installations and distribution – Preparation of Electrical
layout for a small residence, small work shop, show room, school building etc
– Estimation of load.
II 2.1 MECHANICAL SERVICES 14Hrs

Lifts – Definition – Location – Sizes – Component parts – Lift well, Travel, Pit,
Hoist way, Machine, Buffer, Door Locks – Suspended rope, Lift car, Landing
Door, Call Indicator, Call Push - Different types of Elevators – Freight
elevators, Passengers elevators, Hospital elevators – Dumbwaiters and
vertical conveyors – Escalators – Locations and Functions – Advantages of
Escalators.
2.2 AIR CONDITIONING

Definition – Purpose – Principles – Temperature control, Air velocity control,.
Humidity control – Air Conditioning Systems – Component parts – Air pumps,
Air delivery system, Air Distribution system – Cleaners – Filters, Spray
washers, Electric precipitators – Types of Air Conditioners – Central type –
Window Type –Split unit.
III 3.1 LIGHTING

Natural and Artificial Lighting – Requirements of good lighting – Day light
factors – Day light Penetration – Aims of good lighting – General Principles of
openings to afford good lighting – Reflection factors –Illumination – Units of 14Hrs
measurement – Lux, candela, Luminous flux –Orientation of buildings –
External reflected component – Internal reflected component – Necessity of
artificial lighting – Arrangement of luminaries – Distribution of Illumination –
Utilization factor – Temperature rise due to artificial lighting – Remedial
measures.
283 | P a g e
Unit Hours
Name of the Topic
3.2 VENTILATION
Definition - Necessity – Types – Natural / Mechanical Ventilation – wind effect
– Factors to be considered in the design of Ventilation – respiration, vitiation
of air, air changes, heat balance of body – General rules for Natural
ventilation – Advantages and Disadvantages of Mechanical Ventilation –
Methods of Mechanical Ventilation – Combined Systems.
IV
4.1 FIRE PROTECTION
14Hrs
Causes and Effects of fire – Precautionary Measures – Factors to be
considered for limiting fire spread area – Characteristics of fire resisting
materials – General requirements for fire resisting buildings – Fire protection
systems – Fire exits – General requirements as per NBC 2005 – maximum
travel distance – Horizontal exit, roof exit / fire lifts, external stairs – Fire
fighting installations.
4.2 ACOUSTICS AND SOUND INSULATIONS

Acoustics of Buildings – Characteristics of Sound – Pitch or frequency,
intensity, tone – Measurement of intensity of sound - Bel & Decibel –
Behavior of sound and its effects - Transmission, reflection, absorption -
Echoes, reverberation – common acoustical defects - Requirements of good
Acoustics – Principles and factors to be considered in acoustical designs –
Sound absorbents – Types – Absorption coefficients - Sound Insulation of
buildings - General factors to be considered and constructional measures
to be followed for noise control in residential buildings.
5.1 MAINTENANCE OF BUILDINGS

V Introduction - Maintenance works in buildings - Painting – Flooring – sinking 14Hrs
of floors – Doors and windows – Termite attack – Sanitary appliances –
Water supply and drainage system – leakages – Cracks in concrete – Types –
Cracks in walls – types - Common methods of crack repair – preventive
maintenance - corrosion of steel elements - special precautions for repairs
of building
5.2 DEFECTS AND REPAIR WORKS IN BUILDINGS

Defects in buildings - Prevention of defects in buildings – Major causes of
defects – Treatment of toilet sunken portion – Improper laying of weathering
course - Maintenance works - Specification for weathering course - Lime
jelly concrete with tiles - Thermal insulation combined with water
proofing for flat concrete roofs - Water proofing - Expansion joints -
Repair of rain water leakage in buildings.
284 | P a g e
Reference Book :
1. National Building code of India – 2005, Bureau of Indian Standards, New Delhi
2. Building construction, P.C.Varghese, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi
3. Building construction, Dr.B.C.Punmia, Laxmi Publications (p) Ltd, New Delhi
4. A text book on Building services, R.Udyakumar, Eswar Press, Chennai
5. Building repair and maintenance management, P.S.Gahlot, CBS Publishers & distributors (p) Ltd.
6. Maintenance of Buildings, A C Panchdhari, New Age International Publications, Chennai.
285 | P a g e
PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15
1. Mention any two symbols for electrical installations.

2. What is the use of junction box?
3. Define Earthing.
4. Mention the use of electrical meter.
5. What is the use of lift?
6. Write any two types of elevators.
7. Mention any two purposes of air conditioning.
8. Write any two parts of air conditioner.
9. Write any two requirements of good lighting.
10. Define lux.
11. Write the necessity of ventilation.
12. Mention any two disadvantages of mechanical ventilation.
13. Write any two causes of fire.
14. Define fire alarm system.
15. Write any two characteristics of sound.
16. Define noise absorption coefficients.
17. Write any two types of maintenance works in buildings.
18. Write any two types of cracks in concrete.
19. Write any two defects in buildings.
20. Define expansion joint.
286 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21 (A) Explain the various wiring systems adopted in building

OR
(B) Draw a neat sketch of layout of electrical fittings in a residential building
22 (A) Describe escalator and its uses

OR
(B) Explain in detail about indoor air conditioners
23 (A) Describe about necessity of artificial lighting

OR
(B) What are the methods of Mechanical Ventilation and explain any one in detail?
24 (A) Explain the factors to be considered for limiting fire spreading area?
OR
(B) State the different factors to be considered in acoustical design
25 (A) Describe maintenance of water supply and drainage system in building

OR
(B) Explain about thermal insulation combined with water proofing for flat concrete roofs
287 | P a g e
PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15
1. What is the use of two way switches?

2. What is meant by CTS wiring
3. Define inverters
4. Mention any two electrical installations
5. What is meant by Hoist?
6. Mention the function of dumbwaiters
7. Define Humidity
8. What is the use of Spray washers?
9. What is meant by artificial lighting
10. Define luminous flux
11. Define mechanical ventilation
12. Write any two advantages of natural ventilation
13. Define fire exit
14. Write any two fire fighting installations
15. What is meant by frequency of sound?
16. Write any two sound insulation materials
17. Write any two maintenance works for doors and windows
18. What is meant by preventive maintenance?
19. Write any two causes of defects in buildings
20. Write any two water proofing materials
288 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21 (A) Explain the various methods of Earthing

OR
(B) Draw a neat sketch of layout of electrical fittings for a school building
22 (A) Explain in detail the different types of elevators

OR
(B) What are the types of air conditioners and explain any one type in detail
23 (A) i) What are the requirements of good lighting?

ii) What are the aims of good lighting?
OR
(B) What are the methods of Natural Ventilation and explain any one method in detail
24 (A) What are the characteristics of fire resisting materials?

OR
(B) State the different factors to be considered and construction measures to be followed for
noise control in residential buildings
25 (A) What are the various types of cracks in concrete and explain the reasons in detail.
OR
(B) Explain the causes for about repair of rain water leakage in buildings and the remedial
measures.
289 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
ESTIMATING AND COSTING II

290 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : ESTIMATING AND COSTING II
Marks
Internal Board
Total
ESTIMATING AND Assessment Examination
5 Hrs 80 Hrs
COSTING II
25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
 To write specifications for various materials and for different items of works.
 To write Technical reports on the proposed projects
 To prepare data for various items of works using Standard data & Schedule of Rates.
 To prepare detailed estimate of quantities of various items of works for P.H.Engineering
structures using Trade System.
 To prepare detailed estimate of quantities of various items of works for Bridges and Road
works using Trade System.
 To calculate the value of a building / property; to fix rent for a building adopting suitable
method.
291 | P a g e
21064 ESTIMATING AND COSTING II
DETAILED SYLLABUS
Contents: Theory
I 1.1 Specification Writing 10 Hrs

Specification – Necessity – Importance of specifications- Types of
specifications – General specification , Detailed specification and Standard
specification - Essential requirements of specifications – General and
Technical provisions of detailed specifications - Specifications for various
materials like Cement, Sand, Brick, Timber, Stone aggregate,
Reinforcement steel, Tiles, Bitumen, Water etc- General specification for
a building – General specification for a Culvert - General specification
for a Concrete / Tar Road project - Examples—Detailed specifications for
works such as Earth work excavation, Foundation concrete, Stone /
Brick masonry, Doors / Windows, RCC in columns / beams / slabs,
Plastering, Flooring, Painting / Varnishing, DPC, A.C sheet roofing, Rain
water pipes, Centering for roofing, Weathering course, Under reamed Piles,
Water bound macadam / Tar roads, Surface dressing with bitumen,
Revetments, etc- Examples - Steps involved in writing Standard
specification – Advantages of Standard specifications - Writing standard
specifications with reference to Tamil Nadu Building Practice / Indian
Standards / NBC - Examples
1.2 Report writing
Definition of report – Types – Necessity - Documents to accompany the
report - Points to be considered while writing technical reports
Writing typical Technical reports for the proposed projects such as:
Construction of Buildings (Residential / Hospital / School/ Community Hall)
Laying a village road (WBM / Tar / Concrete road)
Construction of a bridge/ culvert across a river
Construction of a Pedestrian Sub-way/ Foot over bridge across a City road
Water supply system for a village
Sewage treatment plant for a residential colony in a sub urban area
Construction of a new bus terminus in a developing town
II 2.1 Valuation 18 Hrs

Value - Difference between Cost and Value - Purpose of valuation –
Definition of terms: Capital cost, Gross income and Net income, Outgoings,
Capitalized value and Capital value, Scrap value, Salvage value,
Obsolescence, Sinking fund, Depreciation, Years purchase, Book value,
Market value, Rateable value, Deferred value of land, Lease, Mortgage,
Annuity, Amortization - Factors affecting the value of a property -
Classification of Properties - Types of Leases - Problems on
determination of Sinking Fund - Problems on calculation of Depreciation
- Methods of valuation of Buildings - Valuation based on Comparision /
Rent / Profit / Present value - Methods of valuation of Lands -
Mathematics of Valuation – Valuation Tables - Problems on Valuation of
Buildings / Properties
292 | P a g e
II 2.2 Rent Calculation

Fixation of rent – Definition of terms: Standard rent, Fair rent or
Reasonable rent, Economical rent, Market rent, Rent certificate - Rent
control – Factors influencing the rent of a building - Problems on rent
calculation – Fixing rent of a Private building used by Government –
Fixing rent of a Government building used by its employees – Fixing
rent of a Government building rented to Private parties
III 3.1 Analysis of rates for Sanitary and Water supply works 12 Hrs
Earth work in trenches - Timbering of trenches - Laying stone ware /
RCC / GI pipes – Lead joint for cast iron pipes - Cutting and jointing
G.I.Pipes, PVC Pipes and Stoneware Pipes - Constructing a man hole
in the sewage line of a residence - Providing a dispersion trench for the
septic tank of a residential flat – Supplying a Ferro cement circular ring for
well sinking - Laying PVC Plumbing lines concealed in to brick masonry
walls - Supplying and fixing Indian type water closets with flushing tanks -
Supplying and fixing European type water closet with flushing tank -
Supplying and fixing a wash basin with tap
3.2 Analysis of rates for Bridge/ Road works and Miscellaneous items
Random Rubble Stone masonry in Abutments and Piers - Providing form

work for Deck slabs - R.C.C for Columns / Beams / Deck Slab – Parapets -
Hand rails - Earth filling in embankments - Soling for a WBM road - Laying
WBM road over the existing soling - Surface dressing - Surface Blinding -
Providing Pre mix carpet - Laying Concrete roads - Apron and Revetment
works in Canals -Wooden frames for doors - Paneled doors - Glazed
windows - Steel Grill gates – Steel grills for windows - Supplying and fixing
Aluminum partitions - Providing wooden shutters to lofts - Expansion joint in
R.C roof (Exposure to use of software in Analysis of rates - not for
examination)
IV Taking Off Quantities of P.H.Engineering Structures using Trade 16 Hrs

System
Preparing detailed estimate using Trade system and Take off

quantities for all items of works in the following P.H. Engineering
Structures:
1 Septic tanks with dispersion trench / soak pit

2 Open Well with Masonry Steining
3 Rain water harvesting- Shallow Recharge Well
4 Square RCC Over Head Tank on Four columns with Staging
293 | P a g e
V Taking off Quantities of Road / Bridge Structures using Trade System 16 Hrs
Preparing detailed estimate using Trade system and Take off quantities
for all items of works in the following Road / Bridge Structures:
1 Water Bound Macadam Road

2 Cement Concrete Road with side drains
3 Single span Slab Culvert
4 Tee Beam Bridge
8 Hrs
REVISION AND TEST
Reference Book :
1. Rangawala, “Estimating & Costing” , Charotor Publishing;
2. N.A.Shaw, “Quantity Surveying & Valuation”, Khanna Publishers;
3. L.N.Dutta, “Estimating & Costing”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons
4. Bridie, “Estimating & Costing”
5. Indian Standard Code of Practice, IS:1200.
6. Civil Estimating, Casting and Valuation – Kalson Publication Ludhiuyana.
7. Vazirani & Chandolu,” Estimating and Costing” 2001.
294 | P a g e
21064 ESTIMATING AND COSTING II
PART- A
Marks 15 x 1 = 15

1. Differentiate general specification and detailed specification.
2. What particulars are to be incorporated in a detailed specification of materials?
3. Write any two points to be considered while writing a technical report for a project.
4. What are the details required for writing a general report on a project?.
5. Define the term “salvage value”
6. Write the formula used to calculate the annual installment of sinking fund
7. Define “fair rent”.
8. Write any two factors which govern the rent of a building.
9. Why rates are to be analysed separately for each project site?
10. What particulars you need to arrive at a reasonable rate for earth work in trenches?
11. Write any two materials for which the lead cost is more than their actual cost.
12. What do you mean by “observed data”?
13. Write any three items of works involved in the construction of a man hole.
14. How you estimate the quantity of steel reinforcement for various RCC elements?.
15. Write any two items of works for which lump sum provisions are being made in the estimate of
an over head tank.
16. Where steining walls are provided?
17. Write any three items of works involved in the laying of a water bound macadam road.
18. What are the works involved in the construction of side drains for a road?.
19. State the unit of measurement for the fabrication of steel for the deck slab of a culvert.
20. What will be the unit of measurement for the wearing coat of a bridge?
295 | P a g e
PART- B
Marks 5 x 12 = 60
21. A (i) Write a detailed specification for the coarse aggregate to be used in reinforced cement
concrete.
(ii) Write general specification for any six items of works involved in the construction of a slab
culvert.
OR
B (i) Write a detailed report about the proposed new bus terminus for a developing town.
(ii) List out the documents and sketches to be enclosed with the above report.
22 A (i) Write a small note on valuation.
(ii) A building was constructed in the year 2011 for a total cost of Rs.40 lakhs. Its salvage
value in year 2030 is expected to be Rs.15 lakhs. Find the book value of the building in the
year 2020 by sinking fund method, and also determine the annual installment of sinking
fund, assuming the rate of interest as 8%.
OR
B. (i) How the nominal lease rents are fixed for Government buildings when they are rented to
service associations of the department employees?
(ii) A person is having a house building worth Rs.12,00,000 at present market value,
constructed 10 years back in a plot area of 240 m2. The present market value of land in
the locality is Rs.3000 per m2. The cost of amenities provided to the building is
Rs.1,20,000. Allowing a rate of depreciation of 2% and taking the nominal interest on
investments as 9%, fix a fair monthly rent to the building.
23. (A) (Analyze and determine the rates for the following items of work with the given data.
i) Supplying and laying of stone ware glazed pipes and specials for sewers 100 mm dia,
lowering in trenches upto a depth of 1.5m, jointing with cement mortar 1:1 including
testing but excluding earth work excavation – 1 m
(ii) Casting and supplying 1200mm dia, 300mm high, 25mm thick ferro cement ring for
well sinking -1No
296 | P a g e
OR
(B) (i) 20 mm thick Premix Chipping carpet – 1m2.
(ii) Rough stone dry packing for aprons and rivetments – 1 m3.
Material and Labour requirement:

1.Supplying and laying of stone ware glazed pipes – 30m
600mm length 100mm dia pipes 50 No.
Cement 18 kg
Sand (medium) 0.11 m3
Spun yarn 2.0 kg
Bitumen, Tools&Plants, Testing etc Rs.400.00(LS)
Mazdoor Category II 3.0 No..
2. Casting and supplying 25mm thick ferro cement ring for well sinking -10 Nos
Stone chips 0.30 m3
Sand (medium) 0.15 m3
Cement 107 kg
3mm gauge wire mesh 12 m2
Chicken mesh 24 m2
Labour for shifting and curing Rs.200 per 10 Nos
2
3. 20 mm thick Premix Chipping carpet – 100m .
Binder Asphalt 255 kg

Stone chips 2.7 m3
Sand 0.3 m3
Hire charges for Boiler, Roller, Mixer and cost of fire wood, brushes etc LS :Rs.950.00
297 | P a g e
4.Rough stone dry packing for aprons and rivetments – 10 m3
Rough stones 11 m3
Wooders 3.5 No.
Cost of materials and lead particulars:
Material Unit Cost Lead Rate for Handling

( Rs) (kM) Lead/kM) charges
(Rs) (Rs)
Cement 50kg 280.00 4 2.00 5.00
Sand m3 250.00 30 20.00 60.00
Rough Stone m3 800.00 20 20.00 80.00
Stone chips m3 520.00 20 18.00 40.00
SW pipe 100mm dia 0.6m 60.00 4 0.50 0.50
Spurn yarn 1kg 16.00 -- -- --
Binder Asphalt 1kg 21.00 -- -- --
3mm gauge wire mesh 1m2 150.00 -- -- --
Chicken mesh 1m2 40.00 -- -- --
Cost of Labour:
Mason Category I Rs.550.00 per day

Mason Category II Rs.500.00 per day
Wooder Rs.450.00 per day
Mazdoor Category I Rs.400.00 per day
Mazdoor Category II Rs.275.00 per day
24. A. Take the quantity of R.C.C in column footings for the over head tank shown in Sketch 1
using Trade system
OR
B. Take the area of plastering of the side walls (inner and outer) of the over head tank shown
Sketch 1 using Trade system
(Sketch 1 – A plan and sectional elevation of a RCC over head tank with flat RCC roof.)
25. A. Take the quantity of brick work in abutment and wing walls of the Tee-beam bridge shown in
Sketch 2, using Trade system
OR
B. Take the quantities of RCC in Beams and Slabs of the Tee beam bridge shown in Sketch 2
using Trade system.
(Sketch 2 – A sectional plan and sectional elevation of a single span Tee beam bridge).
298 | P a g e
SKETCH – 1
299 | P a g e
Half Plan at Top and Bottom
SKETCH -2
300 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
HYDRAULICS AND PLUMBING LAB PRACTICE

301 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : HYDRAULICS AND PLUMBING LAB PRACTICE
Marks
HYDRAULICS AND Internal Board
Total
PLUMBING LAB 3 Hrs 48 Hrs Assessment Examination
Objectives:
On completion of the course the student will be familiar with:
 measuring the fluid pressure using manometers
 setting of rain gauges
 determination of co-efficent of discharges of Orifice, mouthpiece, orifice meter,venturimeter,

notchec etc.,
 determination of pipe friction factor
 drawing characteristic curves for centrifugal and Reciprocating pumps.
 Cutting , threading and joining G.I pipes
 Planning and providing plumbing lines to bathrooms,pumps etc.,
302 | P a g e
ALLOCATION OF MARKS
Part - A Part - B
S.No Description
Max. Marks(60) Max.Marks(10)
1 Procedure 10 2
2 Tabulation and Observation 25 2
3 Calculations 15 0
4 Sketch / Graph 5 4
5 Accuracy of result 5 2
6 Viva-Voce 5
21065 HYDRAULICS AND PLUMBING LAB PRACTICE

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
HYDRAULICS LAB 32 Hrs
1. Measurement of Fluid Pressure using Manometers and Pressure Gauges ( Not for
Examinations)
2. Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem.
3. Flow through Venturimeter – Determination of Co-efficient of Discharge.
4. Flow through Orificemeter – Determination of Co-efficient of Discharge.
5. Setting of Rain Gauge in the campus and methods of measuring the Rainfall as per standard
Norms may be explained to the students and Rain fall Records may be maintained in the
Laboratory for reference. (Not for examination)
Flow through orifice :
6. Determination of Co-efficient of Discharge by Time fall - Head method
7. Determination of Co-efficient of Discharge by Constant head method
Flow through external cylindrical mouth piece :
8. Determination of Co-efficient of Discharge by Timing fall in head method
9. Determination of Co-efficient of Discharge by Constant head method
Flow through pipes :
10. Determination of friction factor for the given GI pipe / PVC pipe.
303 | P a g e
Flow through notch :
11. Determination of Co-efficient of Discharge for Rectangular Notch / V-Notch
Pumps :
12. Reciprocating pump – To draw characteristic curves.
13. Centrifugal pump – To draw characteristic curves
PLUMBING LAB 10 hours

1. Identifying Pipe fittings used in water supply and Sanitary Wares, (with actual models
displayed on board- Examination Viva voce only)
2. Cutting, Threading and Joining of G.I. pipes/ Cutting and Pasting of PVC pipes using solvents.
3. Making a Bathroom connection from an existing Water supply Main (making Indents,
drawing a neat sketch of the connection with details).
4. Making Suction and Delivery pipe connections to a centrifugal pump (making Indents,
drawing a neat sketch of the connection with details).
Note : In the examination the students have to be given one experiment from
A) HydraulicsLab (60 marks)
B) and one exercise from Plumbing Lab (10 marks)
VIVA-VOCE ( 5 marks)
REFERENCE :
1. Hydraulic Lab Manual Compiled - T.T.T.I. - Chennai – 113
2. Ghosh and Talapohia - Experimental Hydraulic - Khanna Publishers - New Delhi
304 | P a g e
21065 HYDRAULICS AND PLUMBING LAB PRACTICE

SI.No Questions Marks
I. Determine the co-efficient of discharge of orifice / mouthpiece by

constant head method and draw a graph H Vs Qa. 60
II. Determine the co-efficient of discharge of orifice/ mouthpiece by

Variable Head method. Draw a graph T Vs (√H1 – √H2.) 60
III. Verify the Bernoulli’s theorem by conducting an experiment in the

Bernoulli’s apparatus. Draw the hydraulic gradient line and total energy line. 60
IV. Determine the co-efficient of discharge for the given venturimeter

and draw a graph H Vs Qa. 60
V. Determine the co-efficient of discharge for the given orificemeter

and draw a graph H Vs Qa. 60
VI. Determine the co-efficient of discharges of rectangular / triangular /

trapezoidal notch and draw a graph H Vs Qa 60
VII. Determine the friction factor for the given pipe and draw a graph hf Vs Qa. 60
VIII. Draw the characteristic curves and determine the efficiency of the given
Centrifugal pump 60
IX. Draw the characteristic curve and determine the efficiency of the given
reciprocating pump 60
X. Make suction and delivery pipe connection for a centrifugal pump. 10
XI. Make bathroom connection using P.V.C pipes/GI pipes 10
XII. Provide a thread on the given G I pipe and fix the coupling given. 10
305 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN CIVIL

ENGINEERING PRACTICE

306 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE
Marks
COMPUTER Internal Board
Total
APPLICATIONS IN Assessment Examination
5 Hrs 80 Hrs
CIVIL ENGINEERING
RATIONALE:
In Diploma level Engineering education skill development plays a vital role. The skill
development can be achieved by on hand experience in handling various instruments, apparatus
and equipment. This is accomplished by doing engineering related experiments in practical classes
in various laboratories.
GUIDELINES:
 All the experiments given in the list of experiments should be completed and given
for the end semester practical examination.
 In order to develop best skills in handling Instruments/Equipment and taking readings
in the practical classes, every two students should be provided with a separate
experimental setup for doing experiments in the laboratory.
 The external examiners are requested to ensure that a single experimental question
should not be given to more than four students while admitting a batch of 30 students
during Board Examinations.
307 | P a g e
21066 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
I ELECTRONIC SPREAD SHEET USING SOFTWARE 15 Hours

Solving problems involving estimation, analysis and design
1. Prepare the Estimate sheet with given data (provide all the measurement details) and calculate
the quantity using formula bar.
2. Prepare the Abstract sheet for the given data and calculate Amount and Total Amount using
Formula bar ( Use separate column for rates and units)
3. Design and Analysis problems
i) Calculate Area and Elongation using Formula bar
ii) Calculate Effective depth‘d’ and Area of Steel ‘Ast ’using Formula Bar
4. For given dimension of Masonry/R.C.C Dam ie. top width, bottom width, height of Dam , height
of water, Specific weight of masonry/R.C.C. , Sp.wt of Water etc,. Find the base pressure and
check the stability of the dam
5. Finding centre of gravity; IZZ and IYY of I, L,T and channel sections
Note : In addition to the above, similar exercises may be given for practice
II RCC DETAILING USING SOFTWARE 24 Hours

Generation of detailed drawings for given specification and Preparation of Bar
Bending schedule using available R.C.C detailing package for the following works:
Cross section and longitudinal section of:
6. Continuous one way slab (with three equal spans)

8. Restrained / Continuous two - way slab (any one panel)
9. Singly reinforced rectangular beam
10. Doubly reinforced continuous rectangular beam with two equal span
11. Single span Tee Beams supporting continuous slab
13. Lintel and Sunshade
14. R.C.C Column with square Isolated footing
308 | P a g e
III STEEL DETAILING USING SOFTWARE 12 Hours
Detailed drawing generation for given specification using available steel detailing package for the
following works with CAD environment:
15. C.S and L.S of beam with single I-section, Channel section and Double I and Channel section
16. Sectional elevation of column, beam and joints
17. Sectional elevation of simple roof truss and their joints
( Detailing of members with welded joints like column with base plate, beam joints and
roof truss joints )
IV RCC STRUCTURES ANALYSIS USING SOFTWARE 12 Hours
18. Carry out the analysis and design of RCC structures (single storey buildings) using any
available Software Package
V USING PROJECT MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE 6 Hours
19. Develop the CPM / PERT Network for the proposed simple building project using available
Project Management Software Packages
VI DRAWING MAPS USING GIS SOFTWARE 6 Hours
20. Develop Aerial map of given area using available GIS software
309 | P a g e
21066 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE
PART A (Any one by lot)

1. Using MS excel prepare the detailed estimate sheet with given data and calculate the quantity
using formula bar
2. Using MS excel prepare the abstract sheet with given data and calculate the quantity using
formula bar
3. Using MS excel prepare the abstract sheet with given data and calculate amount and total
amount using formula bar
4. Using MS excel calculate the area and elongation using formula bar
5. Using MS excel calculate the effective depth and area of steel for a rectangular singly
reinforced RC beam using formula bar
6. Using MS excel calculate the base pressure and check the stability of the masonry / RCC dam
7. Using MS excel find centre of gravity given I, T, L and Channel section
PART B (Any one by lot)

8. Generate detailed drawing for cross section and longitudinal section of a lintel cum sunshade
for the given specification and bar bending schedule using RCC detailing package
9. Generate detailed drawing for plan & section of a column & footing (Square footing) the given
specification and bar bending schedule using R.C.C detailing package
10. Generate detailed drawing for plan & sectional view of one-way slab continuous slab (three
equal spans) for the given specification and bar bending schedule using R.C.C detailing
package
11. Generate detailed drawing longitudinal section and cross section of continuous rectangular
beam (three equal spans) for the given specification using software packages
12. Generate detailed drawing for plan & sectional view of two way simply supported slab for the
given specification using software packages
13. Generate detailed drawing for plan & sectional view of dog legged staircase for the given
specification using software packages
14. Draw the cross section & longitudinal section of beam with single I section, channel section
using software packages
15. Draw the cross section & longitudinal section of doubly I section and channel section using
software packages
16. Draw the sectional elevation of simple column & footing using software packages
17. Draw the sectional elevation of simple roof truss using software packages
18. Carryout the analysis and design of R.C.C structures single storey building using software
packages
19. Develop the CPM / PERT network for the proposed simple building project using software
packages
310 | P a g e
IN BOARD EXAMINATION, QUESTIONS WILL BE CHOSEN AS FOLLOWS
By lot one question each in Part A & Part B
Part A - 30 marks
Part B - 40 marks
( Plan / Cross section / longitudinal section )
Viva - voce - 5 marks
Total - 100 marks
311 | P a g e
L - SCHEME
2011 - 2012
PROJECT WORK

312 | P a g e
L-SCHEME

Course Code : 1010
Subject Title : PROJECT WORK
Marks
Internal Board
Total
PROJECT Assessment Examination
6 Hrs 96 Hrs
WORK
25 75 100 3 Hrs
OBJECTIVES:
The objective of the project work is to enable the students to work in convenient groups of
not more than six members in a group on a project involving theoretical and experimental studies
related to Civil Engineering. Every Project Work shall have a Guide who is a member of the faculty
of Civil Engineering of the college. The hours allotted for this course shall be utilized by the students
to receive directions from the Guide, on library reading, laboratory work, computer analysis or field
work and also to present in periodical seminars the progress made in the project. Each student
shall finally produce a comprehensive report covering background information, literature Survey,
problem statement, Project work details and conclusions.
This experience of project work shall help the student in expanding his / her knowledge base
and also provide opportunity to utilise the creative ability and inference capability.
WORKS INVOLVED IN PROJET WORK:
Collection of Data from various Journals and Civil Engineering Magazines about the list of Projects
given below- Select a suitable project based on the data collected and available resources in your
locality -Surveyed Site Plan – Site particulars – Preparation of Architectural Drawings – soil type in
the location – Specification for materials & construction procedure - Structural design – Preparation
of Detailed Estimate, Data as per Current schedule of Rates and Abstract Estimate – Structural
Drawings – Preparation of Report about the project.
313 | P a g e
IMPORTANT DOCUMENTS TO BE REFERRED FOR THE ABOVE ACTIVITIES:
Sl. No Activity Reference
1. Preparation of Architectural Drawings 1. Building Regulations of Locality

2. National Building Code , etc.
2. Structural design 1. Relevant IS code for masonry, steel

structures etc.
2. IS 456 for Reinforced Cement Concrete.
3. Hand book on detailing for reinforcement
(SP-34)
3. Specification of material and work procedure 1. Construction procedure by State Govt.

organization viz. PWD , Highways, etc.
2. Construction procedure by Central Govt.
organization viz. CPWD , Railways, etc.
3. Specification by Architect etc.,
Minimum Marks for Pass is 50 out of which minimum 35 marks should be obtained out of 75 marks
in the board Examination alone.
 Implement the theoretical and practical knowledge gained through the curriculum into an
application suitable for a real practical working environment preferably in an industrial
environment
 Get exposure on industrial environment and its work ethics.
 Understand what entrepreneurship is and how to become an entrepreneur.
 Learn and understand the gap between the technological knowledge acquired through
curriculum and the actual industrial need and to compensate it by acquiring additional
knowledge as required.
 Carry out cooperative learning through synchronous guided discussions within the class in
key dates, asynchronous document sharing and discussions, as well as to prepare
collaborative edition of the final project report.
 Understand the facts and importance of environmental management.
 Understand and gain knowledge about disaster management
INTERNAL ASSESSMENT:
The internal assessment should be calculated based on the review of the progress of the work done
by the student periodically as follows.
Detail of assessment Period of assessment Max. Marks

th
First Review 6 week 10
Second Review 14th week 10
Attendance Entire semester 5
Total 25
314 | P a g e
EVALUATION FOR BOARD EXAMINATION:
Details of Mark allocation Max Marks

Marks for Report Preparation, Demo, Viva-voce 45
Marks for answers of 15 questions which is to be set by the
external examiner from the given question bank consisting of
questions in the following three topics Entrepreneurship, Disaster
Management and Environmental Management. Out of fifteen 30
questions five questions to appear from each of the above topics
i.e. 5 questions x 3 topics = 15 questions
15 questions x 2marks = 30 Marks
Total 75
DETAILED SYLLABUS
ENTREPRENEURSHIP, ENVIRONMENTAL & DISASTER MANAGEMENT
1. ENTREPRENEURSHIP
1.1 Introduction – Entrepreneur - characteristics of Entrepreneur - contributions of an

Entrepreneur - functions of entrepreneur - Barriers to entrepreneurship - Roll of
government in Entrepreneurial development.
1.2 Small scale industries (SSI) - SSI role in country’s economic growth – importance of SSI -
starting of an SSI - Government organization and Non-governmental organizations
supporting SSI - DIC,NSIC,SIDO,KVIC, Development banks and their objectives - role of
commercial banks in assisting SSI - Women entrepreneurs and opportunities – Subsidy
and concessions to Small Scale Industries.
2. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT
2.1 Introduction – Environmental Ethics – Assessment of Socio Economic Impact –

Environmental Audit – Mitigation of adverse impact on Environment – Importance of
Pollution Control – Types of Industries and Industrial Pollution.
2.2 Solid waste management – Characteristics of Industrial wastes – Methods of Collection,
transfer and disposal of solid wastes – Converting waste to energy – Hazardous waste
management Treatment technologies.
2.3 Waste water management – Characteristics of Industrial effluents – Treatment and
disposal methods – Pollution of water sources and effects on human health.
2.4 Air pollution management – Sources and effects – Dispersion of air pollutants – Air
pollution control methods – Air quality management.
2.5 Noise pollution management – Effects of noise on people – Noise control methods.
315 | P a g e
3. DISASTER MANAGEMENT
3.1 Introduction – Disasters due to natural calamities such as Earthquake, Rain, Flood,
Hurricane, Cyclones etc – Man made Disasters – Crisis due to fires, accidents, strikes etc
– Loss of property and life..
3.2 Disaster Mitigation measures – Causes for major disasters – Risk Identification – Hazard
Zones – Selection of sites for Industries and residential buildings – Minimum distances
from Sea – Orientation of Buildings – Stability of Structures – Fire escapes in buildings -
Cyclone shelters – Warning systems.
3.3 Disaster Management – Preparedness, Response, Recovery – Arrangements to be
made in the industries / factories and buildings – Mobilization of Emergency Services -
Search and Rescue operations – First Aids – Transportation of affected people – Hospital
facilities – Fire fighting arrangements – Communication systems – Restoration of Power
supply – Getting assistance of neighbors / Other organizations in Recovery and
Rebuilding works – Financial commitments – Compensations to be paid – Insurances –
Rehabilitation.
LIST OF QUESTIONS
1. ENTREPRENEURSHIP
1. Define the term Entrepreneur.

2. What is Entrepreneurship? Explain.
3. List the various stages of decisions an entrepreneur has to make before reaching the goal of
his project.
4. What is innovation?
5. State briefly the role of an entrepreneur in the economic growth of a country.
6. List the characteristics of an Entrepreneur.
7. What are the critical elements of an Entrepreneur?
8. State the major functions of an Entrepreneur.
9. What are barriers to Entrepreneurship?
10. Define Small Scale Industry.
11. What are the qualities of Entrepreneur?
12. What are the benefits of Entrepreneur?
13. What are the various SSI that can flourish in your district?
14. Identify the infrastructural needs for an industry.
15. What are the various agencies involved in the establishment and development of various
SSI?
16. Name some of the agencies funding SSI.
316 | P a g e
17. Explain the roles played by Government in Entrepreneural development.
18. What are the various concessions and incentives available for a SSI.
19. Name some consumer products with wide demand that can be manufactured by a SSI?
20. What is feasibility study?
21. What is the importance of SSI?
22. What is DIC? State its functions.
23. What is NSIC? State its functions.
24. What is SIDO? State its functions.
25. Name the Development Banks in India working towards Entrepreneurial
development.
26. State the role of commercial bank in assisting SSI sector.
27. What are the different phases of Entrepreneurial Development programme?
28. What is an Industrial Estate?
29. What are the facilities available in an Industrial Estate?
30. Identify the various training agencies associated with SSI.
31. List the governmental agencies from whom you shall get financial assistance for a SSI.
32. What is KVIC? State its objectives.
33. Name some state finance corporations.
34. What are the steps involved in preparing a feasibility report?
35. What are the factors to be considered regarding raw materials for a SSI?
36. What are the features of a SSI?
37. What are the advantages of becoming an Entrepreneur?
38. Name the Organizations offering assistance for the development of Women entrepreneurs.
39. State the business opportunities for Women entrepreneurs.
40. State the different subsidies given to SSI’s.
2. ENVIRONMENTRAL MANAGEMENT
1. What is the responsibility of an Engineer-in-charge of an Industry with respect to Public
Health?
2. Define Environmental Ethic.
3. How Industries play their role in polluting the environment?
4. What is the necessity of pollution control? What are all the different organizations you know,
which deal with pollution control?
5. List out the different types of pollutions caused by a Chemical / Textile / Leather / Automobile
/ Cement factory.
6. What is meant by Hazardous waste?
317 | P a g e
7. Define Industrial waste management.
8. Differentiate between garbage, rubbish, refuse and trash based on their composition and
source.
9. Explain briefly how the quantity of solid waste generated in an industry could be reduced.
10. What are the objectives of treatments of solid wastes before disposal?
11. What are the different methods of disposal of solid wastes?
12. Explain how the principle of recycling could be applied in the process of waste minimization.
13. Define the term ‘Environmental Waste Audit’.
14. List and discuss the factors pertinent to the selection of landfill site.
15. Explain the purpose of daily cover in a sanitary landfill and state the minimum desirable depth
of daily cover.
16. Describe any two methods of converting waste into energy.
17. What actions, a local body such as a municipality could take when the agency appointed for
collecting and disposing the solid wastes fails to do the work continuously for number of
days?
18. Write a note on Characteristics of hazardous waste.
19. What is the difference between municipal and industrial effluent ?
20. List few of the undesirable parameters / pollutants anticipated in the effluents from oil refinery
industry / thermal power plants / textile industries / woolen mills / dye industries /
electroplating industries / cement plants / leather industries (any two may be asked)
21. Explain briefly the process of Equalization and Neutralization of waste water of varying
characteristics discharged from an Industry.
22. Explain briefly the Physical treatments “Sedimentation” and “Floatation” processes in the
waste water treatment.
23. Explain briefly when and how chemical / biological treatments are given to the waste water.
24. List the four common advanced waste water treatment processes and the pollutants they
remove.
25. Describe refractory organics and the method used to remove them from the effluent.
26. Explain biological nitrification and de-nitrification.
27. Describe the basic approaches to land treatment of Industrial Effluent.
28. Describe the locations for the ultimate disposal of sludge and the treatment steps needed
prior to ultimate disposal.
29. List any five Industries, which act as the major sources for Hazardous Air Pollutants.
30. List out the names of any three hazardous air pollutants and their effects on human health.
31. Explain the influence of moisture, temperature and sunlight on the severity of air pollution
effects on materials.
32. Differentiate between acute and chronic health effects from Air pollution.
33. Define the term Acid rain and explain how it occurs.
318 | P a g e
34. Discuss briefly the causes for global warming and its consequences
35. Suggest suitable Air pollution control devices for a few pollutants and sources.
36. Explain how evaporative emissions and exhaust emissions are commonly controlled.
37. What are the harmful elements present in the automobile smokes? How their presence could
be controlled?
38. What is the Advantage of Ozone layer in the atmosphere? State few reasons for its
destruction.
39. Explain the mechanism by which hearing damage occurs.
40. List any five effects of noise other than hearing damage.
41. Explain why impulsive noise is more dangerous than steady state noise.
42. Explain briefly the Source – Path – Receiver concept of Noise control.
43. Where silencers or mufflers are used ? Explain how they reduce the noise.
44. Describe two techniques to protect the receiver from hearing loss when design / redress for
noise control fail.
45. What are the problems faced by the people residing along the side of a railway track and near
to an Airport? What provisions could be made in their houses to reduce the problem?
3. DISASTER MANAGEMENT
1. What is meant by Disaster Management? What are the different stages of Disaster
management?
2. Differentiate Natural Disasters and Man made Disasters with examples.
3. Describe the necessity of Risk identification and Assessment Surveys while planning a
project.
4. What is Disasters recovery and what does it mean to an Industry?
5. What are the factors to be considered while planning the rebuilding works after a major
disaster due to flood / cyclone / earthquake? (Any one may be asked)
6. List out the public emergency services available in the state, which could be approached for
help during a natural disaster.
7. Specify the role played by an Engineer in the process of Disaster management.
8. What is the cause for Earthquakes? How they are measured? Which parts of India are more
vulnerable for frequent earthquakes?
9. What was the cause for the Tsunami 2004 which inflicted heavy loss to life and property along
the coast of Tamilnadu ? Specify its epicenter and magnitude.
10. Specify the Earthquake Hazard Zones in which the following towns of Tamilnadu lie: (a)
Chennai (b) Nagapattinam (c) Coimbatore (d) Madurai (e) Salem.
11. Which parts of India are experiencing frequent natural calamities such as (a) heavy rain fall
(b) huge losses due to floods (c) severe cyclones
319 | P a g e
12. Define basic wind speed. What will be the peak wind speed in (a) Very high damage risk
zone – A, (b) High damage risk zone, (c) Low damage risk zone.
13. Specify the minimum distance from the Sea shore and minimum height above the mean sea
level, desirable for the location of buildings.
14. Explain how the topography of the site plays a role in the disasters caused by floods and
cyclones.
15. Explain how the shape and orientation of buildings could reduce the damages due to
cyclones.
16. What is a cyclone shelter ? When and where it is provided ? What are its requirements ?
17. What Precautionary measures have to be taken by the authorities before opening a dam for
discharging the excess water into a canal/river ?
18. What are the causes for fire accidents ? Specify the remedial measures to be taken in
buildings to avoid fire accidents.
19. What is a fire escape in multistoried buildings ? What are its requirements ?
20. How the imamates of a multistory building are to be evacuted in the event of a fire/Chemical
spill/Toxic Air Situation/ Terrorist attack, (any one may be asked).
21. Describe different fire fighting arrangements to be provided in an Industry.
22. Explain the necessity of disaster warning systems in Industries.
23. Explain how rescue operations have to be carried out in the case of collapse of buildings due
to earthquake / blast / Cyclone / flood.
24. What are the necessary steps to be taken to avoid dangerous epidemics after a flood
disaster?
25. What relief works that have to be carried out to save the lives of workers when the factory
area is suddenly affected by a dangerous gas leak / sudden flooding ?
26. What are the difficulties faced by an Industry when there is a sudden power failure? How such
a situation could be managed?
27. What are the difficulties faced by the Management when there is a group clash between the
workers? How such a situation could be managed?
28. What will be the problems faced by the management of an Industry when a worker dies
because of the failure of a mechanical device due to poor maintenance? How to manage
such a situation ?
29. What precautionary measures have to be taken to avoid accidents to labourers in the Industry
in a workshop / during handling of dangerous Chemicals / during construction of buildings /
during the building maintenance works.
30. Explain the necessity of medical care facilities in an Industry / Project site.
31. Explain the necessity of proper training to the employees of Industries dealing with hazardous
products, to act during disasters.
32. What type of disaster is expected in coal mines, cotton mills, Oil refineries, ship yards and gas
plants?
320 | P a g e
33. What is meant by Emergency Plan Rehearsal? What are the advantages of such
Rehearsals?
34. What action you will take when your employees could not reach the factory site because of
continuous strike by Public Transport workers?
35. What immediate actions you will initiate when the quarters of your factory workers are
suddenly flooded due to the breach in a nearly lake / dam, during heavy rain?
36. What steps you will take to avoid a break down when the workers union of your Industry have
given a strike notice?
37. List out few possible crisis in an organization caused by its workers? What could be the part
of the middle level officials in managing such crisis?
38. What types of warning systems are available to alert the people in the case of predicted
disasters, such as floods, cyclone etc.
39. Explain the necessity of Team work in the crisis management in an Industry / Local body.
40. What factors are to be considered while fixing compensation to the workers in the case of
severe accidents causing disability / death to them?
41. Explain the legal / financial problems the management has to face if safely measures taken
by them are found to be in adequate.
42. Describe the importance of insurance to men and machinery of an Industry dealing with
dangerous jobs.
43. What precautions have to be taken while storing explosives in a match/ fire crackers factory?
44. What are the arrangements required for emergency rescue works in the case of Atomic
Power Plants?
45. Why residential quarters are not constructed nearer to Atomic Power Plants?
LIST OF SUGGESTED PROJECTS

COMPARITIVE STUDY
 Conventional and Composite concrete mixtures
 Light weight construction materials
 Prefabricated and R.C.C. Structures
 Cost and construction procedures for steel and R.C.C. Structures
 Cost and Construction procedures for Prestressed and R.C.C. Structures
ADMIXTURES
 Economy of using flyash in concete
MIX DESIGN
 Comparative study of mix design by different methods
321 | P a g e
SPECIAL TYPES OF CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
 Bamboo as a reinforcing material
 Ferro cement products – water Tanks, Septic tank
 Fibre reinforced concrete
 Self Compacting concrete
PAPER PROJECTS
 Residential Houses
 Primary Health center

 School Buildings
 Guest House
 Panchayat Union Office Building.
 Bank Building
 Post Office Building
 College Building
 Hospital Building
 Hotel Building
 Hostel Building
 Factory Building
 Auditorium
 Shopping Centre
 Community Hall
 Theatre
 Market Building
 Multistoried Car park
 Rural Bus Stand
 Stadium
 Swimming Pool
 Over head tank for a village
 New village road with culvert
322 | P a g e
 Small Bridge
 Plate girder bridge
 Septic Tank for a Colony

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PROJECTS
 Treatment of Wastewater and recirculation for a Colony.
 Solid waste management in a Colony.
 Hydrological data Collection for a river basin/water shed
 Industrial effluent Collection and analysis .
MISCELLANEOUS
 Using Factory waste (such as steel, flyash, thermo cool etc) as substitute for Building
materials
 Low cost Housing
 Rehabilitation of structures
ALLOCATION OF MARKS :
a) Sessional mark for Project Work & Viva Voce:
Project Review I … 10 marks

Project Review II … 10 marks
Attendance … 05 marks
-----------
Total … 25 marks
------------
Proper record to be maintained for the two Project Reviews, and It should be preserved for 2 Semesters
and produced to the flying squad and the inspection team at the time of inspection/verification.
b) Mark Allocation for Project Work & Viva Voce in Board Examination:
Viva Voce 25 marks

Demonstration/Presentation 20 marks
--------------
Total 45 marks
-------------
c) Written Test Mark (from 3 topics for 1 hour duration): $
i) Entrepreneurship 5 questions X 2 marks 10 marks

ii) Environment Management 5 questions X 2 marks 10 marks
iii) Disaster Management 5 questions X 2 marks 10 marks
------------
30marks
------------
$ - Selection of Questions should be from Question Bank, by the External Examiner. No choice need be
given to the candidates.
323 | P a g e
PROJECT WORK & VIVA VOCE IN BOARD
Examination 45 Marks
Written Test Mark (from 3 topics for 1 hour duration) 30 Marks
TOTAL 75 Marks
A neatly prepared PROJECT REPORT has to be submitted individually during the Project
Work & Viva Voce Board examination.
324 | P a g e
SANDWICH DIPLOMA COURSE-INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
21091 Industrial Training I (Report writing & Viva Voce)
21092 Industrial Training II (Report writing & Viva Voce)
1. Introduction
The main objective of the sandwich Diploma course is to mould a well rounded technician
acclimated with industrial environment while being a student in the institution.
The Sandwich Diploma Course study is pursued by students, in 7 Semesters of 3 ½ years

duration, the subjects of 3years-Full Time Diploma Course being regrouped for academic
convenience.
While in the 4th semester students under Industrial Training for 6 months(December through May).
They also do course work in the institution for one day in a week, While in the 7th semester they
undergo another spell of 6 months (June through November) Industrial training.
The Apprenticeship (Amendment) Act 1973 is followed in regulating the Industrial training
procedure for Sandwich Course.
I SEM II SEM III SEM IV SEM V SEM VI SEM VII SEM
Institutional Study
Industrial Training
2. Attendance Certification
Every month students have to get their attendance certified by industrial supervisor in the
prescribed form supplied to them. Students have also to put their signature on the form and submit
it to the institution supervisor. Regularity in attendance and submission of report will be duly
considered while awarding the Internal Assessment mark.
3. Training Reports
The students have to prepare two types of reports:
 Weekly report in the form of diary to be submitted to the concerned staff in-charge of the
institution. This will be reviewed while awarding Internal Assessment marks.
 Comprehensive report at the end of each spell which will be used for Board Examination.
325 | P a g e
3.1 Industrial Training Diary
Students are required to maintain the record of day-to-day work done. Such record is called
Industrial training Diary. Students have to write this report regularly. All days for the week should be
accounted for clearly giving attendance particulars (Presence, absence, Leave, Holidays etc). The
concern Industrial supervisor is to check periodically these progress reports.
3.2 Comprehensive Training Report
In addition to the diary, students are required to submit a comprehensive report on training with
details of the organisation where the training was undergone after attestation by the supervisors.
The comprehensive report should be incorporating study of plant/product/process/construction
along with intensive in-depth study on any one of the topics such as processes, methods, tooling,
construction and equipment, highlighting aspects of quality, productivity and system. The
comprehensive report should be completed in the last week of Industrial training. Any data,
drawings etc should be incorporated with the consent of the Organisation.
a. Scheme of Evaluation
1.1 Internal Assessment Marks
First Review (during 3rd month) : 10 marks
Second Review (during 5th month) : 10 marks
Attendance * : 05 marks (Awarded same as in Theory)
Total : 25 marks
1.2 Board Examination
Presentation about Industrial Training : 20 marks
Comprehensive Training Report : 30 marks
Viva-voce : 25 marks
Total : 75 marks
* For awarding marks to attendance, the Industrial Training attendance has to be

considered.
-QQQ-
326 | P a g e

Civil PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Civil PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Civil PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FULL TIME, SANDWICH & PART TIME

Course Code: 1010, 2010 & 3010

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION

1. Description of the Course:

a. Full Time (3 years)

b. Sandwich (3½ years)

c. Part Time (4 years)

3. Admission to Second year (Lateral Entry):

A pass in HSC ( Academic )# or ( Vocational ) courses mentioned in the Higher Secondary

H.Sc Academic H.Sc Vocational

# Subject to the approval of the AICTE

4. Age Limit:No Age limit.

5. Eligibility for the Award of Diploma:

6. Subjects of Study and Curriculum outline:

A. For Theory Subjects:

i) Subject Attendance 5 Marks

80% - 83% 1 Mark

# - From the Academic year 2011-2012 onwards.

14 Questions X 1 mark …… 14 marks

B. For Practical Subjects:

a) Attendance : 5 Marks (Award of marks same

a) Internal assessment mark for Project Work & Viva Voce:

i) Entrepreneurship 5 questions X 2 marks = 10 marks

Project Work & Viva Voce in Board

A neatly prepared PROJECT REPORT as per the format has to be submitted by

1. Classification of successful candidates:

14. Duration of a period in the Class Time Table:

8 Dr. K. Natarajan, Ph. D.,

9 Thiru A.P. Arul Manickam , M.E.,M.I.E.,M.I.S.E.,

10. Dr. R. Senthil, Ph.D.,

11. Dr. E. S. M. Suresh, Ph.D.,

HOURS PER WEEK

HOURS PER WEEK

HOURS PER WEEK

HOURS PER WEEK

HOURS PER WEEK

HOURS PER WEEK

HOURS PER WEEK

HOURS PER WEEK

HOURS PER WEEK

HOURS PER WEEK

HOURS PER WEEK

HOURS PER WEEK

HOURS PER WEEK

HOURS PER WEEK

HOURS PER WEEK

11031 Engineering Mechanics

11043 Transportation Engineering

11046 Surveying Practice II

11051 Structural Engineering Structural Engineering

V 11072 Elements of Interior Design

11055 Construction Lab Practice Construction Practice Lab

11061 Construction Management with MIS Construction Management with MIS

11066 Project Work Project work

DIRECTORATE OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION

Course Name : DIPLOMA IN CIVIL ENGINEERING

TEACHING AND SCHEME OF EXAMINATION:

No. of weeks per semester: 16 weeks

On completion of the course, the student will be familiar with: